Ingles Profesor Teens Club

GUA DIDCTICA PARA EL PROFESOR
INCLUYE TEXTO PARA EL ESTUDIANTE
Lina Alvarado Jantus
EDICIN ESPECIAL PARA EL MINISTERIO DE EDUCACIN

PROHIBIDA SU COMERCIALIZACIN AO 2010
GUIA DIDCTICA PARA EL PROFESOR - INCLUYE TEXTO PARA EL ESTUDIANTE
I ngls
Medio
Lina Alvarado Jantus

Teacher of English
Instituto Profesional Chileno-Britnico
2010 Ediciones R&B

Teen Club 1 Medio
Original text
Lina Alvarado Jantus.

Teacher of English
Instituto Profesional Chileno-Britnico.
Original illustrations
Design
Ediciones R&B
Ediciones R&B
Publisher
Assistant Publisher
Designed by
Cover designed by
Layout by
Proofreading
Illustrations
Production
Recording Producer
Photos
Gloria Caro Opazo.

Ly-Sen Lam Daz.
Cristina Sepulveda Aravena.
Thomas Connelly.
Fernando Santander Tiozzo.
Ediciones R&B.
Rodrigo Gonzlez Daz.
Archivos Ediciones R&B
N de Inscripcin: 183.657
ISBN: 978-956-8694-07-4
All rights reserved; no part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system,
transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publisher.
La materialidad y fabricacin de este texto est certificado por el IDIEM - Universidad de Chile.
Impreso RR Donnelley
Se termin de imprimir 9.001 ejemplares en el mes de enero de 2010.
CONTENTS
PLAN OF THE BOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
DESCRIPTION OF THE COURSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Student's Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Teacher's Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
TEENS CLUB METHODOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Skills development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Communicative skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Language structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Vocabulary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Cognates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
False cognates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Learner training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Classroom management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Discipline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Large classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Pairwork and groupwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Self-assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Photocopiable evaluation instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Error alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
SOME BASIC TEACHING REMINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
THE INTERNET IN THE CLASSROOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Tips to develop safe Internet lessons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
LEARNING PROGRESS MAPS AS SUPPORT
MATERIAL FOR TEACHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
CLASSROOM LANGUAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
SUGGESTED YEAR PLANNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
UNIT 1: TEEN LIFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Extra tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Answers to extra test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
UNIT 2: BELIEVE IT OR NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Extra tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
UNIT 3: TECHNOLOGY AND INVENTIONS . . . . . . . . . . 70
Extra tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
UNIT 4: SONGS - MUSIC AND WORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Extra tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Answers to extra test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
UNIT 5: HOW ABOUT WORKING? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Extra tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Answers to extra test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
EVALUATION INSTRUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Applying Evaluation Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
PHOTOCOPIABLE EVALUATION INSTRUMENTS . . . . 155
Evaluating listening comprehension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Evaluating reading comprehension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Writing rubric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Working with others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Homework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Oral presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Class participation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Extended-response reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Inference from a text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Questionnaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
BIBLIOGRAPHY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
DESCRIPTION OF THE COURSE

Teens Club has been written for teenagers in their first year of
secondary school. It aims to appeal to teens through imaginative
and exciting topics, introduces up-to-date language and
expressions, increases confidence through learner independence
activities, provides regular opportunities for review and selfassessment, and deals with different learning styles. For the
teacher, it offers materials and tools for successful lessons, with
full support at every stage.
The book takes into account that teenagers are going through a
challenging period of their lives, with great physical, social, and
psychological changes.
The main objective of Teens Club is to appeal to teenagers by
providing them with materials that reflect their own reality.
Although the language is clear and progresses along the course,
the aim is to enable students to read, listen to, and express what
is relevant and of interest to them at their particular age, so that
they enjoy the language learning process. It provides a broad
range of materials to engage students in challenging, but
achievable tasks. The different topics that have been included
give the students the opportunity for cross-curricular and crosscultural work so that they can learn about life and the world at
the same time as they learn English.
Through guided questions and simple discussions, students are
encouraged to express and hold their opinions on issues that concern
their lives and the world around them. Cultural aspects are also
highlighted at relevant points. Aspects of English-speaking countries,
such as information related to school life and subjects, historical and
geographical facts, cultural heritage and teenage styles are meant to
raise students' awareness of the target culture, and at the same time
develop a richer perspective of their own culture.
As it is important for students to learn how to learn, Teens Club
provides opportunities to experiment and revise learning styles.
It also aims to develop language learning strategies which suit
each of them.
COURSE COMPONENTS
Teens Club consists of a Student's Book, a Teacher's Book and a CD.
Students Book
At the beginning of the book there is a list of contents and an
explanation of the symbols used. At the end, there is list of verbs
and a bibliography for students.
INTRODUCTION
The Student's Book is divided into 5 units, each one based on a

different topic:
Unit 1: Teen Life
Unit 2: Challenges
Unit 3: Technology and Inventions
Unit 4: Music and Literature
Unit 5: Teen Work
Each unit has two reading and two listening lessons. In each
lesson, there is a Reflection Spot to allow students to think about
their achievements and weaknesses, and there is also a Let's check
section, the purpose of which is to allow students to evaluate
their progress on a particular aspect of the lesson and, at the
same time, to provide information to the teacher about any
points that the majority of the students have problems with.
At the end of each unit, there are three additional sections:
Your English in Action provides additional activities that provide
a good opportunity for students to consolidate topics and
language structures of the lessons.
Unit Check has a test format covering the four skills and the
language studied in the unit. It helps students revise contents
and evaluate their performance in the whole unit.
Final Reflection offers students a summary of what they have
learnt in the unit, allows them to reflect on their strengths and
weaknesses, and guides them to make decisions concerning
actions to take in order to improve.
The units also include Real Life Spots, which aim to allow students
to make connections between the topic of the lesson and real life,
or bring a bit of humor to the class together with additional
information that may be useful for them. Teachers should
encourage students to take advantage of these spots and find
further information or connections with the topics.
Teens Club includes a Game Spot in many of the lessons. Games
are highly motivating since they are amusing and at the same
time challenging for the students, they provide an opportunity to
use language in real contexts and they also encourage and
increase cooperation. They create the motivation for learners of
English to get involved and participate actively in the learning
activities, bring real world context into the classroom, and
enhance students' use of English in a flexible, communicative
way. Games are used in the classroom not only for mere fun, but
more importantly, for the useful practice and review of language.
Thus, the meaning of the language the students listen to, read,
speak and write will be more vividly experienced and, therefore

better remembered.
CD
The CD includes all the material for the listening tasks in the
lessons, the oral practice exercises, and the listening component
of all the tests (Unit Check and Extra Tests).
This is the icon used in the Student's Book to indicate that
recorded material is used.
1
This is the icon used in the Teacher's Book to indicate that

recorded material is used; it includes the corresponding
track number.
Teacher's Book
This component offers support to the teacher through several
elements:
An introduction with a description of the course, the
methodology used, suggestions for classroom management,
general methodological suggestions for the activities and to
deal with big classes, description of the course components, etc.
A suggested year planning that establishes the relationship
between the contents and the expected learning outcomes,
tentative time distribution, resources and types of evaluation.
Step-by-step lesson notes and suggestions, including ideas to
start each lesson, as well as follow-up activities and suggestions
for homework.
The cognitive abilities to develop in every activity of the
lessons (L.A.).
Background information related to the information content of
the different texts, to help the teacher deal with students'
questions.
An Error Alert! section that helps the teacher with information
about mistakes students can make together with additional
exercises to practice these specific points. They are shown in the
Teacher's Book as part of the guidelines for the activities in
which they may occur.
Photocopiable observation and evaluation sheets for the
teacher and the students.
The answers to all the activities in the Student's Book and in the tests.
Full transcripts of the recorded material: listening texts, oral
practice activities, listening tests.
One extra test per unit.
A complete bibliography for the teacher.

Classification of the activities in the lessons according to their
level of difficulty, indicated with the following icons:
+ Low ++ Medium +++ High
One activity for fast learners in each lesson (FL).
Icons to indicate the language ability to be developed:
READING LISTENING SPEAKING WRITING
Other icons used in the Students Book.

Key Word Spot
Reflection Spot
LANGUAGE SPOT
REAL LIFE SPOT
GAME SPOT
LETS CHECK
@
@@ CLICK ON
TEENS CLUB METHODOLOGY

Teens Club helps students develop language learning skills to
carry out tasks related to the content. In every lesson, there are
tasks which consolidate the linguistic and thematic content. The
activities are designed to provide students with the language and
skills they will need complete the tasks successfully. This
approach helps students to see language as a necessary tool, and
gives the grammatical and lexical content a clear purpose.
Skills development
The methodology adopts a three-phase approach with before,
while and after listening and reading activities.
The Before Reading / Listening activities provide a setting,
motivation and linguistic preparation; they activate the previous
knowledge about the topic of the lesson, motivate students to
read or listen and encourage them to predict and anticipate
information.
The Reading / Listening activities focus students' attention and
teach them to look for specific information, find clues and
discriminate between essential and non-essential information.
The After Reading / Listening activities connect the text with the
students' own reality, give practice on specific grammar points
and help develop writing and speaking skills.
Communicative skills
Most students evaluate their language ability by how well
they can speak. Speaking activities are present in Teens Club
right from the start and they are integrated with the other
skills to encourage communication. Even in the first stages of
learning, with only a limited knowledge of vocabulary and
structures, students want and are able to communicate. The
speaking tasks give students an additional opportunity to use
new language in the context of a real life task, carried out in
pairs or with a group of classmates, and following models
provided.
Writing activities are also an integral part of each lesson, with a
variety of tasks the students must accomplish during the class or
as homework, with varying degrees of support and guidance.
Language structure
In Teens Club, grammar is approached in a clearly structured yet
meaningful way. The students are presented with an inductive
task in a section called Language Spot in which they have to figure
out how the structure works in English, discovering both use and
INTRODUCTION
form. Then they do controlled practice exercises where they apply

the target structure in communicative situations.
Vocabulary
The key vocabulary in each lesson is presented in the Key Word
Spot. There are vocabulary activities through which students
develop effective strategies for learning and keeping vocabulary
records. A systematic use of dictionaries is encouraged.
Cognates
Cognates are words in different languages related to the same
root. The lessons in Teens Club provide students with exercises to
help them notice and recognize them, helping them increase
their self-confidence by discovering how much these words help
them to understand a text. The teacher should encourage
students to find the cognates whenever they face a new text.
False Cognates
Students might get confused because there are several words in
Spanish that are similar in English, but have a different meaning.
They are indicated in the Error Alert! Section of the Teachers
Book.
Here are a few examples of false cognates:
Actually = really, not actualmente (at present, currently).
Embarrassed = avergonzado/a, not embarazada (pregnant).
Approve = aprobar = agree with something, not aprobar un
examen (pass an exam).
Lecture = conferencia = a talk about a topic, not lectura
(reading).
Politics = la poltica, not los polticos (politicians)
Library = biblioteca, not librera (bookstore)
Familiar = estar familiarizado con, not familiar (relative)
Parents = padres, father and mother, not parientes (relatives).
Learner Training
Learner training is about developing students' awareness of how
they learn and how they develop their learning strategies to
become more effective and independent learners. Teachers
should encourage students to analyze their learning process,
making them think about the problems they have faced and how
they could improve their performance. This is supported in Teens
Club with a section called Reflection Spot.
Classroom management
In most cases the teacher is the only direct contact the students
have with English. Therefore, it is important that the teacher tries
to communicate with the students in English as much as possible.
Teachers can also use gestures or mime to help understanding.
Instructions for all the activities in Teens Club are given clearly
and simply, and teachers should encourage students to read and
interpret them on their own, and support them whenever
necessary through demonstration and examples.
Discipline
Teenage students are going through a difficult period of
development in their lives, so the teacher might face discipline
problems, disruptive behavior, or unwillingness to do the tasks
they are assigned.
One of the reasons for bad discipline is usually the students'
inability to cope with the tasks. To avoid these problems, two
preventive strategies are suggested:
Careful planning. Students realize there is a purpose which
keeps their attention on the task.
Clear instructions. Instructions must be given clearly and
assertively, including time limits whenever possible, so that
students know what to do and when they should finish the task.
Large classes
Large mixed-ability classes are a reality teachers have to face
every day. Grouping is one technique that is used to reduce the
negative effects of this situation. When the class is divided into
smaller units, many learning activities can be undertaken. This
implies a different role for the teacher; this does not mean that he
/ she will become less active in the classroom, but that he / she
will not be the center of the activities. Teachers who monitor,
encourage and participate in different classroom groups are even
more active than traditional teachers.
By re-organizing the classroom to allow more opportunities for
communicative interactions and activities, students will be in a
better position to practice and acquire the foreign language.
Pairwork and groupwork
One of the ways of giving students the time they require to
practice a language in class is by forming groups or pairs. This
helps teachers to individualize their learners, provides
opportunities for sharing experiences and it may also help
teachers to accommodate learner differences by varying

student roles.
Teachers must bear in mind that this type of work encourages
students to share their skills and knowledge, and to learn from
each other. It also increases students' involvement and active
participation, and develops positive attitudes.
It is important to share with the students the importance of these
activities that give them an opportunity to reinforce social and
communicative skills required to work with other people.
The teacher should take an active role in group and pair
formation, and students should take different roles each time.
Assessment
Assessment is one of the most valuable sources of information
about what is happening in the classroom. The involvement of
the students in this process makes their attitudes towards their
learning change significantly and they start to feel more
responsible for their progress.
In Teens Club, assessment is ongoing. The teacher assesses
continuously, in every activity, in every lesson, to see how far a
student is making progress in line with the objectives. He / she
uses the information obtained to help students with specific
problems. In each lesson there is one activity to evaluate one
particular aspect of that lesson, in the section called Let's
Check.
There is also overall assessment, periodically, at the end of each
unit, with test format, the Unit Check, which includes evaluation
activities of all the skills and language studied in the unit.
Teachers should encourage students to correct and mark their
Unit Check themselves, either on their own or in small groups.
Finally, at the very end of each unit there is a Final Reflection
section, which guides students to analyze their performance in
the whole unit. All these forms of assessment complement
each other.
Self-assessment
In Teens Club, self-assessment takes place in each lesson, so that
students have the opportunity to reflect on their progress and
their main problems. This type of assessment helps students to
become more efficient learners, as well as make them feel more
responsible for their own learning.
This is done lesson by lesson through the Reflection Spot, where
students are asked to think about their abilities to perform the
tasks, how well they did and the difficulties they encountered. In
the Let's Check and Unit Check sections, the students evaluate
themselves to become aware of their progress and in the Final
Reflection section they analyze their performance and make
decisions concerning steps they can take to improve.
Photocopiable Evaluation Instruments
The Teacher's Book offers a selection of rubrics and evaluation
sheets that the teacher can use in different situations, with
different purposes and with different students. The labels and
criteria can be adapted to the class situation, the topics covered,
the number of students, etc. They can be used by the teacher to
evaluate the students, or by the students to evaluate themselves
and / or their peers. As with all evaluation instances, these must
be used to inform the teacher and the students of the progress

made, the areas that need revision and the level of achievement
of learning goals. The teacher may use the results of these
evaluation instances as part of the final mark of the students; the
students must be informed of the system applied. The teacher
must give the students the instrument so that they can analyze it,
draw conclusions and make decisions.
Error Alert
Teens Club provides the teacher with help in connection with
common mistakes students might make, together with
additional exercises to practice these specific points. They are
shown in the Teacher's Book as part of the guidelines for the
activities in which they may occur.
SOME BASIC TEACHING REMINDERS

Start every lesson in a way that focuses everyone's attention.
This creates expectation and prepares students for what is to
come. For example, with books closed, write the topic of the
lesson on the board and ask some questions about it, show a
poster / picture related to the lesson, ask who can remember
what they did the previous class, etc.
Students should not open their books until everyone is paying
attention.
End an activity before students get bored with it. Equally, do not
hurry the students or end the activity too soon if they are
obviously enjoying it.
Ask students their opinion.
Don't assume that if one student says they understand,
everyone else does.
Ask (elicit) rather than tell. Students get bored of listening to
the teacher explaining. Someone in the class will probably
know the answer.
Don't ask students to explain difficult things, such as definitions
of words, in English.
Don't interrupt students during pair / group speaking activities to
correct their English. It is better to note the main, common
mistakes, put them on the board and correct them with the class at
the end.
10
INTRODUCTION
Don't insist on 100% accuracy all the time. Mistakes are a

normal part of the learning process, and a valuable source of
information for the teacher.
Give praise and encouragement, especially to the weaker
students. Write positive comments on their work. Let them
know what they are doing well, as well as what they need to
improve.
Remember that you are the main motivator in the classroom!
Some methodological suggestions for skill

development
Developing listening skills
Follow the organization of activities into before, while and after
listening.
Before listening:
- Introduce and get students involved in the topic of the text.
Elicit what they know about it and help them relate it to their
own experiences. Make use of the illustrations provided and /
or use your own.
- Use this introduction of the topic to present key vocabulary
and structures, and write them on the board.
- Invite students to predict the content and to formulate

hypotheses of what will appear in the text.
- Do these activities quickly and take advantage of the interest
created to continue with the listening activities.
Listening:
- Play the recording once or twice for students to check their
predictions and hypotheses. Accept other information they may
have gathered, but do not go into details at this stage, just
concentrate on the general idea.
- Remind students of cognate words, which they can identify more
easily when they listen, and which help comprehension and
consequent task realization.
- Read and clarify instructions with the class, and do the different
listening activities one by one, concentrating on the task
assigned and checking answers after each successive listening.
Every time students listen to the text, they should have a clear
purpose and task, provided in the instructions, which will help
them focus their attention and identify the information required.
- Help students recognize different supporting elements in the
spoken texts: intonation, voice pitch, pauses, emphasis,
background noise, etc.
experiences. Make use of the illustrations provided and / or use

your own.
- Use this introduction of the topic to present key vocabulary and
structures, and write them on the board.
- Invite students to predict the content and to formulate
hypotheses of what will appear in the text.
- Always ask students to give a quick look at the text and identify
the cognate words and the words they already know. This will
help them formulate more informed hypotheses and also help
them feel less insecure when facing a new text.
- Draw students' attention to the structure of the text: layout,
punctuation, titles, subtitles, etc., to identify the type of text they
will be reading, all of which will also provide clues that will help
them understand the text.
- Do these activities quickly and take advantage of the interest
created to continue with the reading activities.
Developing reading skills

Follow the organization of activities into before, while and after
reading.
Reading:
- First, ask students to read the text quickly to check their
predictions and hypotheses. Accept other information they
may have gathered, but do not go into details at this stage,
just concentrate on the general idea.
- Remind students of cognates words, which they can
identify easily, and which help comprehension and
consequent task realization. Present false cognates if there are
any in the text.
- Read and clarify instructions with the class, and do the different
reading activities one by one, concentrating on the task assigned
and checking answers after each successive reading. Every time
students read the text, they should have a clear purpose and
task, provided in the instructions, which will help them focus
their attention and identify the information required.
- Help students recognize different supporting elements in the
written texts: text organization, reference markers, letter
types, graphic support, punctuation marks, illustrations, etc.
- Remind students of some general characteristics of text
organization: main ideas are usually at the beginning of each
paragraph, connectors give important clues -and indicates
addition, but, however indicate contradiction, because
indicates a reason, or indicates alternatives, etc.
Before reading:
- Introduce and get students involved in the topic of the text. Elicit
what they know about it and help them relate it to their own
After reading:
- Help students summarize the text orally and / or in writing
using the models provided.
After listening:
- Help students summarize the text orally and / or in writing using
the models provided.
- Encourage reinforcement of vocabulary and grammar that
appeared in the text, always using the context and providing
further examples or similar contexts.
- Discuss the topic of the lesson, help students reflect on the
contents and highlight the values presented, making them
notice the connections with their own reality.
- Make students evaluate their own performance in the lesson.
a. Did their predictions help them understand the text?
b. How did they do in the different listening activities?
c. What new words, expressions or structures did they learn in
this lesson? Can they use them in other situations?
11
- Encourage reinforcement of vocabulary and grammar that

appeared in the text, always using the context and providing
further examples or similar contexts.
- Discuss the topic of the lesson, help students reflect on the
contents and highlight the values presented, making them notice
the connections with their own reality.
- Make use of the activities for fast learners (FL) or of Your English
in Action in the Student's Book and of the Extra Tests in the
Teacher's Book to provide further practice in a freer context, either
for the whole class or for with faster, keener students. Invite them
to make comments on the contents and share them with the rest
of the class.
- Encourage students to make use of the Reflections section to
evaluate their own performance in the lesson.
Developing oral expression
At the beginning of the course, prepare a poster / posters with the
class, showing the expressions they must use as part of the classroom
interaction. You may use different colors to classify them into:
a. Greetings: Good morning, good afternoon, hello, hi, good-bye,
bye. How are you today? I'm (not) very well, thank you. And you?
Teach them to address you as Mr. / Miss / Mrs. plus your surname.
b. Asking for help or clarification: How do you say / spell /
pronounce ...?, Can you help me, please? Can you repeat,
please? Can you play the recording again, please? Can I / we use
the dictionary / the computer? Can I work with ...? Can you tell /
give me ...?
c. Expressing feelings: I'm sorry / happy / impressed / tired / ill
/ worried. I'd be happy to ... . I like ... . I don't like ... . I liked ... . I
didn't like ... .
Encourage students to use English to do the different speaking
activities that show comprehension.
Choose relevant parts of the listening texts, especially dialogues,
for students to listen to, repeat, try to memorize and present in
front of the class.
Create a positive atmosphere in the classroom to facilitate students'
participation in oral exchanges.
Developing written expression
Always provide a model for students to follow. Go from simple, very
guided activities to more complex ones: just words that students
use to fill in blanks, or exercises in which they put words in order to
form sentences, short answers to simple questions, using a pattern
given and substituting some elements, etc.
Make students aware of punctuation marks and connectors to be
used.
Check written work while walking around the classroom, by
collecting notebooks, or by providing the correct versions on the
board or on a transparency.
THE INTERNET IN THE CLASSROOM

Nowadays, in the era of information revolution and the widespread
use of the Internet in almost all spheres of life, this tool can serve as
a teaching medium, a rich source of materials of any kind and also
as a basis for lessons instead of texts from the course book only.
people from different parts of the world and therefore practice their
English in a meaningful and motivating way.
Internet -assisted lessons may supplement teaching by adding an

additional dimension to the classroom. Students can use it to gather
information on different topics or search for additional exercises to
practice a particular language item.
@@ CLICK ON
The Internet gives great possibilities for students to work with

materials they choose themselves and offers an attractive and
interactive learning environment.
This is achieved by the use of communication tools such as e-mail,
chat or forum groups, which students can use to communicate with
12
INTRODUCTION
This icon indicates a digital resource used / suggested for an activity.
Tips to develop safe Internet lessons

Never start lessons by having students use search engines on
their own.
Ask students to find specific information, not just surf the web.
Always tell students to write down the URLs of the sites they use
for reports in bibliography format.
Try to preview sites before students visit them.
LEARNING PROGRESS MAPS AS SUPPORT MATERIAL FOR TEACHING 11

What we have in common makes us human. Our differences make
us individuals. In a classroom where there is very little or no
differentiated teaching only the similarities among students seem
to be the focus of attention. In a differentiated class the common
areas are acknowledged and exploited, and the differences among
students also become important elements in the teaching
learning process.
Carol Ann Tomlinson 12
The Chilean Ministry of Education has presented the community

with a new curricular tool, the Learning Progress Maps. It is
possible that the teachers may have a lot of information about
them, from different and probably more complete sources than
those provided here 13. This brief and concise document does not
intend to be exhaustive nor replace any of those sources. It only
wishes to present the Maps in a particularly specific context, that
of a very specific training in evaluation for learning, as in that area
they can be very useful in the different steps of that training.
This is a brief introduction to the Maps that considers the
inclusion principle that guides them, the way in which they are
presented, an example and some details to understand their
pedagogical and evaluative usefulness. Rather than theoretical or
conceptual details, special importance is given to the elements
that facilitate their use by teachers.
Introduction
The Learning Progress Maps have been developed to show
teachers, students and parents the way in which learning
progresses along school life, and especially the expected direction
for each of the areas of the curriculum. They are neither a new
curriculum nor a curricular alternative, but are based on the
existing Curricular Framework. Their objective is to describe the
types of learning promoted by the Fundamental Objectives and
the Obligatory Minimum Contents, and to indicate the
characteristics of their development from 5th Year of Primary
Education to 4th year of Secondary Education. The Maps can be
used in the day to day classroom work to establish the students

position, their differences and their learning needs. Once this
reflection and awareness task is done, it is possible to design a
variety of teaching strategies to cater for the students needs.
Learning progression and diversity
Childrens learning as shown every day in the teaching process
- shows progressive development as they move up from one level
to the next. Older students generally know more about a subject
and show more complex cognitive abilities than younger
students; when comparing abilities and knowledge of a 4th Media
student with those of a 1st Bsica student, it can easily be noticed
that the former is much more competent than the latter in all the
learning areas. Between these two students, who represent the
extreme levels of achievement during the school cycle, it is
possible to distinguish several intermediate stages.
On the other hand, children in a particular level make use of
different abilities to understand the same topic, and have
different ways to explain what they understand. There is
progression not only from one level to the next; it is normal that
in the same class the students are at different levels and show
different degrees of understanding and achievement of the
required abilities.
However, not all students progress in the expected direction.
Inadequate attention to differences can produce delay in the
students learning. This delay, in turn, has a cumulative effect, it
tends to increase in the upper levels, and when this happens, its
effects are more difficult to revert. Therefore, it is important to
know the state of students learning very well.
The Learning Progress Maps are a supporting instrument to
diagnose achievement and differences among students to help
them move on in their school work according to the expected
outcomes promoted by the national curriculum; they offer
common criteria and language to observe learning.
11
Document prepared by the Unidad de Currculum y Evaluacin, Ministry of Education, Chile, 2007.
Tomlinson, Carol Ann, Estrategias para Trabajar con la Diversidad en el Aula, Editorial Paids, Madrid, 2005.
13
The full Maps are published in the web site of the Unidad de Currculum y Evaluacin, www.curriculum-mineduc.cl.
12
13
Evaluation for Learning in Practice

It is important to distinguish Evaluation for Learning as a
particular model that is different from the traditional
interpretations of evaluation. Here is a summary of its main
characteristics. In this conception, evaluation:
Is considered an intrinsic part of teaching and learning.
Requires that teachers share with their students the learning
achievements expected from them.
Helps students know and identify the standards they must
reach.
Involves students in their own evaluation.
Provides feedback that tells students what they have to do, step
by step, to improve their performance.
Assumes that every student can improve his / her performance.
Involves both teachers and students in the analysis and
reflection on the data provided by the evaluation.
This model contrasts with the type of evaluation that, in practice,
means adding evaluation procedures or tests at the end of the
programmed units of work. These procedures or tests are separable
and independent from the teaching of the unit. The feedback is to
get a mark. Although, according to this model, evaluation is a
teachers issue (the State, for example, does not get involved), it
tends to have a summative rather than formative objective.
However, the term formative can have several interpretations:
very often it only means that evaluation is frequent in a period of
time and has been planned together with the teaching. In this
sense formative evaluation does not necessarily consider all the
features identified as characteristic of Evaluation for Learning.
Evaluation can be formative because it helps the teacher identify
areas where more explanation or training are needed. But from
the point of view of the students, their final mark and the
comments written on the margins of their work, although they
may signal their weak and strong points, they do not give them
clues as to how to progress towards the achievement of more and
better learning.
The concept of learning underlying this model is another
distinctive feature. Todays approach to learning suggests that,
eventually, it is the students themselves who are responsible for
their own learning (nobody can learn for them). Consequently,
14
INTRODUCTION
Evaluation for Learning must necessarily involve the students in

the evaluation process so as to provide information on their
performance and guide their efforts to improve. An important
part of this information is the feedback the teacher gives the
students, but another part must be the result of the direct
participation of the students in this process through selfevaluation. In the context of promoting life-time learning, it is
more and more important to develop in the students the capacity
to know how much they have learnt and the ability to guide and
manage their own learning.
So, what actually happens in the classroom when evaluation is
used to improve learning? To begin with the more obvious
aspects, the teachers are involved in the collection of information
about their students learning and motivate them to revise their
work critically and constructively.
The methods to obtain information about the learning are well
known and they are mainly:
To observe the students and listen to them when they reason
and describe their work.
To ask students open questions, inviting them to explore their
ideas and reasoning.
To propose ideas that require students to use certain abilities or
to apply ideas.
To ask students to communicate their ideas not only in writing
but also through drawings, artefacts, actions, dramatisations
and concept maps.
To discuss key words and analyse how they must be used.
Of course, teachers can collect this information through the
methods identified above, and then use it to improve learning. The
use of this information requires that teachers and students make
decisions and act: they must decide on the next steps in the
learning process and help students get started. It is of the utmost
importance to remember that it is the students who must do the
walking; consequently, the students who are more involved in the
process will better understand how to extend and improve their
learning. A plan that involves the students in the judgement of
their own work instead of being passive to face the judgements
of teachers has higher probabilities of raising the learning and
achievement standards.
This is a different conception of feedback. The food the teacher

offers is a portrait of the objective to reach, of the standard or
goal towards which the student must aim and which, in this way,
constitutes a point of comparison for his / her work. The role of
the teacher and what constitutes the core of teaching is to
provide the students with the skills and strategies required to
take the steps they need to improve their own learning.
Key Principles of Evaluation for Learning
Evaluation is a process that allows the recollection of evidence on
the learning achieved by the students at a given moment. The
object of the evaluation is the work produced by the student,
never the student.
The key dimensions of learning from the point of view of the
learning area and the learning level of the students constitute
the criteria used for the evaluation of learning.
The criteria must be shared with the students so that they know and
understand them, and for them to direct their work accordingly.
Self-evaluation and peer-evaluation must be done using preestablished criteria. If this does not happen their validity will be
questionable, because different individuals naturally evaluate
according to their own personal criteria.
It must be remembered that evaluation necessarily involves
value judgements. This happens when a teacher assigns a
numerical qualification to a students test, and also when
concepts are used, for example poor or excellent to indicate a
students level of achievement at a certain moment.
The teacher must take responsibility for the evaluation
instruments he / she develops and uses with the students; this
means that he / she must make sure that they really let him /
her collect information about the learning outcomes defined in
the pre-established evaluation criteria.
What Learning Progress Maps are and what they are not.
What LPM are
What LPM are not
They are materials for each area of the curriculum that describe the
usual road followed by students in their learning. They assume that
progress is the result of maturity and exposure to learning
opportunities in specific stages of school life.
They do not state that learning is lineal (a sum of specific learnings)

nor do they propose an exact description of the learning progress that
all students experience.
They express knowledge and abilities, that is to say, the competences

that students typically reach at certain moments of their school life.
They are not an expression of all the knowledge and abilities the
students can achieve in a specific level.
They indicate what we value as learning goals and the sequence in

which they are achieved; they provide a framework to monitor
progress and communicate results.
They are not a new curriculum and they do not assume that all the
students in the same class should be in the same level of learning.
They are presented as concrete descriptions of learning and offer

examples of possible achievements in each level.
They are not checklists for test correction.
They provide a guiding framework for teaching: they let users

elaborate evaluation tasks that will indicate the level of each student,
and organise teaching strategies accordingly.
They are not an instrument to classify students and they do not

support a specific teaching model to achieve learning.
15
How many LPM have been prepared?

Each area of the curriculum has sub-divisions that represent
topics or abilities that must be developed during school life. A
Map has been designed for each of them.
English
Our countrys active participation in different areas of the
international sphere, together with the changes produced by
globalisation, make the learning of English essential to
successfully face the demands of society in the XXI century.
Learning English is a challenging and attractive activity at any age,
but particularly for young people who see it as a tool to access
information and technology and as a means of communication with
other realities and cultures. Learning English or any other foreign
language, contributes to the understanding of the mother tongue,
and at the same time it widens the opportunities to access
information in other areas of study.
Presentation of the Maps
The Maps are organised in seven levels that cover students
learning life from 1st year of Primary Education to 4th year of
Secondary Education. Each level describes the expected learning
outcome for two school years. For example, level 1 corresponds
approximately to 1st and 2nd Bsico, level 2 to the next two
years, and so on. The last level (7) describes a student whose
outcome when finishing school is outstanding.
All this information can be found in the web site of the Unidad de
Currculum y Evaluacin, www.curriculum-mineduc.cl.
Relevant aspects of the Reading Map
In concordance with the curricular emphasis aimed at the
development of the abilities and the use of language with the
purpose of acquiring information and gainning access to other
cultures and technological advances, grammar is not the focus of
attention of the Reading Map. Its role as facilitator of
understanding and communication is acknowledged, but the role
of grammar will become more evident in the Writing Map.
The Reading Map emphasises the importance of working with
authentic texts as early as possible; their degree of complexity
increases as students move from one level to the next. By the end
16
INTRODUCTION
of their secondary school education students should be able to

read authentic texts of intermediate complexity, which implies
beginning their learning using simple authentic texts.
The Reading Map does not reject the use of the mother tongue as
a resource to monitor learning when the situation requires that
the students show evidence of comprehension and interpretation
rather than oral production. It is a well-known fact that students
of a foreign language can understand much more than they can
express orally or in writing. For this reason, the answers to the
tasks presented as examples in the Map are in Spanish. This does
not mean that the students are not allowed to express
comprehension in English or that there is an intention to work
these abilities separately.
In the following pages you will find the Reading Progress Map. It
begins with a synthetic presentation of all the level. Then, each level
is presented in detail, beginning with its description, some examples
of performance that illustrate how that level of learning can be
recognised and one or two examples of work done by students of
subsidised schools, with the teachers comments that justify what
criteria is used to decide that the student is within the level. In an
appendix, you can find the complete version of the tasks from which
the students work was collected. In the case of English, there is a
description of an initial level, before level 3, that describes a starting
situation of knowledge of this language, which can be a useful point
of reference to describe the learning of children who do not reach
level 3 by the end of 6th Bsico. No examples of students work at this
level are included.
Reading Progress Map
The aim of the English curriculum is to get students to use and
apply the language in different tasks that imply they can
understand oral and written texts, and solve simple
communicative situations orally or in writing. From this point of
view, four English Learning Maps have been designed, around the
following linguistic abilities:
Reading
Listening
Writing
Oral Expression
The Maps of English have been designed using the international

standards of the Common European Framework (CEF) for
teaching, learning and evaluating languages, and those of the
Association of Language Testers of Europe (ALTE). CEF level A2 and
ALTE 1 (Waystage User) are associated to level 4, which describes
the expected learning achieved by the majority of the students by
the end of 8th year Bsico; level B1 and ALTE 2 (Threshold user) are
associated to level 6, which describes the expected learning
achieved by the majority of students by the end of 4th Medio.
To describe progress in reading comprehension, the Reading Map
is organised around two dimensions:
a. Text-types. In this dimension the progression is given by the
complexity of the topics the students read about and the
complexity of the language used in the texts. There is
progression from concrete to abstract topics, and from
language expressed in simple sentences to language

expressed in compound sentences of intermediate complexity.
b. Reading abilities. This dimension includes the students
capacity to extract specific information, to infer information
and to show global comprehension of what they have read.
The Map describes how these reading abilities become more
complex from one level to the next, also in relationship with
the increasing complexity of the texts read.
In the light of these dimensions, the Map describes a students
reading comprehension progress, from the ability to identify some
highlighted information, to make simple inferences and state the
main topic of a very short, simple text (in level 3), to end up being
able to reach a higher level of inference and a deeper understanding
of linguistically and conceptually more complex texts. (level 6).
English Progress Map

Identifies explicit and implicit messages and incorporates knowledge of the topic and of the English language to build up the
Level 7
Outstanding main meaning. Understands texts that include a variety of simple and medium complexity structural patterns and are related
to personal interest topics.
Level 6
Identifies explicit key information, discriminating it from distractors. Infers ideas and identifies messages, points of view,
attitudes to build up the main meaning of the text. Understands texts that include a variety of simple and medium
complexity structural patterns and are related to well-known or personal interest topics.
Level 5
Identifies explicit key information, discriminating it from other similar information. Infers suggested messages or ideas and
identifies main ideas, stating supporting data. Understands texts that include simple structural patterns and medium
Level 4
Identifies explicit key information, discriminating it from secondary information. Makes simple inferences relating ideas or
information, and identifies with some detail the main idea(s) explicitly stated, relating information found in different sections
of the text. Understands brief texts that include simple structural patterns and are related to well-known concrete topics.
Level 3
Identifies explicit information that is highlighted. Infers information and identifies one main idea using information explicitly
stated in the text. Understands very short texts that include plenty of visual support, use simple short sentences and are
related to concrete topics of the students immediate environment.
Initial level Identifies words and short sentences stated in very short texts that include plenty of visual support, use simple short
sentences and are related to concrete topics of the students immediate environment.
In our teaching proposal for 1st and 2nd year, evaluation is conceived from the following level:
Level 5
Identifies explicit key information, discriminating it from other similar information. Infers suggested messages or ideas and
identifies main ideas, stating supporting data. Understands texts that include simple structural patterns and medium
17
How can one recognise the level of learning? Examples of

performance.
When a student has reached this level, he / she can do the
following activities:
Select and classify information according to a given category.
State details used for describing causes and consequences.
Relate data and ideas to infer attitudes and moods.
Extract the main idea(s) of the text and list the arguments that
support it / them.
CLASSROOM LANGUAGE
17
Greetings:
Good morning / Good afternoon / Hello / Hi.
Good bye / See you tomorrow / See you later.
Have a nice weekend / Enjoy your holiday.
Moods and feelings:
A: How are you today?
B: Im fine / Im great / OK / Very well, thank you.
Im not very well / I have a problem / Im feeling low / Im sad.
Asking for clarification (STUDENTS)
Can you repeat that, please?
Can you say that again, please?
Sorry? I didnt understand very well.
Can you help me with this exercise, please?
Encouragement (TEACHERS)
Well done!
Good!
Excellent!
Good work!
Congratulations!
18
INTRODUCTION
Invent a title that represents the main idea of the text.

Identify words and phrases that give cohesion to the text. For
example: therefore, on the other hand.
Identify in the texts the communicative function of compound
structural patterns, such as the passive voice, conditional
sentences, relative clauses.
Identify in the text frequent phrasal verbs. For example: look after.
The date
A: What day is it today?
B: Its Monday / Its Tuesday / Its Wednesday / Its Thursday /
Its Friday / Its Saturday / Its Sunday
A: Whats the date today?
B: Its (Monday) March 9th.
The weather
A: Whats the weather like today?
B: Its sunny / Its cloudy / Its hot / Its cold / Its nice and warm /
Its nice and cool. Its raining / Its snowing.
The time
A: Whats the time? / What time is it?
B: Its one oclock. / Its two oclock. / Its three oclock. /
Its ten oclock. / Its twelve oclock.
B: Its quarter past nine. Its half past ten. Its five past eleven./ Its
ten past twelve / Its twenty past one/ Its twenty five past two.
B: Its a quarter to eight. Its twenty five to nine / Its twenty to
ten/ Its ten to three/ Its five to four.
Some Commands and Instructions (TEACHERS)

Add more words.
Answer the questions.
Be quiet.
Check your answers
Check your predictions.
Close the door.
Come to the board.
Compare your answers.
Compare your answers in your group.
Complete the paragraph.
Complete the sentences.
Complete the summary.
Complete the table.
Copy the instructions.
Cross out the words you do not hear.
Discuss the ideas in your group.
Do exercise 1.
Do not write in ink.
Do not write in your book.
Fill in the blanks.
Find examples in the text.
Find out who wrote this poem.
Find the cognates in the text.
Go to the board.
Identify the best description.
Listen to the recording.
Listen.
Look.
Look at the pictures.
Look up these words in the dictionary.
Make a list.
Make a list of topics.
Make some notes.
Match the pictures.

Name three activities.
Open the window.
Open your books.
Pay attention, please.
Put the pictures in order.
Read the instructions.
Read the sentences.
Select the correct answer.
Silence, please.
Sit down.
Stand up.
Talk to your partner.
Thats all for today, thank you.
Work in groups of 4.
Work in groups of three or four.
Work with your partner.
Write the sentences.
Turn taking and permissions: (STUDENTS)
Its your turn.
Sorry, its my turn.
Excuse me, can I say something?
Excuse me; can I leave the room for a minute?
Can I talk to you after the class?
May I go to the bathroom?
Encouragement: (TEACHERS)
Do it more carefully / Say it again / Try to correct that, please.
Not too bad / Youll do better next time / Keep trying!
Well done / Congratulations / Excellent / Good work.
19
SUGGESTED YEAR PLANNING
UNIT 5
UNIT 4
UNIT 3
UNIT 2
UNIT 1
TOPIC
20
CMO
TIME
TEEN LIFE
Forum chats.
Diversity of
teenage cultures.
Reading
Identify cognates.
Find general and specific
information.
Infer meanings from the
context.
Locate and match information.
Listening
Discriminate between correct
and incorrect information.
Identify correct sequence
Differentiate sounds.
information.
Identify collocations.
Language
Use the Simple Present and
adverbs of frequency.
Use adjectives of quantity.
Use connectors.
Use the Present Continuous for
future plans.
Speaking
Exchange personal information
Exchange information about
personal interests and
preferences.
Express quantities.
Writing
Write a personal introduction to
a forum chat.
Complete a personal profile.
Development
Lesson 1 four hours.
Consolidation and
evaluation activities
three hours + home
assignments.
BELIEVE IT OR
NOT
A city on the moon.
Hopes for the
future.
Reading
Scan the text to validate
predictions.
Get meanings from cognates.
information.
Listening
Relate speakers and speech.
Discriminate sounds and words.
Identify specific information.
Language
Use the Simple Future tense to
express predictions.
Use the Present
Continuous tense.
Use conjunctive connectors.

Use the First Conditional.
Speaking
Ask and answer questions
about fixed arrangements.
Talk about virtual life.
Writing
Write a short report.
Complete a paragraphs.
Development
Consolidation and
three hours + home
assignments.
TECHNOLOGY
AND INVENTIONS
New inventions.
Technology.
Reading
information.
Identify the sequence of
events.
Identify type of text.
Listening
Discriminate sounds
and words.
Identify sequence.
Language
Use the Simple Past tense.
Use linking words.
Use relative pronouns.
Speaking
Ask and answer questions
about biographies.
Exchange opinions about

inventions and technology.
Writing
Write a short summary of a
biography.
Complete a paragraph about a
new invention.
Development
Consolidation and
three hours + home
assignments.
SONGS - MUSIC
AND WORDS
Famous young
artists.
Styles of music.
Reading
Distinguish information.
Identify type of text.
Listening
Infer mood of speakers.
Discriminate sounds.
Language
Use would and could.
Use modal verbs must,
have to, need to.
Use the Passive Voice.
Use the First and Second
Conditional.
Speaking
Ask people about imaginary
situations.
Request information using
polite questions.
Writing
Write a book review.
Write questions and answers in
a chat room.
Development
Consolidation and
three hours + home
assignments.
HOW ABOUT
WORKING?
Volunteer
organization.
The role of
volunteer.
Reading
Locate missing information in a
text.
Distinguish facts and inferences.
Listening

Extract specific information
from a recording.
Language
Use Modal Verbs to express
necessity and preferences.
Use polite phrases in a
telephone conversation.
Speaking
Ask people about preferences.
Participate in a telephone
conversation.
Writing
Write a letter of application.
Write a leaflet promoting an
organization.
Development
Consolidation and
three hours + home
assignments.
LEARNING
ABILITIES
EVALUATION
RESOURCES ATTITUDES
Read posts to a
Student Forum chat.
Read a magazine
article.
Listen to an
interview.
Listen to two
poems.
Develop respect and

acceptance of age, and
social and cultural
diversity.
Assess the importance
of English as an
international tool of
communication.
Reflection Spot
Metacognition
Lets Check
Listening
Reading
Language
Your English in
Action
Unit Check
Listening
Reading
Language
Oral expression
Final Reflection
Extra tests
Listening
Reading
Language
Oral expression
Evaluation
Instruments
Listening
Reading
Writing
Working with others
To use pictures to
formulate predictions.
To localize specific
information.
To apply/ use a new
language structure.
Read a web page.

Read a scientific
article.
Listen to an
interview.
Listen to an
advertisement.
Reflect about the

importance of
technology
development.
Develop acceptance and
respect for everyones
opinions.
Reflection Spot
Metacognition
Lets Check
Listening
Reading
Language
Your English in
Action
Unit Check
Listening
Reading
Language
Oral expression
Final Reflection
Extra tests
Listening
Reading
Language
Oral expression
Evaluation
Instruments
Listening
Reading
Writing
Working with others
To relate topic to own

experience.
To infer the meaning of
key words.
To identify and extract
supporting information.
Read a web page.

Read a biography.
Listen to a
conversation.
Listen to a radio
program.
Assess and appreciate

the role of technology
in everyday life.
Develop respect and
acceptance of other
peoples opinions.
Reflection Spot
Metacognition
Lets Check
Listening
Reading
Language
Your English in
Action
Unit Check
Listening
Reading
Language
Oral expression
Final Reflection
Extra tests
Listening
Reading
Language
Oral expression
Evaluation
Instruments
Listening
Reading
Writing
Working with others
To express opinions.
To predict topic from the
context.
To relate speakers and
speech.
Read a piece of
chat.
Read book reviews.
Listen to a
television program.
Listen to a song.

the value of music and
literature.
Develop respect for the
role of music and
literature as a means of
communication.
Reflection Spot
Metacognition
Lets Check
Listening
Reading
Language
Your English in Action
Unit Check
Listening
Reading
Language
Oral expression
Final Reflection
Extra tests
Listening
Reading
Language
Oral expression
Evaluation
Instruments
Listening
Reading
Writing
Working with others
To discriminate sounds.
To predict content from
cognates.
To relate previous
knowledge with the topic
of the lesson.
Read a leaflet.
Read a letter of
application.
Listen to an
advertisement.
Listen to telephone
conversations.

the role of volunteer
organizations around
the world.
Value the importance of
voluntary work for
people in need.
Reflection Spot
Metacognition
Lets Check
Listening
Reading
Language
Your English in Action
Unit Check
Listening
Reading
Language
Oral expression
Final Reflection
Extra tests
Listening
Reading
Language
Oral expression
Evaluation
Instruments
Listening
Reading
Writing
Working with others
To relate topic to own

reality.
To develop
study skills.
To exchange information.
21
UNIT
TEEN
T EEN LIFE
In this unit you will:
read posts to a Student Forum chat
read a magazine article
listen to an interview
listen to two poems
You will learn how to:
Reading
identify cognates
find general and specific information
infer meaning of words from the context
locate and match information
Listening
discriminate between correct and incorrect
information
identify correct sequence
differentiate sounds
identify collocations
Language
use the Simple Present and adverbs of frequency
Types of Evaluation
use adjectives of quantity

use connectors
use the Present Continuous for future plans
Speaking
exchange personal information
exchange information about personal interests and
preferences
express quantities
Writing
write a personal introduction to a forum chat
complete a personal profile
You will also:
develop respect and acceptance of age, and social
and cultural diversity
assess the importance of English as an
international tool of communication
Development
Lesson 1: four hours

Consolidation and evaluation activities: 3 hours +
home assignments
Didactic resources
Complementary material such as articles
magazines, Student Forum chats.
Pictures of teenagers provided by the teacher and
by the students to illustrate the diversity of teenage
cultures.
Supporting material such as lists of adjectives,
dictionaries, glossaries, definitions, printed
handouts, library material, etc.
Methodological suggestions
Teachers should prepare the lessons beforehand
considering that thorough prior preparation allows
them to think of and apply some useful ideas. It is
their chance to make the class entertaining and to
involve students in the learning process.
Teachers are advised to use a variety of resources
throughout the book.
Indicators
Continuous/informal Students do reading and listening activities, take part in conversations, and produce written texts.
Reflection spot
Self - evaluation
Students analyze and evaluate their performance in the speaking, reading, listening, and writing activities.
Unit Check
Unit evaluation
Reading: Students find specific information and discriminate between correct and incorrect information.
Listening: Students find specific information, discriminate between correct and incorrect information and
identify sequence of information.
Language: Students use the Simple Present and the Present Progressive tense.
Speaking: Students exchange information about routines.
Writing: Students write and reply to e-mails.
Final Reflection
Students analyze their performance in the whole unit.
Extra Test
22
UNIT 1
Listening: Students identify specific information and discriminate between correct and incorrect information.
Language: Students use the Simple Present and Present Progressive tense.
Writing: Students write a short paragraph describing their best friend.
Speaking: Students imitate an interview and exchange information about routines, interests and favorite activities.
TEEN
TEE N LI FE
PAGE 8
2 +
GETTING READY
1
Introduce the topic of the unit reading the

name aloud. Then, invite some students to
read what the young people on page 9 say
about being a teenager and ask them if they
agree or not.
2 Invite the students to work in groups talking

about being a teenager. Encourage them
to make some notes and come to an
agreement. Then, ask one member of each
group to share their comments with the rest
of the class.
3 First, ask students to copy the chart into their

notebooks. Then, motivate them to interview
six of their classmates about their interests
and preferences in order to complete the
chart. Elicit students ideas about graphs and
then explain that they will have to present the
results for each item in a graph. You may
also give one example on the board.
PAGE 10
LESSON 1
TAKE TWO TEENS
BEFORE READING
+
Draw students attention to the pictures and
then ask them to answer the questions in
pairs. Check their answers orally.
(L.A.: to use pictures to formulate
predictions).
a.
b.
c.
d.
Possible answers
hang out with friends; listen to music; play video
games; chat with friends; watch movies; play sports;
wear the same kind of clothes; surf the Internet.
3 ++
Ask students to choose the picture they
think best represents a typical Chilean
teenager. Ask them to support their ideas
and then to come to an agreement.
(L.A.: to relate pictures with personal
experiences).
4 +++
Explain to students that they are going to
read two posts from a Students Forum chat.
Invite them to make predictions about the
two students way of life.
(L.A.: to use general knowledge to formulate
predictions).
5 ++
READING
Brainstorm aspects and activities that are

typical of teenagers in Chile and all over the
world. Invite students to write a list of them
in their notebooks and then write some
examples on the board.
(L.A.: to relate topic with personal reality).
Answers
Between 13 and 18 years old.
They are from different parts of the world.
They are: acting in a play, answering questions,
chatting and doing sports.
They are wearing costumes, sport and casual clothes.
Tell students to look at the text and find all

the cognates. Then, ask what information
they can deduce from them. You can ask
them to write the cognates on the board, but
do not check what the students can deduce
from them at this stage.
(L.A.: to identify cognates through
scanning).
Answers
forum, different, traditional, TV, music, computer, chat,
cyber cafe, culture, kilometers, fan, Internet, rest,
sports.
23
Answers
ERROR ALERT
Cognates are words in different languages related to
the same root, ex.: education (English) / educacin
(Spanish)
Anyway, students might get confused because there are
also several words in Spanish that are similar in
English, but have a different meaning. These words are
called False Cognates.
Amish: member of an Anabaptist Christian denomination.

newbie: slang term for a newcomer to online gaming or
an Internet activity.
link: a connection between two or more people or things.
soaps: (also soap opera) a story which is broadcast
everyday or several times a week on television or radio.
Exercise: Read the words in the list. Identify the false

cognates in it.
PAGE 12
actual / embarrassed / familiar / introduce / lecture /

notice / parents / realize
Answers:
The false cognates are:
Actual = real, not actual (present).
Examples: The actual cost was higher than expected.
Does anyone know her present address?
Embarrassed = avergozado/a, not embarazada
(pregnant).
Examples: She's embarrassed about her height. My
sister is pregnant with her first child.
Familiar = conocido, familiarizado, not familiar
(relative).
Examples: His face looks familiar to me. We saw most
of our relatives at the party.
Lecture = charla, not lectura (reading).
Examples: He gave a lecture on endangered species in
Chile. You can understand everything from the first
reading.
Notice = aviso, anuncio, not noticia (news).
Examples: Have you seen the notice on the board? The
news of the earthquake arrived two days later.
Parents = padres, not parientes (relatives).
Her parents got married very young. Most of my
relatives live in Santiago.
Realize = darse cuenta, comprender, not
realizar (carry out).
Example: I realized who he was.
For more information on ERROR ALERT, see page 7 of
the Introduction.
6 ++
Invite students to read the words in the Key
Word Spot and then find their definitions in
an English-English dictionary.
(L.A.: to develop study skills).
24
UNIT 1
READING
7 +
Ask the students to read the text quickly to
check their predictions in Exercise 4.
Explain to them that it is not necessary for
them to understand every single word. They
only have to get the general meaning of the
text in order to check if their predictions
were right.
(L.A: to validate predictions).
Answers
The students do not have similar ways of life.
8 ++
Now, invite your students to read the text
again carefully, and then answer the
questions (a. e.) in their notebooks. Check
their answers orally or ask some students to
write the answers on the board.
(L.A.: to localize specific information).
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Answers
No, they are not typical teenagers because they live
in very different ways.
Josh 95 is American and Pink Sunshine is Australian.
Yes, he does, because he can go to a cyber cafe and
be in contact with the rest of the world.
She has e-lessons. She studies through the Internet.
Yes, it is. Because it is the way they can be in
contact with people from all around the world.
TEEN
TEE N LI FE
9 ++
Make the students copy the chart into their
notebooks and then complete it with
information from the text. Invite some of
them to write and complete the chart on the
board to check their answers.
(L.A.: to extract specific information).
Answers
Answers
Will vary
LANGUAGE SPOT
Name
Josh 95
Pink Sunshine
Always
Wear traditional
clothes
Watch soaps
or movies
Go shopping
in the city
Read
Hardly ever
Use a computer
Meet friends
Never
Watch TV or
listen to music
Go to school
Likes /
Loves
Chat with
other people
Chat with
other people
Often
information that is true for them. Then, ask

them to answer questions a. and b.
Invite some of the students to share their
answers with their classmates.
(L.A.: to relate topic to personal experiences).
10 +++
Ask the students to read the text once more
before completing the sentences in their
notebooks. Check their answers orally.
(L.A.: to identify specific information).
Possible answers
a. Josh95 and Pink Sunshines lives are similar because
they both live in a very different way others teenagers
do but they both like to know about people from all
over the world. They both live on a farm and they use
the Internet to communicate with other teens.
b. Josh95 and Pink Sunshines lives are different
because Josh is Amish and never watches TV or
listens to music, but he goes to school. Pink
Sunshine never goes to school but she always
watches TV or listens to music.
PAGE 13
AFTER READING
Habitual activities and frequency adverbs

This section is designed to help students revise
or discover a particular grammar structure or an
interesting item of vocabulary related to the text.
The activities are meant to promote independent
learning, so help, guide and check, but do not
enunciate them the answers.
1. Ask the students to read and analyze the
sentences from the text.
2. Now, the students answer questions a. c.
Help them to identify what kind of actions the
sentences express, the tense that was used
and the words that help to identify the
frequency in which the action was performed.
Answ ers: a. - iii.; b. iii.; c. always, every,
never
3. Invite the students to copy and complete the
general rule in their notebooks.
Answ ers:
We use the Simple Present tense to talk
about activities that are habitual.
We use words such as alw ays, never,
every, to express the frequency of the
activity.
4. Encourage students to revise the text again
and find other examples of this structure. Invite
them to write the examples in their notebooks
and underline the frequency adverb. You may
organize a class competition and offer a prize
to the student who identifies all the examples.
Answ ers:
I never watch TV or listen to music.
I alw ays watch soaps or movies.
I hardly ever meet friends or go to parties.
For more information on the LANGUAGE SPOT,
see page 6 of the Introduction.
11 ++
Tell the students to add a column to the
chart in Exercise 9, and to complete it with
25
12 +
Reflection Spot
Refer the students to the LANGUAGE

SPOT to write sentences about their and
their partners habitual activities. Invite some
of the students to write the sentences on
the board to check the answers.
(L.A.: to apply/ use a new language
structure).
Answers
Will vary
Assign enough time of your class to allow

students to reflect on their achievements and
weaknesses. They read the statements and
reflect about:
their ability to exchange personal
information
their ability to write about themselves
For more information on the Reflection Spot,
16 +++
PAGE 14
13 ++
Motivate the students to read the two posts

and answer them in their notebooks. Invite
them to compare their answers in their
groups.
(L.A.: to give personal information in
writing).
In pairs, the students listen and then repeat

the conversation.
(L.A.: to imitate intonation/pronunciation
patterns).
TRANSCRIPT ORAL PRACTICE

Diana:
Steve:
Diana:
Steve:
Diana:
Steve:
Diana:
Hi, my name's Diana. What's your name?

Hi, I'm Steve. Nice to meet you.
How old are you, Steve. And, where do you come from?
I'm 14, and I come from Canada.
What do you like doing in your free time?
I always do sports or visit my friends. And you?
I often do sports too, and I always chat on the
Internet with people from all over the world.
Answers
Will vary
PAGE 15
17
15 ++
Encourage the students to complete the
post to introduce themselves to a Forum
Chat. Motivate them to be creative and write
as if they were chatting. You can assign this
activity as homework and check it orally the
next class
(L.A.: to express personal information).
26
UNIT 1
FL
Invite fast learners to read the posts again

and then answer the questions. Motivate
them to support their answers and
encourage them to share their conclusions
with the rest of their classmates. You can
organize a debate and then ask the
students to come to an agreement.
(L.A.: to relate topic to personal reality / to
consolidate content of the lesson).
14 +++
Motivate students to replace the parts
underlined with information that is true for
them and then role-play the conversation in
front of their classmates.
(L.A.: to ask for and give personal
information).
+++
Answers
Will vary
LETS CHECK
18 The purpose of this section is to allow
students to check their progress and to
provide information to the teacher about any
points that the majority of the students have
problems with. Make sure they understand
what they are expected to do and give them
TEEN
TEE N LI FE
enough time to answer individually. Then,

check on the board to allow students to
correct their work and assign a mark
according to the scale.
For more information on LET'S CHECK, see
page 6 of the Introduction.
Answers
Will vary. Accept any coherent ideas. For example: I
always swim in the swimming pool in summer. I hardly
ever eat hamburgers or junk food. I never sleep on my
stomach. I sometimes talk to my friends on my cell
phone. I usually play computer games in the evening.
REAL LIFE SPOT

This section is intended to allow students to make
connections between the topic of the lesson and
real life, and at the same time provide additional
information that may be useful for them.
Make sure you give enough time for them to read
and then elicit their comments.
For more information on the REAL LIFE SPOT,
PAGE 16
LESSON 2
LISTENING
TEENAGE TALK
BEFORE LISTENING
1
+
Brainstorm students ideas about things or
activities that are related to teen culture.
Motivate them to find seven words related
to this topic in the Word Search puzzle. You
can divide the class into groups or pairs and
organize a competition, setting a time limit.
(L.A.: to use previous knowledge to
understand new vocabulary).
Answers
COMPUTERS / FASHION / FRIENDS / MUSIC / PARTIES
/ SPORTS / VIDEOGAMES
+ + + + + + + + N + + + + S +
+ + + + + + + + O S + + E + +
S E M A G O E D I V P I + + +
+ + + + + + + + H + T O + + +
+ + + + + + + + S R + + R + +
+ + + S + + + + A + + + + T +
+ + + + R + + P F + + + + + S
+ + + + + E + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + T + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + U + + + + + + +
F R I E N D S M P + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + U + M + + + + +
+ + + + + + + S + + O + + + +
+ + + + + + + I + + + C + + +
+ + + + + + + C + + + + + + +
2 ++
Now, in pairs, the students make a list of other
words related to teenagers. Check orally.
(L.A: to relate previous knowledge to the topic).
Answers
Will vary
3 +++
Draw students attention to the photo and
ask them to answer the questions in their
groups. Invite one member of each group to
share their answers with the rest of their
classmates.
(L.A.: to infer information from pictures).
Answers
Will vary according to students ideas.
4 +++
Have students read the words in the Key
Word Spot and then identify their meaning
in the list. Allow them to use bilingual or
monolingual dictionaries if necessary.
(L.A.: to infer meaning from the context).
Answers
a. fed up; b. look forward to; c. wool
27
Answers
look for a girlfriend (1); play the drums (3); talk about
music (2); wear a nice jacket (4)
PAGE 17
LISTENING
5 +
8 +++
Tell students that they are going to listen to

an interview to the boy in the photo. Explain
to them that this first time they dont need to
pay attention to details. They must only get
the general content to check their
predictions in Exercise 3.
(L.A.: to validate predictions).
Answers
a. Yes, he does.
b. Hes from Chicago, in the USA.
c. He likes skateboarding, playing the guitar and
listening to music.
d. He cares about the environment.
6 ++
The students listen to the interview once

more and identify the correct alternative for
each sentence.
(L.A: to identify correct words).
Answers
a. friends; b. The Amazing Life of Birds; c. older;
d. homework; e. one week.
Reflection Spot
Make sure you assign enough time of your

class to allow students to reflect on their
achievements and weaknesses. They read
the statements and assess:
their ability to use visuals to make
predictions
their ability to distinguish sounds
7 ++
Play the recording again. Ask students to

listen and match the lists A and B. Then,
encourage them to find the correct picture
for each collocation.
(L.A.: to identify collocations / to relate text
and pictures).
28
UNIT 1
Play the recording again. This time, the

students must listen and discriminate
between correct and incorrect information. If
necessary, play the recording again for
them to correct the false statements.
Alternatively, you can ask the keener
students to do this and then to share their
answers with the rest of the class.
(L.A.: to discriminate between correct and
incorrect information).
Answers
a. False (he lives in a suburb of Chicago). b. False (he
goes skateboarding). c. False (he goes to the movies
once or twice a month). d. False (he is reading a book
about birds). e. True (and he also likes Spanish and
computer sciences). f. False (he is not looking for a
girlfriend). g. True.
TRANSCRIPT - TEENAGE TALK
Presenter: Danny Evans is 16, and lives in a suburb of

Chicago. Danny, what do you usually do on
weekends?
Danny:
I always go skateboarding and I play the drums. I
also often listen to music with my friends. And
we go to clubs every Saturday night.
Presenter: How often do you go to the movies?
Danny:
Once or twice a month.
Presenter: What are you reading right now?
Danny:
A great book called The Amazing Life of Birds, by
Gary Paulsen.
Presenter: What are your favorite subjects at school?
Danny:
History, Spanish and computer science.
Presenter: What do you and your friends talk about?
Danny:
Girls, sports and music.
Presenter: Do you have a girlfriend?
Danny:
No; all the girls like older boys, because they have
cars, and jobs and money. Anyway, Im not
looking for a girlfriend.
Presenter: What are you wearing today?
Danny:
Im wearing a fleece jacket, jeans and sneakers.
TEEN
TEE N LI FE
Presenter:
Danny:
Presenter:
Danny:
How are you feeling?

Im fed up with homework.
What are you doing on your next vacation?
Im spending a week with my cousins in the
country. I cant wait!
Presenter: What kind of things do you really care about?
Danny:
I think the environment is really important. We
must stop the destruction of our planet!
PAGE 18
9 +
Refer students to the LANGUAGE SPOT to
copy and complete the dialogues using the
Simple Present or the Present Progressive
of the verbs in brackets. Then, ask them to
relate each dialogue with a picture.
(L.A.: to apply a language structure).
Answers
a. does, do, He / She plays. (3)
b. is, doing, is organizing. (2)
c. do, eat, drink (1)
AFTER LISTENING
LANGUAGE SPOT
The Present Progressive for future plans
1. The students read the questions and answers
from the interview carefully.
2. Help them identify which exchange talks about
an event that is happening now and which
exchange talks about future plans.
Answ ers:
a.- a.; b. b.; c. ii.
3. Now students copy and complete the general
rule in their notebook.
Answ ers:
We use the Present Progressive to talk
about temporary events and about what is
happening now.
We can also use the Present Progressive
to talk about future plans and arrangements.
ERROR ALERT
Present Progressive: Im wearing a uniform / He is reading
a book (NOT: I wearing a uniform / He reading a book)
Exercise: Use the prompts to write sentences in the
Present Progressive tense.
a. Anna / cook / the meal.
b. Bill / play / chess / his friends.
c. Diana / sleep / her best friends house.
d. Nick and Jill / swim / the pool.
e. Bob / read / a novel.
f. Jim and Sheila / have / dinner.
g. My parents / watch / a movie.
h. Ann / help / her mother.
i. The plane / take off.
j. Tina and Margaret / travel / around the world.
the Introduction.
4. Invite your students to speculate about two

more plans that Danny may have and then
write sentences in their notebooks. Check their
answers orally.
Answ ers:
Will vary. Accept any coherent ideas, such as:
Danny is visiting his family on Saturday; Danny
is riding a horse tomorrow morning; Danny is
doing sports on the weekend, etc.
29
PAGE 19
GAME SPOT
10 ++
In groups, the students complete the extract

of the interview in their notebooks. Then,
play the recording and ask them to compare
their answers.
(L.A.: to ask and give information).
Answers
See transcript.

Presenter:
Leo:
Presenter:
Leo:
Presenter:
Leo:
Presenter:
Leo:
Presenter:
Leo:
How often do you go to the movies?

Once or twice a month.
What are you reading right now?
A great book called The Golden Compass.
What are your favorite subjects at school?
Drama, Spanish and computer science.
What do you and your friends talk about?
Sports and music.
What are you doing next weekend?
We are playing football and going to a birthday
party.
11 +++
Ask students to ask and answer the
questions in the interview with their
partners. Then, encourage them to practice
and act it in front of their classmates.
Motivate them to participate actively in this
kind of activities, which are in most cases
the only opportunity they have to use
English.
(L.A.: to ask for and give information).
12 +
With the information from the interview, the
students complete the description of their
partners in their notebooks. Choose some
of them to read the descriptions aloud to
provide a model for their classmates. You
can also assign this activity for homework.
(L.A.: to consolidate content of the lesson).
30
UNIT 1
PLAY THE DONT ANSWER BACK GAME

This game guarantees confusion and lots of
laughter in the classroom (perfect for teenagers!).
a.
Ask students to write down questions like
those in the interview and in Exercise 10.
b.
Form groups of six students and sit them in
a circle.
c.d.e. Write a question on the board.
Example: Whats your name?
Explain that the aim for each student is to
give the answer to the question asked to
the student before. To help explain this, get
a student to ask you a question (ex: Have
you got a sister?), dont answer this
question but tell your name (answering the
question written on the board).
f.g. Start the game. Each player has 3 lives. If
he/she doesnt answer the correct question,
or he/she hesitates for too long, he /she
loses a life. The winner is / are the player/s
with most lives at the end of the time limit.
For more information on the GAME SPOT, see
PAGE 20
LETS CHECK
TEEN
TEE N LI FE
Answers
The questions should be the same, but the answers will
vary, according to students' ideas. Make sure they are
coherent and use the correct language form.
a. What are you doing on Saturday morning? I'm / We
are ing .
b. What are you and your friends doing on your next
vacations? We are ing .
c. What clothes are you wearing for the birthday party?
I'm wearing ____.
14 ++ FL
Motivate keener students to unscramble the
words related to clothes and then match
them to the correct picture. Invite them to
share their answer with the rest of the class.
(L.A.: to consolidate vocabulary / to relate
words and pictures).
Answers
a. jacket (3); b. jeans (5); c. sneakers (8); d. top (6);
e. boots (1); f. t-shirt (7); g. shirt (2); h. skirt (4)
REAL LIFE SPOT

The objective of this section is to provide a bit of
humor to the class. Anyway, all the jokes and
cartoons are related to the topic of the lesson.
Give some minutes to allow students to read and
then invite them to share their comments to make
sure they understood the joke. At this point, you
may allow the use of Spanish to check
comprehension.
PAGE 22
LESSON 3
READING
THE MYSTERY OF TEEN FAS HION
BEFORE READING
1
PAGE 21
15 +++
In pairs, the students take turns to describe
the pictures, saying what the people are
doing. Select some students to describe the
pictures aloud in order to check the
answers.
(L.A.: to describe pictures / to use a
language structure).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Answers
The girl is reading a magazine.
The boy is watching TV.
The boy is playing basketball.
The girls are talking about boyfriends / fashion /
music, etc.
The girl is wearing smart clothes.
The boy is playing video games.
+
You can introduce the topic of the lesson
starting a conversation about teen fashion.
Elicit students ideas about this issue and
make notes on the board. Then, ask the
students to look at the pictures and describe
the clothes the teens are wearing. Finally,
ask their opinion about the style they like
most.
(L.A.: to express opinions / to relate topic
with own reality).
2 ++
Motivate students to find out if they are
fashion victims. Tell them to answer the
questions honestly, calculate their scores
and then compare the results with their
partners or in their groups. Take advantage
of the activity to start a general conversation
about the relation between fashion trends
and teenagers.
(L.A.: to relate topic to personal
experiences).
Answers
Will vary.
31
PAGE 24
3 +++
Tell students to read statements a. d. and
then choose the ones they think are true.
Do not check answers at this point.
formulate predictions).
READING
6 +
The students read the text quickly and
confirm or correct their choices in Exercise
3. Remind them that this first reading is only
to validate their predictions; it is not
necessary to understand every single word.
PAGE 23
4 +
Ask the students to take a look at the text
and identify all the cognates they can find.
Check orally or asking some students to
write the list of cognates on the board.
Remind them that this first reading must be
very quick, only to find key words that may
help them to understand the text.
(L.A.: to identify cognates through
scanning).
Answers
All the statements are true.
7 ++
Now, the students must read the article
carefully and answer the questions in their
notebooks. You can ask some students to
read their answers aloud to check the
exercise.
Answers
fascinating, neon, colored, common, bands, accessories,
dictates, companies, specialize, hours, television,
different, style, influence, pop culture, shows, music,
celebrities, impact, millions, dollars, identify.
a.
b.
ERROR ALERT
c.
d.
False cognates
Notice = see, observe, pay attention (NOT: noticia)
the Introduction.
5 ++
Draw students attention to the words in the
Key Word Spot and tell them to find their
definitions in column A. Then, ask them to
identify their synonyms in column B.
(L.A.: to infer meaning of key words).
Answers
bare: not covered by any clothes; naked
household: connected with the house; domestic
track down: to find something; detect
trend: a general style; tendency
32
UNIT 1
Answers
Neon-colored hair; pierced tongues; bare stomachs.
They travel all over the world and watch thousands
of hours of movies and television.
Pop culture.
They spend millions of dollars.
8 +++
The students read the text again to insert
sentences a. d. back in it. Guide them to
find the textual clues that may help them,
for example: if it is a question, if it is a
reason, an additional idea, etc.
(L.A.: to localize missing information).
Answers
(1) d.; (2) c.; (3) a.; (4) b.
9 ++
Ask the students to read the article again if
necessary, and form collocations with the
words in columns A and B. Then, make
them relate three of the collocations with a
picture below.
(L.A.: to infer meaning of words from the
context ; to relate words and visuals).
TEEN
TEE N LI FE
Answers
a. v. (3); b. iii. (1); c. i. (2); d. iv.; e. ii.; f. vi.
10 ++
Tell the students to copy the chart into their
notebooks, and then complete it with
information from the text. You can copy the
chart on the board and then ask some
students to complete it to allow the class to
check their answers. You can also assign
this exercise as homework.
Answers
Parts of the body Entertainment Household items
tongue
TV shows
safety pins
stomachs
movies
rubber bands
hair
music
ankle
magazines
PAGE 25
11 +++
Invite your students to read the text once
more and find words in it that correspond to
descriptions a. e. Read the descriptions
aloud and analyze them carefully. Draw
students attention to the kind (or category)
of word that they should look for in each
case.
Answers
a. (adjective) cool; b. (noun) trend spotter; c. (noun)
accessories; d. (noun) influence; e. (adverb) steadily.
LANGUAGE SPOT
Expressing quantity
Remember that this section is designed to help
students revise or discover a particular grammar
structure or an interesting item of vocabulary
related to the text.
learning, so help, guide and check, but do not tell
them the answers.
1. Ask the students to read the sentences from
the text, paying special attention to the words
in bold.
2. Guide them to identify what the words in bold
express in each sentence.
Answ ers: b.
3. Now, the students copy and complete the
general rule in their notebooks. Draw students
attention to the Note in the Language Spot,
and make sure they know the difference
between Countable and Uncountable Nouns.
Answ ers:
We use words such as a lot of, a few ,
some, many, to express a quantity.
4. Now students go back to the text and identify
all the sentences that express quantity. Ask
them to copy the sentences in their notebooks
and underline the words used to express
quantity.
Answ ers:
Companies trend spotters watch a lot of hours
of movies and television.
A lot of TV shows, music, movies, magazines
and celebrities have a huge impact on teen
style.
Clothing companies spend a lot of money
trying to identify the next hot trend.
AFTER READING
12 +
Ask the class to form groups of four or five
students to talk about clothes and
accessories they wear. Explain that they
can use the questions provided to guide the
conversation.
(L.A.: to relate topic to own reality).
33
ERROR ALERT
PAGE 26
Countable Nouns
Countable nouns are easy to recognize. They are things
that we can count. Countable nouns can be singular or
plural.
Uncountable Nouns
Uncountable nouns are substances, concepts, etc. that we
cannot divide into separate elements. We cannot count
them. We usually treat uncountable nouns as singular.
Countable
Uncountable
dollar
money
song
music
suitcase
luggage
table
furniture
battery
electricity
bottle
wine
report
information
tip
advice
journey
travel
job
work
view
scenery
Sometimes, the same noun can be countable and
uncountable, often with a change of meaning.
Examples:
13 +
Countable
Noun
Uncountable
There are two hairs

in my coffee!
Hair
I dont have
much hair.
There are two lights

in our bedroom.
Light
Theres too
much light!
Shhhhh! I thought
I heard a noise.
Noise
Its difficult to work

when there is too
much noise.
Have you got

a paper to read?
Paper
I want to draw a
picture. Have you
got some paper?
Our house has

seven rooms.
Room
Is there room for

me to sit here?
Additional exercise:
Decide whether you have to use much or many.
a. _______ cars
f. _______ numbers
b. _______ music
g. _______ money
c. _______ pictures
h. _______ tea
d. _______ flowers
i. _______ girls
e. _______ milk
j. _______ pencils
the Introduction.
34
UNIT 1

complete what the two teenagers say. Invite
some of them to write the correct sentences
on the board to allow the rest to check their
answers.
(L.A.: to apply a new language structure).
Answers
Anne: much, a lot of, a lot of, much.
Malcom:a lot of, a few, a few, some, some, much, a few.
Reflection Spot
The purpose of this activity is to help

students reflect on their learning process
and to raise students awareness of how
they develop their own learning strategies to
become more effective learners. They
should work on their own but you may help
and guide the work when necessary.
The students read the statements and assess:
their ability to exchange personal
information.
their ability to express quantities.
14 ++
Play the recording and ask the students to
listen and read at the same time.
(L.A.: to imitate intonation patterns).
A: Can you describe what you are wearing?

B: I'm wearing a long black skirt, a black T-shirt and black
boots. I'm also wearing black eyeliner, black nail varnish
and black lipstick.
A: What do you call your style?
B: I am a Goth.
A: What about the accessories?
B: I wear only a few accessories, like hair pins, and I have
some piercings.
A: Do you spend a lot of money on clothes?
B: No; I don't have many clothes and I usually get them from
a second hand shop.
TEEN
TEE N LI FE
15 +++
18 ++ FL
Now, ask the students to work in pairs

replacing the parts underlined in the
dialogue with facts that are true for them.
Then, ask the students to practice the
dialogue imitating the recording. You can
play it again, if necessary. Encourage some
pairs to act it in front of the class to provide
a model for their classmates.
(L.A.: to express and give information / to
relate topic to own reality).
LETS CHECK
correct their work and assign themselves a
mark according to the scale.
Answers
a. some; b. a few; c. many; d. a lot of, some, a few;
e. much, a few.
PAGE 27
17 +++
Motivate students to copy and complete the
paragraph in their notebooks, using the
information they collected in Exercise 14.
You can also assign this exercise as
homework and invite some students to read
their work aloud the next class.
Answers
Will vary.
Motivate fast learners to invent three more

questions to add to the quiz in Exercise 2.
Then, invite them to ask the questions to
their partners.
REAL LIFE SPOT

the real life, and at the same time provide
additional information that may be useful for them.
PAGE 28
LESSON 4
LISTENING
TYPICAL TEENAGERS
BEFORE LISTENING
1
+
Start the lesson by drawing students
attention to the pictures and tell them to find
the relationship with the comments (a. d.)
You can also ask the students if they can
identify themselves in any of the situations.
(L.A.: to relate visuals and written text).
Answers
1 a.; 2 b.; 3 d.; 4 c.
2 ++
Ask the students to revise the comments in
Exercise 1 and identify the topics that
represent a source of conflict with their
parents. Then, invite them to form groups and
compare their answers with their partners.
Answers
Will vary.
35
PAGE 29
3 ++
Explain to your students that they are going
to listen to two poems related to the name
of the lesson. Ask them to read it and
choose the alternative they think is correct.
(L.A.: to use titles to formulate predictions).
Do not check answers at this point.
4 +++
Draw students attention to the words in the
Key Word Spot. Tell them to look them up
in a dictionary and then copy them in their
notebooks. Check orally.
(L.A.: to apply study skills).
folks:
fume:
mean:
swear:
unfair:
utterly:
Answers
members of your family, especially your parents.
to be very angry about something.
angry.
to use rude or offensive language.
unjust.
totally, very.
ERROR ALERT
Draw students attention to the difference between the
/&i:/ sound, as in leave, and the /I/ sound, as in live.
Exercise: Listen to the following word pairs. Repeat
them, being careful to make the distinction between the
two sounds.
pit / Pete; bitch / beach; living / leaving; gin / Jean; bid
/ bead; pick / peak; mid / mead; lick / leak; grin / green
Tongue twister:
Does Jim still steal Jills jeans?
the Introduction.
7 ++
Tell the students to read the sentences.

Play the recording of the second poem and
ask them to number the phrases in the
order they hear them. Then, they listen to
the poem once more to check their
answers.
(L.A.: to identify the sequence of
information).
Answers
c.; e.; b.; d.; a.
LISTENING
5 +
8 +++
Play the recording. Ask the students to listen

and check their predictions in Exercise 3.
Answers
b.
6 ++
Play the recording of the first poem again.

Tell the students to choose the alternative
they think is correct. Check on the board.
(L.A.: to identify the words said and relate
them to their written form).
Answers
sleepy; on end; leave; think; swear; reeling; be; living.
36
UNIT 1
Ask the students to read the comments in

Exercise 1 again. Then, play the recording
again and tell them to identify the topics that
are mentioned. You can encourage
advanced learners to also identify how the
topics are mentioned in the poem. For
example: That music is too loud / their
music cracks the ceiling; You sleep too
much / sleepy; You spend too much on the
phone / They talk for hours on end; Your
room is a mess / Theyll leave their room a
mess
(L.A.: to identify general information).
Answers
All of them are mentioned in the poem.
TEEN
TEE N LI FE
TRANSCRIPT - COMPLAINTS
Happy, sad, sleepy, mean,

Feelings often change,
A common act of a typical teen,
I find it rather strange.
Talking to a friend, or sending them a text,
They talk for hours on end, whatll they think of next
Theyll leave their room a mess
And give cleaning it a miss,
But yes, I must confess
To also doing this
They think their folks are ancient,
And utterly unfair, the result is to ignore them
Before they start to swear.
Their music cracks the ceiling,
And makes their parents fume,
Emotions always reeling
And more time in their room.
Being a teen may be pretty bad,
But from experience I can tell,
Its much worse for mum and dad,
For them its living hell!
PAGE 30
AFTER LISTENING
9 +++
Tell students to work in pairs to complete
the dialogue with facts that are true for
them. Let them know that several
possibilities are correct.
The students can also practice the dialogue
as homework and act it the next class.
(L.A.: to express facts / opinions /
information).
Possible Answers
A: Do you recognize yourself in the poem?
B: Yes, because my feelings often change, I talk to
friends for hours, and my room is a mess. What
about you?
A: Well, I dont recognize myself because my room is
always tidy, I dont think my parents are ancient
and my music is never too loud.
Getting Older
When you cannot find your pencil
And your purse has gone astray.
When youre feeling rather tired
For it has been a hectic day.
When the morning comes too quickly
And you just cant cope with rush;
When everyone is shouting
And youd rather have some hush.
Perhaps youre getting older,
For this happens we are told,
But no, this isnt how it is
Youre only thirteen years old!
37
LANGUAGE SPOT
Addition, alternative and contrast
them the answers.
1. The students revise the examples from the
poem, paying special attention to the words in
bold.
2. The students identify:
a. the word that introduces an additional idea
b. the word that introduces an alternative idea
c. what concept the word but introduces
Answ ers:
a. and; b. or; c. a contrast
3. Now, the students copy and complete the
general rules in their notebooks.
Answ ers:
We use but when we want to express a
contrast between two ideas.
We use and when we want to express
additional ideas.
We use or when we want to express
alternative ideas.
4. Provide transcripts of the poems to your
students. You can photocopy them or you can
write them on the board. Then, ask the
students to copy all the sentences that include
the words in the Language Spot, and to
identify what they express.
Answ ers:
Poem 1:
Theyll leave their room a mess and give
cleaning it a miss, (addition)
They think their folks are ancient, and utterly
unfair (addition)
Poem 2:
When you cannot find your pencil and your
purse has gone astray. (addition)
When the morning comes too quickly and you
just cant cope with rush; (addition)
When everyone is shouting and youd rather
have some hush. (addition)
For this happens we are told, but no, this isnt
how it is. (contrast)
38
UNIT 1
PAGE 31
10 +
combine the pairs of sentences. Invite some
students to write their sentences on the
board to check the exercise.
(L.A.: to use / apply a new language
structure).
Answers
a. Teenagers sleep a lot but they are always sleepy,
anyway.
b. Teenagers dont talk with their parents but they talk
a lot with their friends.
c. Teenagers like music and sports.
d. Teenagers like to be with friends or to spend a lot of
time in their rooms.
11 +++
Provide the transcripts of the poems or write

them on the board. Play the recording
several times. In pairs, students choose the
part of the poem they like most. Then,
motivate them to memorize and say it in
front of the class.
(L.A.: to imitate intonation pattern).
GAME SPOT
Encourage students to read the clues and try to
solve the crossword with words from the first
poem they listened to. Allow use of dictionaries if
necessary.
Answ ers:
Across: 2. hell, 6. confess, 8. unfair, 9. mess
Dow n: 1. ceiling, 3. folks, 4. ancient, 5. teen,
7. friend
TEEN
TEE N LI FE
PAGE 32
PAGE 33
14 +++
LETS CHECK
Answers
a. or; b. and; c. but; d. but; e. and.
13 ++
Read the words in the box with the class and
check that students understand their
meaning. Ask them to use the words to
complete the verses of the poem in their
notebooks.
afraid = feeling fear / temeroso/a; ashamed =
feeling shame or embarrassment /
avergonzado/a; blunt = very direct / muy
franco/a; bold = brave and confident / audaz;
brave = courageous / valiente; loud = making
a lot of noise / bullicioso/a; quiet = tending
not to talk very much / callado/a; shy =
nervous or embarrassed about meeting and
speaking to other people / tmido/a.
(L.A.: to use vocabulary related to the topic).
Answers
TURN UP THE VOLUME
Liz Boyatt
I need to be bold,
I need to be loud,
I need to be blunt,
I need to be brave.
I can't be shy,
I can't keep quiet,
I can't be ashamed,
I can't be afraid,
I can't be anyone but myself.
Now, tell students to think about feelings,

ideas or actions related with teenagers.
Then, ask them to copy and complete the
poem in their notebooks and then share
their work in their groups. You can ask the
class to choose the best poems and
display them in a visible place of the
classroom. If you want, you can provide
the original poem, for students to compare
with their versions.
(L.A.: to consolidate topic of the lesson).
Answers
I AM
James Born
I am love in the face of hate,
I am kindness in the face of ridicule,
I am strength in the face of adversity,
I am patience in the face of the mule.
I will not run away from fear,
I will not run and hide.
I am bravery, I am pride,
I will make a difference in this world, big or small.
That is my promise to me, my promise to all.
15 ++
Motivate students to read the first poem
again and find phrases or sentences to
describe each picture.
(L.A.: to relate text and visuals).
Possible Answers
Picture 1: Talking to a friend / They talk for hours on end.
Picture 2: Sending them a text,
Picture 3: Their music cracks the ceiling
Picture 4: They'll leave their room a mess, And give
cleaning it a miss
Picture 5: Happy, sad, sleepy, mean / And more time in
their room.
Picture 6: Talking to a friend / They talk for hours on end.
39
16 +++ FL
Encourage fast learners to find three
sentences in the poems they have seen in
this lesson that describe a typical teenager.
Ask them to write them on a nice piece of
paper and add illustrations. Display their
work in the classroom.
(L.A.: to express opinions and connect topic
to own reality).
PAGE 34
YOUR ENGLISH IN ACTION
A:
B:
A:
B:
A:
B:
A:
B:
A:
B:
A:
B:
Answers
What do you generally do on Friday evenings?
I usually go to the movies.
How are you feeling right now?
Im tired. I have so much homework.
What are your favorite subjects at school?
I like Spanish and Math.
What are you doing next weekend?
I am doing sports and going to a disco with my
friends.
What are you wearing today?
Im wearing jeans, sneakers and a fleece jacket.
What do you like to do with your friends?
I like to go skating, going to parties and doing sports.
3 The students must read the interview about

This section provides additional exercises that
represent a good opportunity for students to
consolidate topics and language structures of the
lessons. You can assign these activities at the
end of each lesson, or as homework and give
them an extra mark.
Tell the students to search for information

about someone that has a very unusual life,
and to write a personal introduction about
him / her to a Student Chat Forum, like the
ones in Lesson 1.
Answers
Will vary.
2 Explain to the students that they must refer

to the interview in Lesson 2 to write a
complete interview using the prompts given.
You can also ask them to do this task in
pairs and then to role-play the interview in
front of the class.
this very extreme new fashion, and then

complete the paragraph.
Answers
Sonias favorite clothes and accessories are pink mini
skirts, pink tops, platform boots, false
eyelashes, glitter and pink lipstick.
She likes them because she thinks she looks really
cool, but her mother doesnt like the way she looks
or dresses.
To get money to buy her clothes and accessories she
has a weekend job at a supermarket.
PAGE 35
4 Motivate students to find out if they can be

considered typical teenagers. Tell them to
answer the quiz and calculate the scores.
Then, ask them to compare their results
with their classmates, and elicit their
comments.
Answers
Will vary according to students scores.
@@ CLICK ON
If possible, motivate students to visit the web
site and find more about the extreme fashion
described in the interview. Next class, ask them
to share their findings with their classmates.
For more information on CLICK ON, see page
12 of the Introduction.
40
UNIT 1
TEEN
TEE N LI FE
PAGE 36
PAGE 38
6 1 d.; 2 a.; 3 c.; 4 b.; 5 e.
UNIT CHECK
TRANSCRIPT: DIAMOND LAMOURS LIFE

Explain to the students that the purpose of this
section is to help them revise contents and
evaluate their performance in the whole unit.
Read the instructions and make sure all the
students understand what they are expected to
do in each activity. Encourage them to give
honest answers in order to detect their strengths
and weaknesses.
Check students results and revise any points
that the majority of them had problems with.
For more information on UNIT CHECK, see page
Interviewer:
Diamond:
Interviewer:
Diamond:
PAGE 37
Answers
READING - TWO CULTURES
a. The girl lives in Shanghai, in China. The boy lives

in Seattle, in the USA.
b. She goes to her sports club to do judo or play
baseball and tennis. He plays video games.
c. She takes the subway.
d. He gets up at 7:00 in the morning.
e. Snoop Dogg is his favorite singer.
2 a. True; b. False; c. True; d. False; e. False.

3 a. Kenny; b. Bao-Yu; c. Kenny; d. Bao-Yu; e. Bao-Yu.
LISTENING - DIAMOND LAMOUR'S LIFE
Interviewer:
Diamond:
Interviewer:
Diamond:
Interviewer:
Diamond:
Interviewer:
Diamond:
4 a. False; b. False; c. False; d. False; e. True.

5 a. fourteen; b. meets; c. Jake; d. excited; e. world.
Interviewer:
Diamond:
Interviewer:
Diamond:
Interviewer:
Diamond:
Interviewer:
Diamond:
Interviewer:
Diamond:
Interviewer:
Diamond:
Interviewer:
Diamond:
Interviewer:
Diamond:
Interviewer:
Diamond:
Hi, Diamond. Can I ask you a few questions?

Sure.
How old are you?
Im fourteen.
Where do you live?
In Lansing, Michigan.
What do you usually do on weekends?
I meet my friends downtown, we go window
shopping and have a soda or an ice cream.
And I often go to parties on Saturday night,
not to discos, but to friends houses.
How often do you go to the movies?
About once a month.
Nothing right now because Im studying for
several tests.
What are your favorite school subjects?
Spanish, history and art.
Clothes, TV, and boys.
Do you have a boyfriend?
Yes. Hes called Jake and hes 16.
What are you wearing today?
A blue top, a denim skirt, and boots.
How are you feeling?
Excited, because Im 15 tomorrow.
What are you doing next Saturday night?
I have my birthday party!
What do you care about?
Politics. I want to change the world!
What do you worry about?
I get really nervous about exams.
What are your plans for next week?
Im studying for all my exams.
41
LANGUAGE
7 A: What do you do on weekends?

B: I go out with friends.
A: What do you do with your friends?
B: We talk about sports and music.
A: Are you reading a book at the moment?
B: Yes. I am reading Harry Potter.
A: What are you doing on Friday night?
B: I am watching a movie on TV.
8 Will vary. Accept any coherent answer.

SPEAKING
9 In pairs, the students use the questions in

Exercises 1 and 7 to exchange personal
information. Make sure that they change
roles. You can assign a mark according to
these criteria:
5 points: student can introduce him / her
self and ask and answer basic questions
about personal information, with a minimum
of hesitation and grammar mistakes.
4 3 points: student can exchange
personal information, but hesitates and
makes some grammar mistakes.
2 1 points: student cant exchange
personal information, hesitates a lot and
makes a lot of grammar mistakes.
WRITING
10 The students read and reply to Bao-Yu or

Kennys posts, giving information that is true
for them. You can assign a mark according
to these criteria:
5 points: student can write a coherent short
paragraph with personal information,
without spelling or grammar mistakes.
3 4 points: student can write a short
paragraph in a coherent way, but makes
some spelling and / or grammar mistakes.
1 2 points: student cant write a coherent
short paragraph with personal information,
and makes a lot of spelling and grammar
mistakes.
42
UNIT 1
PAGE 39
FINAL REFLECTION
The purpose of this section is to allow students

to reflect on their strengths and weaknesses.
Make sure all the students understand what
they are expected to do and give enough time
to answer the questions. Encourage students
to give honest answers and show interest in
their results.
For more information on FINAL REFLECTION,
TEEN
TEE N LI FE
EXTRA TEST UNIT 1
READING - THE STUDENTS MAIL
Dear friends:
Hi! Im Dora. Im 14 and I study at Liceo Superior
in Necochea, Argentina. I
like to chat with students all around the world to
learn more about their
culture and way of life. I like listening to music and
reading. At this
moment, Im reading a very interesting novel, Worl
d Without End.
Please write to me! I can write in English and, of
course, in Spanish!
in Brazil. Im interested
Hello! Im Ariel. Im 15 and Im from Porto Alegre,
es and computers. I
in all sports, especially soccer, and I love video gam
of the world, so I
would like to have cyber friends from different parts
hope someone writes to me.
at a secondary school in
Hello friends! My name is Enzo and Im a student
in the afternoon. I
Quito, Ecuador. Im 13. I go to school five days a week
I want to have friends
start lessons at 1 p.m. and return home at 6 p.m.
from other countries.
to the movies and
I have many hobbies, I like playing sports, going
the drums in my
play
I
c
musi
having fun with my friends. I also love
school band and sometimes I sing!
Hi! Im Rachel, Its good to meet you. Im from Denv

er, Colorado, in the
USA. Im 16 years old and I like to play tennis and
basketball. I also like to
write poems and listen to music. I would like to get
cyber friends from
abroad.
Please write to me, I am waiting for your mails!
Take a look at the texts. What are the students doing?

a.
b.
c.
d.
1 pt.
Asking for advice.

Introducing themselves.
Talking about their families.
Telling a story.
2 Read the texts again and answer these questions.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5 pts.
Why do the students write the posts?

Do they have similar interests and lives?
Who is the oldest?
Who is the youngest?
Which continents are they from?
3 Read the texts once more and complete this chart.

Name
Country
4 pts.
Interests
43
LISTENING - TEENAGERS IN THE STREET
Listen to the recording. What is the person who asks the questions doing?
1 pt.
a. Doing a survey.
b. Interviewing people.
c. Reading a piece of news.
5 pts.
Listen to the recording again. Are these statements true or false?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
The teens are students at an Elementary School.

They usually study on weekends.
The boy likes to go to the cinema.
The girl is reading a novel.
The boy is looking for a girlfriend.
4 pts.
Listen to the recording again and choose the best alternative.

a.
b.
c.
d.
On Saturdays, I usually go shopping / do the shopping.

I play basketball / baseball. I'm on the school team.
I prefer to rent DVDs / CDs and stay at home.
Many / most girls like older boys.
LANGUAGE
7 Choose the right form for each sentence.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
5 pts.
Gregory cant talk to you now; he has / is having a shower.

I wash / am washing my clothes every Thursday.
They are playing / play tennis on Wednesdays.
Dont talk to me! I watch / am watching this movie.
Astronauts do / are doing experiments every morning.
She is taking / takes the dog for a walk every afternoon.
I dont like / am not liking Leonardo DiCaprio.
We are having / have lunch at 1.00 on Sundays.
My mother bakes / is baking a cake for my fathers birthday.
I listen / am listening to my favorite singers latest album.
SPEAKING
8 In pairs, role-play an interview like that in the recording. Exchange information about
5 pts.
routines, interests and favorite activities.

WRITING
9 Use the information from exercise 8 to write a short paragraph describing your best
5 pts.
friends interests and favorite activities.

35 pts.
TOTAL
0 - 12
Keep trying!
44
UNIT 1
13 - 21
Good!
22 - 29
Very good!
30 - 35
Excellent!
TEEN
T EE N LI FE
Interviewer:
Girl:
Interviewer:
Girl:

Im reading the latest Harry Potter novel.
We talk about clothes and music, TV programs,
and boys, of course!
Boy:
We always talk about sports, sports and sports.
Interviewer: Would you like to have a girlfriend?
Boy:
Id like to, but most girls like older boys. Well
have to wait!
Interviewer: Thank you very much. Here, have a copy of the
first issue of our magazine
ANSWERS TO EXTRA TEST UNIT 1
READING - STUDENTS' MAILS
1 b.
2 a. Because they want to have friends from
b.
c.
d.
e.
all over the world.

Yes, they do.
Rachel is the oldest.
Enzo is the youngest.
Theyre from North / South America.
LANGUAGE
7 a. is having; b. wash; c. play; d. am
3
Name
Dora
Ariel
Enzo
Rachel
Country
Argentina
Brazil
Ecuador
USA
watching; e. do; f. takes; g. dont like;

h. have; i. is baking; j. am listening
Interests
Listening to music; reading
Sports; video games; computers
Sports; movies; music
Sports, writing; music
LISTENING - TEENAGERS IN THE STREET
4 a.
5 a. False. b. False. c. False. d. True. e. False.
6 a. go. b. baseball. c. DVDs. d. Most
TRANSCRIPT - TEENAGERS IN THE STREET
Interviewer: Excuse me. Can I ask you a few questions? Im

doing a survey for a new teens magazine
Teenagers: Sure!
Interviewer: Are you students?
Boy:
Yes, at Brentwood High School.
Interviewer: What do you usually do on weekends?
Girl:
On Saturdays, I usually go shopping and then I
like to visit friends or go to parties.
Boy:
I play baseball. Im on the school team. On
Saturday nights, I meet my friends and we
usually go to parties.
Interviewer: How often do you go to the cinema?
Girl:
Very often; about two or three times a month.
Interviewer: What about you?
Boy:
I never go to the cinema. I prefer to rent DVDs
and stay at home.
SPEAKING
8 In pairs, the students role-play a survey and

8
exchange personal information. You can

assign a mark according to these criteria:
5 points: student can introduce him / herself
and ask and answer basic questions about
personal information, with a minimum of
hesitation and grammar mistakes.
personal information, but hesitates and
personal information, hesitates a lot and
WRITING
9 The students use the information from

Exercise 8 to write a paragraph about their
partners interests and favorite activities. You
can assign a mark according to these criteria:
paragraph with personal information, without
spelling or grammar mistakes.
3 4 points: student can write a short
paragraph in a coherent way, but makes
some spelling and / or grammar mistakes.
and makes a lot of spelling and grammar
mistakes.
45
UNIT
BELIEVE IT OR NOT
read a web page
read a scientific article
listen to an interview
listen to an advertisement
Reading
scan the text to validate predictions
use cognates to get the general meaning
information
Listening
relate speakers and speech
discriminate sounds and words
identify specific information
Language
use the Simple Future tense to express predictions
use the Present Continuous tense to talk about
Types of Evaluation
fixed arrangements
use conjunctive connectors
use the First Conditional
Speaking
ask and answer questions about fixed arrangements
talk about virtual life
Writing
write a short report
complete a paragraph about life in the future
You will also:
reflect about the importance of technology
development
develop acceptance and respect for everyones
opinions
Development
Consolidation and evaluation activities: 3 hours

+ home assignments
Didactic resources
Pictures of teenagers provided by the teacher
and by the students to illustrate the diversity of
teenager cultures.
Support material such as lists of adjectives,
Indicators
Reflection spot
Self - evaluation
Students analyze their performance in the speaking, reading, listening, and writing activities.
Unit Check
Unit evaluation
Reading: Students identify specific information and discriminate between correct and incorrect information.
Listening: Students identify the correct sequence of events and discriminate sounds.
Language: Students use the Future Tense and connectors although and besides.
Speaking: Students exchange information about future fixed arrangements.
Writing: Students write a short paragraph about a city on the moon.
Final Reflection
Extra Test
46
UNIT 2
Reading: Students identify type of text, find specific information and discriminate between correct and incorrect information.
Language: Students use the Present Perfect tense to complete a paragraph.
Writing: Students write a short paragraph about their plans and hopes for the future.
Speaking: Students exchange information about their past experiences.
BELIEVE IT OR NOT
PAGE 40
2 ++
GETTING READY
1
Introduce the unit telling the students to look

at the pictures and decide which ones show
real life and which ones show virtual life.
Motivate the students to write a list of things

that they would like to have in a virtual
world. Encourage some of them to share
their lists with their classmates and elicit
their comments.
Answers
Answers
There are only two pictures that show real life, the first
one (on the left) and the fourth (second line, on the right).
2 Ask your students to think if it is possible to

live a virtual life, and how.
Possible Answers
Yes, it is possible to have a virtual life through Internet.
3 Invite the students to think about what they

think life will be like in 50 years time, and
then choose the predictions they think will
come true. Ask some of them to share their
comments with their classmates.
Answers
Will vary, according to students predictions.
3 ++
Tell the students to have a look at the text
they are going to read and decide what type
of text it is. Do not check the answers at this
stage.
(L.A.: to identify type of text from visuals).
4 +++
In their notebooks, the students make a list
of cognates they expect to find in a text
related to a virtual world. Do not check their
answers at this point.
(L.A.: to predict content from previous
knowledge).
Answers
Will vary according to students predictions.
PAGE 42
LESSON 1
READING
A VIRTUAL WORLD FOR TEENS
BEFORE READING
1
Will vary.
5 +++
Ask the students to study the words in the
Key Word Spot. Tell them to match them
with their meaning (a. c).
(L.A.: to infer the meaning of key words).
Answers
encourage: c.; gathering: a.; skyscraper: b.
+
Tell the students to look at the pictures.
Explain to them that they all show virtual
life. Ask them to choose the virtual world
activities they would like to do.
Answers
Will vary according to students choices.
47
PAGE 43
PAGE 44
READING
@@ CLICK ON
Recommend the students to find more
interesting information about the text visiting the
web site mentioned.
At this point you may need to share some
additional information about Internet safety rules
with the students.
Background information
Teenagers nowadays are extremely technical
and generally ahead of their parents in this area.
They know how to access all the information they
need online. Possibly they own their own personal
computer, or have access to an unmonitored
computer at school or a friends house.
Parental monitoring and restrictions can be
resented. Comment with your students about
Internet rules firmly and convince them that it is
out of concern for their safety. Tell them that the
news often reports incidents of innocent
youngsters who have been led into danger
through misuse of the Internet, with sometimes
horrific results. Let your students be aware of the
dangers. Suggest them that if they know about a
friend who is in touch with a stranger, and
arranging secret meetings, they should tell
someone in authority without feeling like they are
telling tales.
Tell them to be careful what they say.
Finally, its worth mentioning that everyone,
including children, must be extra cautious with
what they write in emails. What may have been
meant as a harmless joke or amusing remark
can be misunderstood or misused by a third
person who can forward it to a number of people
causing misunderstanding and embarrassment.
And this is true of all internet communication, not
just email.
For more information on Background
information see page 7 of the Introduction.
48
UNIT 2
6 +
Ask the students to read the text quickly
and check their predictions in Exercises 3
and 4.
Answers
2. b.
3. globe, virtual, created, ideas, imagination,
international, create, digital, 3D, socializing, video,
program, adventure, company, founded, technology,
residents, unique, global, community, separate,
version, adults, interact, occasionally, special,
educational, projects, type, events, modest, entire,
region, park, computer, basic, level, islands, simple,
tutorial, appears, guide, controls, problems,
experienced, visit, page.
7 ++
Now, tell the students to read the text
carefully. Ask them to give each paragraph
(I. V.) a title (a. e.). Check their answers
orally.
Answers
I. c.; II. e.; III. d.; IV. b.; V: - a.
8 ++
Ask the students to read the text again
and find the required information a. d.
Answers
a. learn, play, create a digital self, make their ideas
come true.
b. fly through a 3D landscape, build skyscrapers and
virtual vehicles, have virtual land.
c. chat, socialize, exchange ideas, make friends.
d. skyscrapers, virtual vehicles.
9 +++
Now the students read the text again and
decide if the statements a. e. are true or
false.
BELIEVE IT OR NOT
Answers
a. true; b. false; c. true; d. true; e. false.
10 +++
Invite the students to correct the false
sentences in Exercise 9 in their notebooks.
(L.A.: to identify and extract supporting
information).
Answers
b. Its not a computer game. Its a place where teens
can meet and make friends, exchange ideas and
create.
e. You dont have to pay if you sign up for basic level.
The basic level accounts are free.
AFTER READING
11 +++
In pairs, the students think about the
characteristics they would like to create for
their own avatar. Encourage them to write
their ideas in their notebooks using the
pattern in the book, and then compare with
other students.
(L.A.: to relate topic to their own reality).
Answers
Will vary.
Reflection Spot

The students read the statements and
assess:
their ability to connect the topic of the
lesson to their own reality.
their ability to talk about a topic and
explain the reasons of their choices.
PAGE 45
LANGUAGE SPOT
Connectors besides, although
1. The students find the sentences a. and b. in the
text. Draw their attention to the words in bold.
2. The students read the other examples, again
paying special attention to the words in bold.
3. Help them identify which of the words in bold
expresses a concessive idea.
Answ ers:
a. although
4. Now, help them identify what the other word
expresses.
Answ ers:
b. besides expresses an additional idea.
5. The students copy and complete the general
rule in their notebooks.
We can use words such as although and
besides to join two sentences together. We
use besides when we want to express an
additional idea. We use although when we
want to introduce a concession.
6. The students read the text again to find more
examples. Encourage them to identify the
addition or the concession. You can write this
example on the board:
( + ) addition
( / ) concession
Besides flying through a changing landscape,
chatting and socializing with other teens, ( + )
they can build anything from skyscrapers to
virtual vehicles.
( / ) Although it provides the technology , the
residents are the ones who really help shape
the world.
Answ ers
Teen Second Life is an international gathering
place for teens between the ages of 13 - 17 to
make friends and exchange ideas. Besides
this ( + ), they can learn, play and create.
Only teens between the ages of 13 and 17 are
allowed ( / ) (although there is a separate
version of Second Life for adults).
49
ERROR ALERT
Draw students attention to the note of the LANGUAGE
SPOT. Remind them not to mistake the connector
besides for the preposition beside.
Additional exercise
Complete these sentences with beside or besides, as
it corresponds.
a. Hes too busy to go to Japan; _______ he doesnt
speak Japanese.
b. Come and sit _______ me.
c. Have you seen my pen? I left it on the table
_______ the window.
d. I dont like to go out to; _______ its very cold today.
e. I cant help you with your homework. _______ its
too late.
Encourage students to find more examples in the text
and then copy them in their notebooks, identifying each
case.
Answers:
Besides (making friends and exchanging ideas), they
can play, learn and create. (addition)
Having land in Second Life allows you to build,
display and store your virtual creations; besides, you
can also host events and businesses. (addition)
the Introduction.
A: Do you know what you do in Second Life? Can you

explain it to me?
B: Sure! First of all, you have to create an avatar.
A: An avatar? What is that?
B: It is a digital self, a sort of virtual personality. With this,
you can chat and socialize with other teens from all over
the world.
A: Really? It sounds amazing! Tell me more!
B: Besides socializing with other teens, you can also build
things like skyscrapers and even virtual vehicles!
A: Are you sure that the other players are all teenagers?
B: This game is for people between 13 and 17, although
adults have their own version.
A: Mm. Im not sure; I think I prefer the real world!
14 ++
Encourage the students to practice the
dialogue in Exercise 13 in pairs, imitating the
recording. Then, invite them to role-play it in
front of the class.
(L.A.: to role-play a communicative situation).
15 +++
You can assign this exercise as homework
for next class. Explain to the students that, in
pairs, they have to think about a game they
like to play. Then, in their notebooks, they
write a dialogue like the one in Exercise 13,
exchanging information about the game.
(L.A: to consolidate vocabulary and
language).
12 ++
Ask the students to copy and complete the
paragraph in their notebooks using besides
or although.
(L.A.: to use a new language structure).
Answers
besides, although, besides, although.
Answers
Will vary.
PAGE 46
13 +++
In their notebooks, the students copy and

complete the dialogue using information
from the text. Then, play the recording to
allow them to check their answers.
(L.A.: to use vocabulary related to the topic).
Answers
See transcript.
50
UNIT 2
LETS CHECK
BELIEVE IT OR NOT

In pairs, the students role-play the dialogue
they wrote. Ask the students to evaluate
their classmates performance using the
guidelines on page 46.
PAGE 48
LESSON 2
LISTENING
WHY NOT THE MOON?
BEFORE LISTENING
1
PAGE 47
17 ++
Motivate the students to think about what
their own avatar would be like. Ask them
to write about the virtual personality they
would like to have. Instruct them to use their
ideas in Exercises 1 and 2, information from
the text and also their imagination. Next
class, invite some students to share their
work with their classmates
(L.A.: to write a paragraph about virtual life).
Answers
+
Start the lesson asking the students to
identify the pictures. If you find that they
have difficulties with the words, help with
prompts or give them the words in random
order for them to match them with the
pictures. Then tell them to find the words in
the Word Search Puzzle
1. PLANET
2. ASTRONAUT.
3. ROBOT
4. SUN
5. MOON
6. MARS
7. SPACECRAFT
8. STAR
(L.A.: to activate vocabulary related to the
topic of the lesson).
Answers
Will vary.
18 + FL
Motivate fast learners to make a drawing in
their notebooks to illustrate their virtual
personalities. You can also make them draw
on a piece of cardboard and display the
drawings in the classroom.
(L.A.: to relate text and pictures).
Answers
Will vary.
REAL LIFE SPOT

This section is intended to allow students make
T +
+ U
++
++
++
++
++
MO
++
++
++
+ L
P +
++
++
+
+
A
+
+
+
+
O
+
+
A
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
N
+
+
+
N
+
N
T
O
B
O
R
+
+
+
+
O
+
+
+
E
+
+
+
S
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
R
+
T
+
+
+
R
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
T
+
+
+
A
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
S
+
M
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
A
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
T
F
A
R
C
E
C
A
P
S
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
R
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
A
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
T
N
U
S
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
S
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
2 ++
The students answer the questions in pairs.
Check their answers orally.
(L.A.: to relate topic to previous knowledge).
Answers
Will vary, according to students opinions.
51
PAGE 49
5 ++
3 ++
Ask the students to name one positive and
one negative thing about living in space.
Invite some of them to write their answers
on the board.
Answers
Will vary.
4 ++
Explain to the students that they are going
to listen to an interview with three experts
about NASA plans to build a city on the
Moon. Ask them to choose three
alternatives to guess who they are. Do not
check their answers at this point.
(L.A.: to use previous knowledge to make
predictions).
You may need some background
information about this topic to share with the
students.
NASA announced plans to establish a base on
the Moon and make it into a permanent city by
2024. Crews of four astronauts are expected to
work on the base, a week at a time, beginning
around 2020.
To cover the costs, NASA is planning to keep its
current budget of $17 billion and use the money
saved by scrapping the space shuttle program.
The space agency plans to coordinate commercial
and international assistance with the program. It
consulted 13 space agencies from different
countries while formulating the initial plan.
One of the main goals of the project is to
establish a stepping-off point for human
exploration and colonization of Mars.
http://news.cnet.com/2300-11397_3-6140867-1.html
52
UNIT 2
Ask the students to look up the meaning of

the words in the Key Word Spot in a
dictionary.
Answers
crew: all the people working on a ship, plane, etc.
launch: to send something such as a spacecraft into
space.
mild:
not severe or harsh / not extreme.
sunlit: receiving light from the sun.
supplies: the things such as food, medicines, fuel, etc.
that are needed by a group of people.
LISTENING
6 +
10
Ask the students to listen to the recording

Answers
A lunar scientist, a professor, an astronaut.
7 ++
10
Play the first part of the recording. Tell the

students to listen and identify the profession
of the people.
Answers
a. Paul Spudis, lunar scientist; b. Stella Mc Curdy,
professor; c. Michael Clifford, astronaut.
8 ++
10
Play the second part of the recording. Ask

the students to listen and choose the best
answer for each question.
Answers
a. iii.; b. ii.; c. i.; d. ii.
BELIEVE IT OR NOT
PAGE 50
9 ++
10
Play the final part of the recording again.

Tell the students to listen and identify the
year each country is planning to put a man
on the Moon.
You can read the years aloud first, to help the
students recognize them when they listen:
2014: two thousand and fourteen or twenty
fourteen.
2020: two thousand and twenty or twenty
twenty.
2124: twenty one twenty four.
2030: two thousand and thirty or twenty thirty.
2034: two thousand and thirty four or twenty
thirty four.
2040: two thousand and forty or twenty forty.
(L.A.: to extract specific information)
Mr. Clifford: The U.S. space agency is going to construct

spacecrafts that will take people and supplies to
the Moon.
Interviewer: Mr. Clifford, how long will people be able to stay
on the Moon?
Mr. Clifford: About six months.
Mr. Spudis: Besides, crews of four astronauts will work on
the base, a week at a time.
Interviewer: Ms. McCurdy, are there any more countries
interested in living on the Moon?
Ms. McCurdy: Russia wants to put a base on the moon by
2020 and China plans to put a man on the
Moon by 2024, followed by Japan in 2030.
Interviewer: Mr. Spudis, are you planning to take holidays on
the Moon?
Mr. Spudis: Well, that would be really nice!
Adapted from:
http://www.onpointradio.org/shows/2006/12/20061211_a_main.asp
Answers
China 2024; Japan 2030; Russia - 2020
10 +++
AFTER LISTENING
10
Tell the students to identify who said

statements a. c. Then, play the recording
once more to allow them to check their
answers.
(L.A.: to identify speakers in a conversation).
Answers
a. Mrs. Mc. Curdy; b. Mr. Clifford; c. Mr. Spudis
TRANSCRIPT - WHY NOT THE MOON?
10
Interviewer: NASA announced this week that it is establishing

a base on the Moon and will make it into a
permanent city by 2024. Today we will talk about
this with lunar scientist Paul Spudis, with
professor Stella McCurdy, and with NASA
astronaut Michael R. Clifford. Mr. Spudis, the
obvious first question: Why the moon?
Mr. Spudis: Why not? Its only three days from the earth.
Interviewer: Ms. McCurdy, where are you going to build the
base?
Ms. McCurdy: I think the South Pole is the best option because its
weather is mild and almost permanently sunlit.
Interviewer: Mr. Clifford, are astronauts prepared to live on
the Moon?
GAME SPOT
Remember that games are highly motivating since
they are amusing and at the same time
challenging for the students. They employ
language in real contexts and they also
encourage and increase cooperation.
They create the motivation for learners of English
to get involved and participate actively in the
learning activities, bring real world context into the
classroom, and enhance students use of English
in a flexible, communicative way.
Remember that games are used not only for mere
fun, but more importantly, for the useful practice
and review of language lessons. Thus, the
meaning of the language the students listen to,
read, speak and write will be more vividly
experienced and, therefore, better remembered.
Encourage your students to find out how many
words related to space they can remember.
Explain to them that they must look at the pictures
and write the words using the letters in the sun
just once. Invite some students to write the words
on the board to check this exercise.
53
Answers
1. SUNLIT; 2. SUPPLIES; 3. NASA; 4. CREW;
5. LAUNCH; 6. MILD
PAGE 51
LANGUAGE SPOT
The future
or discover a particular grammar structure or any
them the answers.
1. The students revise the examples from the text.
2. The students identify which of the sentences
gives information about
a. future events and predictions
b. plans and intentions
c. fixed future arrangements
Answ ers: a. c.; b. a.; c. c.
a. We use the Simple Future to give
information about future events and
predictions.
b. We use the Present Continuous to give
information about plans and intentions
and fixed future arrangements.
4. The students now identify what the future
tense expresses in sentences a. g.
Answ ers:
a. future arrangement; prediction; b. future
event; c. future plan; d. future event;
e. prediction; f. future event.
54
UNIT 2
ERROR ALERT
The Present Continuous Tense is also used to express
actions and events that are happening at the moment.
(Example: Im reading a book)
Additional exercise
Read the following sentences. Identify which of them
refer to events that are happening now, and which of
them refer to future fixed arrangements. Write N (now)
or F (future).
a. Lauren cant talk to you now. Shes having lunch.
b. I cant help you. Im studying for the test.
c. My mother is arriving on the next bus from Santiago.
d. Susan is baking a cake for tea.
e. My brother is playing football on Saturday.
the Introduction.
11 ++
Refer students to the LANGUAGE SPOT.
Ask them to choose the correct alternative
for each sentence. Check the answers
orally.
Answers
a. Im playing basketball at 5:30.
b. Do you think it will snow tomorrow?
c. I think Ill buy a new cap.
d. I am not working tomorrow. We can go
shopping if you like.
e. Yes, were visiting my grandmother.
f. Im helping Marcy with her homework after
school today.
g. My sister is getting married next month. We will
have a party at home.
12 +++
In their groups, the students write a short
report about the city on the Moon. Instruct
them to include information from the
interview and any other facts that they find
interesting to add. Encourage your students
to collect supporting materials such as:
illustrations, photos, more information, etc.
and present their report to their classmates.
Organize a class competition and give a
prize to the best performance.
(L.A.: to organize ideas to write a report).
BELIEVE IT OR NOT
Answers
LETS CHECK
Will vary.
Reflection Spot

their ability to write a short report about
the topic of an interview.
their ability to express and support their
opinions.
For more information on the Reflection
Spot, see page 6 of the Introduction.
PAGE 52
13 +++
11

The students copy and complete the
sentences with the words in the box.
Answers
a. robot; b. agency; c. operate; d. equipment;
e. trip; f. spacecrafts; g. colonization; h. objective;
i. location; j. astronaut
PAGE 53
In pairs, the students put the dialogue

between Susan and Simon in order and
copy it in their notebooks. Then, play the
recording and ask them to listen and check.
Play the recording with pauses for students to
practice the dialogue. Invite some pairs to
role-play the dialogue in front of their
classmates.
Motivate fast learners to try the quiz and

see how much they know about the solar
system. Ask them to check the answers
with their classmates.
(L.A.: to relate topic and previous knowledge).
Answers
a. iii.; b. - i.; c. - ii.; d. - i.; e. i.; f. ii.
Answers
See transcript.
TRANSCRIPT - ORAL PRACTICE
15 ++ FL
11
Susan: What are you doing tomorrow, Simon?

Simon: Tomorrow morning I am meeting my best friend. Im
having lunch with her, and then in the afternoon were
going to the cinema. How about you?
Susan: I dont know exactly. Perhaps Ill visit my grandmother
in the morning and then Ill study for the math test.
Simon: When are we having the math test?
Susan: Next Monday, after the first break.
Simon: Well, in that case, Ill call my friend immediately. Im
studying with you tomorrow. I think Ill get better results!
You may need some additional information on this

topic.
The solar system is our Sun and everything that
travels around it. Our solar system is elliptical in
shape. The Sun is in the center of the solar system.
Our solar system is always in motion. Eight known
planets and their moons, along with comets,
asteroids, and other space objects orbit the Sun.
The Sun is the biggest object in our solar system. It
contains more than 99% of the solar systems mass.
Astronomers think the solar system is more than 4
billion years old.
55
Astronomers are now finding new objects far, far

from the Sun which they call dwarf planets. Pluto,
which was once called a planet, is now called a
dwarf planet.
The Sun is our closest star. It is a member of the
Milky Way galaxy. The Sun is a yellow dwarf star,
which means it is a medium size star. It is believed
to be over 4 billion years old. The Sun spins slowly
on its axis as it revolves around the galaxy.
The center, or core, of the Sun is very hot. A
process called nuclear fusion takes place there.
Nuclear fusion produces a lot of energy. Some of
this energy travels out into space as heat and light.
Some of it arrives at Earth. Streams of gas particles
known as the solar wind also flow out from the Sun.
A planet is a large space object which revolves
around a star. It also reflects that stars light. Eight
planets have been discovered in our solar system.
Mercury, Venus, Earth, and Mars are the planets
closest to the Sun. They are called the inner
planets. The inner planets are made up mostly of
rock. The outer planets are Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus,
and Neptune. Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, and Neptune
are large balls of gases with rings around them. All
eight planets travel around the Sun in a different
orbit. In its orbit, there are not many other objects
like the planet.
Dwarf planets like Pluto, are objects that are similar
to planets except that they orbit the Sun in areas
where there are many similar objects.
Mercury is the smallest planet in our solar system.
Mercury is about the same size as our Moon. It is
very close to the Sun. Mercury travels around the
Sun faster than any other planet. It was named after
Mercury, the swift messenger of the gods in ancient
Roman mythology. Mercury can only be seen from
Earth just before sunrise or just after sunset, but not
in the middle of the night. That is because Mercury
always appears near the Sun when viewed from
Earth. Mercury has a very thin atmosphere. Humans
would not be able to live there. The surface of
Mercury has holes in it where objects such as
meteorites and asteroids crashed into it.
Venus and Earth are almost the same size. Venus
is the closest planet to Earth, but it does not have
oceans or human life like Earth. Venus gets so hot
during the day that it could melt a lead cannonball.
The temperature rises to 484 degrees Celsius on
the side facing the Sun. Venus has very thick,
rapidly spinning clouds which cover its surface.
56
UNIT 2
These clouds hold heat in. That is why Venus gets

so hot. These clouds also reflect sunlight. That is
why Venus appears so bright to us here on Earth.
There are constant thunderstorms in these clouds.
Venus has several large inactive volcanoes. Much of
the surface is covered by old lava flows from these
volcanoes. Venus is unusual because it rotates in a
direction opposite that of all of the other planets.
Venus spins very slowly as it orbits the Sun.
Earth is the third closest planet to the Sun. It has
an atmosphere made up of many different gases,
but mainly it is nitrogen and oxygen. The
atmosphere gives us air to breathe. The Earth orbits
around the Sun. It takes one year to go around the
Sun one complete time. The Earth also rotates, or
spins, on its axis. It takes one day to spin around
one complete time. The Earths axis is not straight
up and down, but tilted a little bit. This tilt is
responsible for us having seasons. Otherwise, the
temperature would be pretty much the same all year
long.
The temperature on Mars can be very, very cold.
On its warmest day, Mars can still be a very cold
place. At the top and bottom of the planet are poles
just like on Earth. During the Martian winter, ice
caps can be seen at the poles. Mars has many
craters which were formed by meteorites or asteroids
hitting it. Mars also has some of the tallest volcanoes
and some of the deepest valleys in our solar system.
Mars has two moons, Phobos and Deimos, which
have unusual shapes. Scientists think these potatoshaped moons were once asteroids captured by
Mars gravitational pull.
Jupiter is a large gas planet whose clouds change
colors daily. This planet is made mostly of hydrogen
and helium gases. Jupiter gives off two times more
heat than it gets from the Sun. It shines very brightly
in the night sky for nine months of the year when it
is closest to Earth. Pictures taken by space probes
have shown thin rings around Jupiter. Jupiter has
forty-nine named moons (and may have as many as
63!). One of Jupiters moons, Io, has active
volcanoes on it. Areas on Io that are near the
volcanoes are very, very hot.
Saturn is a very large gas planet which spins very
rapidly on its axis. It spins so fast that it flattens out
the top and the bottom of the planet. Saturns
atmosphere has winds which can blow at over 1,800
kilometers per hour. The white spots on Saturn are
believed to be powerful storms. Saturn is
BELIEVE IT OR NOT
surrounded by over 1,000 rings made of ice and

dust. Some of the rings are very thin and some are
very thick. Scientists believe that the particles came
from the destruction of moons circling the planet.
Saturn has at least 52 moons. Some of these
moons orbit the planet within the rings, creating
gaps in the rings.
Uranus tilts over so far on its axis that it rotates on
its side. Because of this, its poles are sometimes
pointed almost directly at the Sun. Uranus
atmosphere is made up of hydrogen, helium, and
methane. The temperature in the upper atmosphere
is very cold. The cold methane gas is what gives
Uranus its blue-green color. The rapid rotation of
Uranus causes winds up to 600 kilometers per hour
to blow in its atmosphere. Uranus has 27 named
moons. Some of these moons are less than 100
kilometers wide and black as coal.
Neptune and Uranus are very much alike. They are
both large gas planets that look like big blue-green
balls in the sky. Neptune has winds in its
atmosphere which blow at over 2,000 kilometers per
hour. This planet has large, dark circles on its
surface which astronomers believe to be storms.
Neptune has two thick and two thin rings which
surround it. Neptune also has thirteen known
moons. Four of these moons orbit the planet within
the rings. One of Neptunes moons, Triton, orbits the
planet in a direction opposite to Neptunes other
moons. Neptune is the farthest planet from the Sun.
information, see page 7 of the Introduction.
http://starchild.gsfc.nasa.gov/docs/StarChild/solar_system_le
vel1/neptune.html
REAL LIFE SPOT

humor to the class. All the jokes and cartoons
are related to the topic of the lesson. Give some
minutes to allow students to read and then invite
them to share their comments to make sure
they understood the joke. At this point, you may
allow the use of Spanish to check
comprehension.
PAGE 54
LESSON 3
READING
VIRTUAL ME?
BEFORE READING
1
+
Introduce the topic of the lesson with a
general conversation among the students.
Ask them if they think it is possible to
predict the future, and elicit their comments.
Then, motivate them to read the famous
predictions (a. g.) in pairs, and match
them with the person who made them
(i. vi.). Check the answers orally.
Answers
a. v.; b. i-; c. iv.; d. vi.; e. ii.; f. iii.; g. vii.
2 ++
Tell the students to find the words in the
Key Word Spot in the text and then choose
the correct meaning for them.
(L.A.: to infer the meaning of key words
from the context).
Answers
a. i.; b. ii.; c. ii.; d. ii.
PAGE 55
3 +++
Invite the students to read the text quickly
and identify all the cognates. Tell them to
predict what the text is about. Do not check
their answers at this point.
(L.A.: to formulate predictions from
cognates).
4 +
Ask the students to have a look at the text
and identify where it was taken from.
(L.A.: to identify the origin of a text).
57
8 +++
READING
5 +
check their predictions in exercises 3 and 4.
Answers
3. a.
Cognates: cyber, robots, optional, accent,
computer, engineer, family, artificial, intelligence,
planned, voice, use, creation, company, different,
personalities, producing, educational, animated,
interacts, details, conversation, related, courses,
university, technology, quarter, regularly, class,
students, prefer, moving, install, project, clients,
multimedia, systems, science, million, expansion,
article, estimates, billion, virtual, services, grammar,
logical, inference, verbs, adjectives.
4. c.
6 ++
Ask the students to read the text again
carefully. Tell them to put the sentences
(a. e.) back into blanks (1) (5).
(L.A.: to locate missing information).
Answers
a. (5); b. (1); c. (4); d. (3); e. (2)
7 ++
Ask the students to read the text again and
decide if the statements a. f. are true or
false.
Answers
a. False (Shahin Magsoudi is the computer engineer
who created Robot Hosting). b. True. c. False (The
robots remember personal details and course related
information). d. True. e. True. f. True.
58
UNIT 2
The students read the text once more to

find the answer to questions a. e.
Answers
a. Because they have artificial intelligence.
b. No, they have more than 20 different personalities
and appearances.
c. They were created for educational purposes.
d. They can talk about class times and rooms, and also
about class topics.
e. He is a computer engineer who is the creator of
these virtual robots.
PAGE 57
AFTER READING
9 ++
Ask the students to write a list of activities
or areas in which they think robots can be
very useful. Invite them to share their
(L.A.: to relate topic with own reality).
Answers
Will vary.
BELIEVE IT OR NOT
LANGUAGE SPOT
The First Conditional
1. The students revise the sentences from the
text and other examples.
2. They answer the questions.
Answ ers:
a. two; b. the ones that refer to a condition
begin with if; the others refer to a
consequence; c. if; d. no.
3. The students read the general rule and choose
the correct alternative.
We use the First Conditional to talk about
future events that are probable to happen.
The if clause expresses a condition, and the
future clause expresses the consequence
or result.
Note: The future clause can also contain other
modal verbs such as can and must.
4. The students use the information in the text to
complete the conditional sentences.
Answ ers:
a. they log on to the Robot Hosting site; b.
you want to buy one.
PAGE 58
11 ++
12

dialogue with words and phrases from the
box. Then, play the recording to allow them
to check their answers.
(L.A.: to use vocabulary related to the
topic).
Answers
See transcript.
12
A: Do you think that, in the future, people will have robots at

home?
B: Sure! I believe that robots will be as common as personal
computers. They will even operate them!
A: Amazing! What other things will personal robots do?
B: Well, to begin with, they will be part of home
entertainment centers.They will sing and dance.
A: Will they tell jokes too?
B: Yes, but, just like humans, they wont always be funny!
A: Sounds great! What problems do you think there will be?
B: I think some people will lose their jobs and bad people will
create criminal robots!
12 ++
Ask the students to look at the pictures.
Then, in their notebooks, tell them to write
complete sentences to answer the questions.

10 +
Possible Answers
Refer students to the LANGUAGE SPOT.

Tell them to copy and complete the
sentences in their notebooks using the First
Conditional.
a.
b.
d.
e.
We will be very happy.

Ill be late for school / Ill run all the way.
We will get wet / Ill stay at home.
Ill enjoy it very much.
Answers
a. If you dont hurry, we will be late!
b. Mark will be very happy if he passes his exam.
c. If Henry fails his exam, he will not be very happy.
d. If you stay up all night, you will be very tired.
e. If Rick drives too fast, he will have an accident.
59
13 +++ FL
REAL LIFE SPOT
Invite the students to ask some of their

classmates the questions in Exercise 12
and add three more questions. Explain to
them that they must copy and complete the
chart in their notebooks and take notes of
their answers. Encourage some students
to report the results of this mini-survey to
their classmates.
(L.A.: to ask and answer questions / to do a
survey).
Answers
Will vary, according to students answers.
Remember that this section is intended to allow

students make connections between the topic of
the lesson and the real life, and at the same
time provide additional information that may be
useful for them.
Make sure you give enough time for them to
read and then elicit their comments.
PAGE 60
LESSON 4
PAGE 59
LISTENING

LETS CHECK
IT WONT BE CHEAP!

The students copy and complete the
sentences in their notebooks, using the
First Conditional.
For more information on LET'S CHECK,
Introduce the topic of the lesson telling the

students to imagine what their life will be
like in 50 years time. Ask them to copy and
complete the chart in their notebooks and
then ask their partners.
Answers
Will vary.
2 ++
Invite the students to look at the picture in
pairs and identify the things that belong to a
city of the future. You can organize a class
competition, offering a prize to the fastest
pair. When the time is up, check the
answers orally.
Answers
a. go, will buy.
b. goes, will lose.
c. dont wear, will catch.
d. take, will feel.
e. doesnt rain, will go.
60
UNIT 2
Answers
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
A robot is sweeping the streets.

There are surveillance cameras.
People are wearing strange clothes.
Buses are flying.
A boy is talking by cell phone.
A tourism agency is offering holidays on the Moon.
BELIEVE IT OR NOT
PAGE 61
3 ++
Tell the students to read the list of
predictions for the year 2050 and choose
the predictions that they think are most
likely to come true. Ask some students to
share their answers with their classmates.
(L.A.: to relate topic and previous
knowledge).
Answers
4 +++
to listen to a recording about one of the
predictions in Exercise 3. Invite them to
predict which one they think it is related to.
Do not check their answers yet.
(L.A.: to predict content from the context).
5 +++
Ask the students to study the words in the
Key Word Spot and match them with their
meaning. Tell some students to write the
answers on the board.
Answers
Accommodation: a place to work, live or stay.
Book (verb): to make a reservation.
Flight: a journey made by air.
Hang on: wait.
Luxurious: very comfortable, containing expensive
things.
ERROR ALERT
Hang on = wait (NOT= colgar en)
Alert your students on more cases of prepositional
verbs with the verb hang, such as:
Hang about, hang around, hang back, hang in, hang
on, hang out, hang up, hang together, hang out.
Additional exercise
Choose the correct definition for each phrasal verb.
1. Hang with means...
a. To do the same activity for a very long time
b. Spend time with
c. Make electrical connections
2. Hang about means
a. Make something increase
b. Spend time somewhere not doing much
c. Waste time
3. Hang around means...
a. Assume control of a company or organization
b. Stay in a place
c. Go away
4. Hang back means...
a. Harmonize or be compatible
b. Result from a process
c. Not move forwards to avoid doing something
5. Hang together means...
a. Work together when things are difficult
b. Accept something you dont really want to get
something you do want
c. Become controlled
Answers:
1. b; 2. b; 3. b; 4. c.; 5. a.
the Introduction.
6 +++
Ask the students to predict the kind of text
they think they are going to listen to. Tell
them to choose an alternative from the list,
but do not check their answers at this point.
(L.A.: to formulate predictions from the
context).
61
PAGE 62
LISTENING
7 +
13
Play the recording. Ask the students to

listen and check their predictions in
Exercises 4 and 6.
Answers
4. People will take vacations in space.; 6. d.
8 ++
13
Ask the students to listen again and choose

the correct alternative for each sentence
a. d.
(L.A.: to discriminate words).
Answers
a. are; b. three; c. will; d. honeymoon.
9 +++
13
Tell the students to copy the sentences into

their notebooks. Then, play the recording
again and ask them to listen and complete
each sentence with one word.
Answers
a. space; b. passenger; c. passengers; d. worry;
e. exotic
TRANSCRIPT IT WONT BE CHEAP!
13
You might think you've heard everything about tourism. Now

imagine taking your vacation in space!
Believe it or not, we are counting down to the first space tourist
flight. The Virgin Galactic Spaceship is taking off soon!
If you plan to make a reservation, hang on, it wont be cheap!
Each passenger will pay U$S 200,000, which means over a
thousand dollars a minute!
Passengers will fly at three times the speed of sound. All
passengers will enjoy spectacular views and luxurious seats
with large windows.
On board, theyll find hospitality while enjoying the ultimate in
passenger amenities. The trip will include preflight training
and three days luxury accommodation at the Virgin Galactic
space camp.
62
Tourists can choose to take off from the Mojave Desert near Los
Angeles, or from our spaceport in New Mexico.
What about people who cant afford this vacation now? Dont
worry. The cost of space flight will come down, so perhaps their
grandchildren can think about spending their vacation on the
Moon or even have their honeymoon in a hotel orbiting Venus!
Meanwhile, they can deposit U$S 20,000 and book a spaceship
flight online at www.virgingalactic.com .
If it sounds too exotic for you, you can take our tours to Florida
and visit the Kennedy Space Center, instead. We are departing
tomorrow at 9:45 a.m.
UNIT 2
AFTER LISTENING
LANGUAGE SPOT
The Future Revision
them the answers.
1. The students read the sentences from the text
and other examples.
2. The students identify what the sentences refer
to, and choose an alternative.
Answ ers: b.
We use the Present Continuous Tense to
refer to fixed arrangements for the future.
4. The students analyze the sentence from the
text and identify the difference from the
examples provided in Point 1.
Answ ers:
It describes an event that is happening right
now, in this period of time.
BELIEVE IT OR NOT
PAGE 63
LETS CHECK
10 +++
to check their progress and to provide
information to the teacher about any points that
the majority of the students have problems
with.
In pairs, the students ask and answer the
questions, using the Present Progressive
tense. Instruct them to refer to Jerry and Beths
diaries as in the example, and make sure they
change roles to ask and answer. Then, tell
them to write the questions and answers in
their notebooks. Do not check the answers yet.
11 ++
What time is Jerry seeing the dentist on Thursday?

He is seeing her at four oclock.
What is Beth doing on Wednesday at 5:30?
She is going to the gym .
What are Jerry and Beth studying on Friday?
They are studying math.
12 +++
In their group, the students answer
questions a. and b. and exchange opinions
about being a space tourist and their
reasons. Invite some groups to share their
conclusions with the rest of the class.
Remember not to interrupt the students to
correct mistakes while they are in a
speaking activity. It is better to take notes
on the most important errors and correct
them at the end of the class.
PAGE 64
14
Tell the students that you will play the

recording for them to check their questions
and answers in Exercise 10. Once they
have done this, play the recording again,
with pauses, for them to repeat and
practice the short dialogues. Invite some
pairs to role-play the different dialogues in
(L.A: to relate written and spoken versions
of a text; to discriminate between correct
and incorrect information; to imitate a
model of spoken language).
Answers
See transcript.
14
What is Jerry doing on Wednesday?

He is going to the theater with Bob.
What is Jerry doing on Monday?
He is playing tennis with Linda.
What is Beth doing on Thursday?
She is having her first driving lesson.
What are Jerry and Beth doing on Tuesday?
They are meeting Cristina.
13 +++
Tell the students to examine the boarding
passes. Then, motivate them to exchange
information in pairs about Mr. and Mrs.
Freemans fixed arrangements, as in the
example.
Possible Answers:
a. When is Mrs. Freeman going to San Francisco? She
is going to San Francisco on June, 11th.
b. Where is Mrs. Freeman going? Shes going to San
Francisco.
c. Where is she taking the plane? Shes taking the
plane in New York.
d. Who is going to San Francisco in seat 15D? Mr.
Freeman is going to San Francisco in seat 15D.
e. At what time is Mr. Freeman taking the plane? Hes
taking the plane at 7pm.
63
Reflection Spot

class to allow students reflect on their
their ability to extract information from
visuals.
their ability to exchange information about
fixed arrangements.
@@ CLICK ON
Motivate the students to find out more information
related to this topic visiting the web site on page
65. Encourage them to take notes on any
interesting information they find and next class
share their comments with their classmates.
PAGE 66
14 ++ FL
Encourage fast learners to read the list of
phrasal verbs related to the topic of the text.
Motivate them to match them with the pictures.
(L.A.: to relate meaning and pictures).
Answers
a. 2; b. 3; c. 1; d. 4.

them an extra mark.
Answers
PAGE 65
15 +++
You can assign this activity as homework
with an extra mark. Ask the students to
think about their fixed arrangements for
next week, and then write a short
paragraph about them. Next class, invite
some students to share their work with the
rest of the class.
(L.A.: to write a paragraph about future
fixed arrangements).
1. Answers will vary, but motivate students to imitate

the messages on page 47.
2. Will vary.
3. + + + E E + + + + + + + + T C
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
REAL LIFE SPOT

This section is intended to allow students make
64
UNIT 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
R
E
B
Y
C
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
C
N
E
G
I
L
L
E
T
N
I
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
T
A
+
+
+
N
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
R
M
+
+
+
+
G
+
+
+
+
+
+
T
V
U
+
+
+
+
+
I
+
+
+
+
I
+
Z
L
+
+
+
+
+
+
N
+
+
F
+
+
L
T
+
+
+
+
+
+
R
E
I
C
+
+
A
I
+
+
+
+
+
O
+
C
E
A
+
+
U
M
+
+
+
+
B
+
I
+
+
R
+
+
T
E
+
+
+
O
+
A
+
+
+
+
+
+
R
D
+
+
+
+
L
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
I
I
+
+
+
O
M
P
U
T
E
R
+
+
V
A
+
+
+
PAGE 67
4
a. Where are they departing from? (They
are departing) from their hotel.
b. At what time are they starting the tour?
(They are starting the tour) at 9:00 am or
3 pm.
BELIEVE IT OR NOT
c. At what time are they returning to the

hotel? (They are returning) at 12:30 pm
or 6:30 pm.
d. What places are they visiting? (They are
visiting) the Civic Center, the Moneda
Palace, the Cathedral, the Museum of
National History and the Central Post
Office, Santa Luca Hill, Parque Forestal
and the Fine Arts Museum.
e. Where is the tour finishing? (The tour
is finishing) at the Los Graneros del
Alba village.
PAGE 69
2 a. False; b. False; c. False; d. True;

e. True.
3 a. 10; b. rockets; c. glass; d. pills; e. Mars,

Mercury, Pluto.
LISTENING - SPACE TOURISM
15
4 a. expensive; b. safer; c. colonizing;

d. will; e. dream.
PAGE 68
5 a. space; b. robots; c. temperature;

d. Moon; e. Humans.
UNIT CHECK
6 e.; d.; b.; c; a.

and weaknesses.
Answers
READING - LIVING IN SPACE
a. They will work and live in settlements

that will allow people to lead a normal
life.
b.They will stay for six months.
c. By the end of the century there will be
permanent settlements on the Moon.
d.They will take water from a large ice lake
on the Moon.
e. Life is going to be easier than living on a
space station.
TRANSCRIPT - SPACE TOURISM
15
Interviewer: Dr. Graham, what can you tell us about this

crazy idea of vacations in space?
Dr. Graham: Well, tourist agencies are offering a new kind of
adventure vacation visit a space-station, check
into a space hotel and even take a spacewalk!
That is a very expensive kind of vacation, but
when space tourism becomes cheaper, ordinary
people will be able to afford them.
Interviewer: How many people will want to risk their lives
when there is a chance of not coming back?
Dr. Graham: But its just the beginning! Flights will
definitely become safer.
Interviewer: What do you think about colonizing Mars?
Dr. Graham: The European Space Agency has started a new
project that will send robots to explore the Red
Planet but it will be a long time before there is
a colony on Mars, or even on the Moon.
Interviewer: Will it be easy to live in space?
Dr. Graham: Definitely not. On the Moon, the temperature
rises to more than 100C and falls to less than
-100C, and its not much better on Mars.
Interviewer: Dr. Graham, do you think we will live on the
Moon one day?
Dr. Graham: Believe it or not, humans will definitely live on
other planets one day. It may sound strange,
but we have to remember that air travel once
seemed to be an impossible dream.
65
PAGE 70
LANGUAGE
7 a. will live; b. is sending; c. are going;

d. are visiting; e. wont wear.
8 a. I dont want to see that movie. Besides,

its too late.
b.Although Iris hates studying math, she
always gets good marks.
c. Although Jim studied a lot, he failed the
exam.
d.Although my sister is eighteen, she cant
drive our fathers car.
e. Walking the dog is lots of fun. Besides,
its
good for your health.
WRITING
10 The students write a paragraph (120-150

words) about how they imagine a city on the
moon. You can assign a mark according to
these criteria:
grammar or spelling mistakes.
3 - 4 points: student can write a coherent
short paragraph, but he / she makes some
grammar and spelling mistakes.
1 - 2 points: student can't write a coherent
and he / she makes a lot of spelling and
grammar mistakes.
PAGE 71
SPEAKING
9 In pairs, the students exchange information

about their fixed arrangements for next
week. Make sure they use the Present
Continuous tense and that they change
roles to ask and answer. You can assign a
mark according to these criteria:
3 - 4 points: student can exchange personal
information, but he / she hesitates and
1 - 2 points: student can't exchange personal
information; he / she hesitates a lot and
66
UNIT 2
FINAL REFLECTION

reflect on their strengths and weaknesses. Make
sure all the students understand what they are
expected to do and give enough time to answer
the questions. Encourage students to give honest
answers and show interest in their results.
BELIEVE IT OR NOT
EXTRA
EXTRA TEST UNIT 2
READING - GOODNIGHT NURSE
http://idealog.co.nz/magazine/november-december-2007/now/goodnight-nurse
By Lauren Bartlett - Originally published in Idealog #12, page 26
FINALLY, A NURSE WHO DOESNT COMPLAIN: A ROBOT

The engineers are merging new computer software with a robot from Samsung to create a robot nurse capable of carrying out simple tasks such as
reading a bar-coded medication list and giving it to a patient.
The robot can recognize faces, speak multiple languages, and talk with other robots through airwaves, and it doesnt complain about the job.
Its an interesting combination of electrical and computer science, together with psychology, says Dr Santokh Singh, the research manager for the
project at the University of Auckland.
The university hopes the robot will alleviate nurses. By using a wireless network to connect groups
of robots to a central server cluster, nursebots could be cheaper tooaround $1,000 each.
The robots are intended only as an aid to the nursing industry, but while the robot will be
able to respond sympathetically to patients, its no substitute for Florence Nightingale.
Their brains can make decisions, such as calling for help in emergencies or answering
questions. These special nurses can recognize patients, doctors and visitors. Their
arms and hands are able to check a patients pulse rate and pick up medicines.
Robots can also communicate with patients and know what is best for them. They are
able to communicate with doctors, nurses and patients in eight different languages.
Human nurses have no need to fear for their jobs yet, says Shahin Maghsoudi of RobotHosting. The robots are just designed to make their job easier.
Have a look at the text and choose the best answer. What type of text is it?
a. An encyclopedia article.
b. An advertisement.
c. A scientific article.
2 Read the text again and answer these questions.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5 pts.
Who wrote the article?

Who are collaborating to make the nursebots?
Who is Santokh Singh?
How much could the nursebots cost?
How many languages can the robots speak?
3 Read the text once more. Find the following information:

a.
b.
c.
d.
1 pt.
4 pts.
City in which the project is being carried out: ___________________________

Decisions that robots can make: _____________, ______________________
People that robots can recognize: ___________, ___________, ___________
Actions that robots can do with their arms: ____________, _______________
67
LISTENING
Listen to the recording. What type of text is it?

An interview.
An advertisement.
A dialogue.
A lecture.
1 pt.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Listen to the recording again. Are these statements true or false?

Technology will create smart homes.
You will turn off the lights by remote control.
The refrigerator will check your food.
You will need special keys to open the front door.
The smart home will choose your favorite music.
5 pts.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Listen to the recording once more and complete these sentences.

a. The repairman says it was the ________ who called.
b. The ________ lights in your house will create the perfect atmosphere.
c. The ________ will deliver to your ________ .
4 pts.
LANGUAGE
7 Write five sentences about your arrangements for next week.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5 pts.
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
SPEAKING
8 Mr. and Mrs. Newman

are from Scotland.
They are visiting San
Pedro de Atacama
next week. Look at the
brochure of their visit
and, in pairs,
exchange questions
and answers about the
information that
it contains.
WRITING
Duration: 4 days / 3 nights

Date: December 31, 2008
2 nights in San Pedro de
Atacama; one night in Calama,
visiting Chuquicamata.
Itinerary:
Day 1: Reception and transfer to San Pedro de Ataca
ma
from Calama airport.
Day 2: Breakfast in hotel. 08.00: departure from hotel
Visit to the town of Toconao and Bell Tower of Saint .
Lucas. From there we will continue our journey to the
Atacama Salt Flats and the Flamingos National Reser
ve.
Time of arrival in San Pedro: 19.00.
Day 3: 04.00: departure from hotel. 07.00: arriva at
the Geysers of El Tatio. We then continue to Caspalna,
the Pukar of Lasana, the petroglyphs in the Valley of
the Loa River, and the church and village of Chiu-Chiu.
Time of arrival in Calama: 16.00.
Day 4: Free morning. 14:00 hrs. Transfer to the world
largest open-pit mine (Chuquicamata). During the visits
it will be possible observe the extraction of copper and
its production process. Transfer to the airport.
End of our services.
5 pts.
5 pts.
9 With the information in Exercise 8, write a short paragraph (100-150 words) about Mr.
35 pts.
TOTAL
and Mrs. Newmans planned trip.

0 - 12
Keep trying!
68
UNIT 2
13 - 21
Good!
22 - 29
Very good!
30 - 35
Excellent!
BELIEVE IT OR NOT
READING - GOODNIGHT NURSE
c.
2 a. Lauren Bartlett.
b. The University of Auckland and Robot
Hosting Company.
c. Hes the Research Manager for the project.
d. Around U$S 1,000.
e. They can speak eight languages.
3 a. Auckland.
b. Call for help, answer questions.
c. Patients, doctors and visitors.
d. Check a patients pulse rate, pick up
medicines.
LISTENING
16
4 b.
5 a. True; b. True; c. True; d. False; e. True.
6 a. washing machine; b. 3,000; c. store, house.
TRANSCRIPT - MOVING TO A NEW HOME
16
Speaker: A repairman arrives at your home to fix the washing

machine. You say that you didn't call for a repair. The
repairman says it was the washing machine who called!
Technology will soon make the dream of a Smart Home
come true.
You'll turn off the bedroom lights using your remote
control connection when you're away from home.
If you want the right atmosphere for the evening or for a
dinner party, this is great! You'll push a button and the
3,000 lights in your house will create the perfect
atmosphere.
If you don't like going to the supermarket, a special kind
of refrigerator will check your milk and order some more
when you run out. The store will deliver to your house
and you won't have to go out to the shops after a long
day at work.
If you get home with a huge shopping bag, you won't
need to look for your keys. The front door will recognize
your face and voice and open automatically.
A "smart home" like this will lock the doors, close the
windows, turn the lights on and off, turn on your
favorite music, and open the front door to you - all
automatically.
Call us and you'll receive all the information about the
Smart Home! Order your Smart home and let our
technology enter your life!
LANGUAGE
7 Answers will vary. Accept any coherent

answer. Make sure the students use the
Present Continuous tense for future
arrangements.
SPEAKING
8 In pairs, the students study the information in

the brochure and exchange information about
Mr. and Mrs. Newmans arrangements for
next week. Make sure they use the Present
Continuous Tense and that they change roles
to ask and answer. You can assign points
according to these criteria:
3 - 4 points: student can exchange personal
information, but he / she hesitates and makes
some grammar mistakes.
1 - 2 points: student can't exchange personal
information; he / she hesitates a lot and
WRITING
9 With the information in Exercise 8, the

students write a paragraph (120-150 words)
about Mr. and Mrs. Newmans next visit to
San Pedro de Atacama. You can assign
points according to these criteria:
3 - 4 points: student can write a coherent short
paragraph, but he / she makes some
short paragraph with personal information, and
he / she makes a lot of spelling and grammar
mistakes.
69
UNIT
TECHNOLOGY
AND INVENTIONS
read a web page
read a biography
listen to a conversation
listen to a radio program
Reading
identify the sequence of events
identify type of text
Listening
information
discriminate sounds and words
identify sequence
Language
use the Simple Past Tense
use linking words
use relative pronouns
Types of Evaluation
Speaking
ask and answer questions about biographical
information
exchange opinions about inventions and
technology
Writing
write a short summary of a biography
complete a paragraph about a new invention
You will also:
assess and appreciate the role of technology in
everyday life
develop respect and acceptance of other peoples
opinions
Development
+ home assignments
Didactic resources
teenage cultures.
considering that thorough prior preparation
allows them to think of and apply some useful
ideas. It is their chance to make the class
entertaining and to involve students in the
learning process.
Indicators
Reflection spot
Self - evaluation
Unit Check
Unit evaluation
Reading: Students identify and extract specific information.

Listening: Students identify specific information and the correct sequence and discriminate sounds.
Language: Students use the Simple Past Tense and relative pronouns.
Speaking: Students exchange information about an imaginary invention.
Writing: Students write a short description of a gadget.
Final Reflection
Extra Test
70
UNIT 3
Language: Students use the Simple Present and Present Progressive tense.
TECHNOLOGY
T ECHNOLOGY AND
AND INVENTIONS
INVENTIONS
PAGE 72
PAGE 74
LESSON 1
GETTING READY
READING
The object of this activity is to set the

context for the topic of the unit. Ask the
students to look at the pictures and then
identify the name of the inventions in the
box. Check that they all identify and know
the names of the gadgets in English, so that
they can easily find the words.
Answers
CD or DVD player / remote control; bycicles; cellular

phone; microwave oven; jet plane; personal computer;
digital camera; credit card; calculator.
2 In their notebook, the students copy and

complete the chart writing the name of the
invention in the correct column. Warn them
that there are inventions that fit the two
columns. You can check the exercise
asking a student to copy and complete the
chart on the board, or telling them to say
their answers aloud.
Answers
Work / Study
calculator
cellular phone
computer
camera
jet plane
microwave oven
Leisure (Free time)

cellular phone
computer
credit card
DVD
bicycle
camera
jet plane
3 Ask the students to work in pairs and add

two inventions to each column. Then, tell
them to share their work with their
classmates.
POPULAR TEENAGE INVENTIONS
BEFORE READING
Start a general conversation about the role and
development of technology in recent years, and
how it has changed or affected our everyday
life. At this stage, you may accept Spanish, as
the objective of the activity is to involve the
students in the topic of the lesson.
++
Ask the students to choose, in pairs, a few
recent inventions that they feel have
changed their lives and then to tell their
classmates about them.
2 ++
Ask the students to look at the pictures
and then answer which of the inventions
they think was invented or conceived of by
teens. Elicit their answers, also telling them
to speculate about the reasons and
circumstances in which the inventors
created each object.
(L.A.: to relate topic and students previous
knowledge).
Possible answers
The three inventions were invented by teenagers.
Background Information
The inventors mentioned in the introduction of
the article are: Chester Greenwood (18581937), who, tired of cold ears while ice skating,
invented earmuffs at age 15; Philo T.
Farnsworth (1906-1971), who invented a
prototype for a working television at age 14 and
later built one; and Blaise Pascal (1623-1662),
who was 19 when he began work on what
became the Pascaline, the first business
machine and second mechanical calculator.
71
If it is possible, you may also recommend your

students to search the Internet and find
additional information at:
http://www.ideafinder.com/history/inventions/earmuff.htm
http://www.ideafinder.com/history/inventions/television.htm
http://www.xnumber.com/xnumber/mechanical3.htm
3 +++
to read about two young inventors whose
creativity is making life a little easier for
others. Ask them to have a look at the
pictures and then choose the correct name
for each invention. You can guide the
exercise asking the students to describe
what they see in the pictures and what they
think the object is useful for. Once they
have identified the inventions, they can
choose a name for each from the list. Do
not check their answers at this stage.
(L.A.: to infer meaning from visuals).
4 ++
Tell the students to study the words in the Key
Word Spot and then look them up in a
dictionary. Remind them that this is a very
important activity before they face any reading
task, even in Spanish. Make sure you devote
enough time to allow students to understand
the meaning of the words. It may also be a
good idea to make the students complete a
glossary in their notebooks, including the
Spanish translation for each word an example
and a drawing, when applicable.
Answers
Clap:
to hit your open hands together several times

to show that you approve of or have enjoyed
something. (aplaudir)
Skill:
a particular ability or type of ability.
(habilidad, capacidad)
Tool:
an instrument that you hold in your hand and
use for making or repairing things.
(herramienta)
Launch: to start an activity, especially an organized
one. (lanzar, comenzar)
72
UNIT 3
Optional activity
Ask the students to give examples to illustrate
each word in the Key Word Spot, mime them if
they are actions, or write sentences using them,
in order to check they have understood their
meaning correctly.
5 +++
Tell the students to identify the cognates in
the text and then choose the alternatives
they think are correct. Again, reinforce the
idea that cognates are very useful to help
set the context for the reading
comprehension tasks. You may also ask the
students to anticipate a list of cognates they
think they will find according to the topic of
the lesson, and then check their predictions
skimming the text.
(L.A.: to use cognates to predict content).
Cognates: I.: invent, electronic, music,
ideas, company, manufactures, inventions,
prototype, model, final, product, patent,
invention. II.: animal, memorize,
programming, problem, site, final, product,
memorization, enter, data, vocabulary,
history, science, information, generates,
test, program, inventors, invent.
PAGE 76
READING
6 +
Students read the text quickly and check
their predictions in Exercises 3 and 5.
Answers
3., 1. d. Quizlet, 2. b. Hands on hand-clap game, 5. c.; d.
7 ++
The students read the text again, this time
more carefully, and choose the best
alternative to complete the sentences. Ask
them to note the words in the text that help
them decide on their answers and check the
exercise orally.
TECHNOLOGY
T ECHNOLOGY AND
AND INVENTIONS
INVENTIONS
Answers
a. - ii.; b. i.; c. iii.; d. ii.; e. ii.
8 ++
Now the students read the text again to
identify the correct sequence of events for
each invention. It may be a good idea to
read the sentences aloud and tell the
students to decide the logical order of the
events. They can write the sequences on
the board and then check reading the text.
(L.A.: to identify the sequence of events).
Answers
a.: iv.; i.; ii.; v.; iii.; b.: iv.; iii.; ii.; i.
Optional activity
Ask the students to identify and extract the
sentences in the text that illustrate the sequence
of events described in the exercise.
Background information:
An acronym is a word formed from the first
initials of several words. Newsgroups, chat rooms,
and e-mail have spawned a rich set of acronyms
and abbreviations for common phrases. An
acronym is pronounced as if it were a word rather
than just a series of individual letters.
Additional exercises
1.Identify the words that formed these acronyms.
a. ASAP, b. BTW, c. FWIW, d. FYI, e. IMO,
f. LOL, g. TIA
Answ ers: a. As Soon As Possible; b. By
The Way; c. For What Its Worth; d. For Your
Information; e. In My Opinion; f. Laughing Out
Loud; g. Thanks In Advance
2.Write a list of acronyms that are familiar and
used in everyday life.
Possible answ ers: UNICEF, ANFP,
UNESCO, CD, DVD, MP3, laser, sonar, PSU,
etc.
PAGE 77
AFTER READING
9 +++
Tell the students to read the text once more
and then answer the questions in their
notebooks. Ask some students to read their
answers aloud and make sure all the class
get the correct answers.
Answers
a. It stands for By Kids for Kids. Its an acronym.
b. It is a model of the final product.
c. You can enter vocabulary words, history dates,
science facts.
d. To look at everyday life and invent something to
improve it.
ERROR ALERT
Stand for = mean, represent; express indirectly by an
image, form, or model; be a symbol; denote or connote.
(NOT: the act of standing)
the Introduction.
10 +++
Motivate the students to reflect about the text
they have read, talking about the motives
and circumstances in which both inventors
created their objects. Then, invite them to
share their comments with their classmates.
Encourage the students to express and listen
to everybodys opinions with respect.
(L.A.: to express opinions).
Answers
Will vary.
11 +++
17
Encourage the students to work in pairs and

use the information from Exercise 10 to
complete the dialogue with their own ideas.
Invite the students to listen to the recording
and check their answers. Explain to them
that they have to check the general meaning,
as there is not one single correct answer.
73
Answers
Reflection Spot
See transcript.
17
A: Which of the two inventions do you like the most?

B: I like the clap game.
A: Why?
B: Because I think its very useful for children who dont have
friends to play with. Do you agree?
A: No. I think the other one is better.
B: Why do you say that?
A: Well, because, in my opinion, it really helps you to study
and revise for tests.
12 +++
Ask the students to form groups of four and
choose an inventor. Explain to them that
they can use the library, encyclopedias, etc.
or they can visit the web site
www.invent.org., and choose one of the
inventors listed there.(In that case, they
must go to the Hall of Fame link, far left,
and search by inventor or invention.)
Tell the students they must write a short
paragraph and prepare a brief presentation
about the inventor or the invention they chose.
Encourage them to include information about
the origin of the idea and to list the steps the
inventor took to go from idea to reality.
Motivate the groups to add visual material to
illustrate the presentations.
Do not interrupt students presentations to
correct the information or their English.
Take notes of the most important mistakes
and, at the end of the session, start a
general conversation reflecting on the points
that the students should reinforce / practice
more to improve in the future. You may also
ask each group to assess their classmates
performances and assign an extra mark,
according to their self and peer evaluation.
(L.A.: to give an oral presentation).
74
UNIT 3

their ability to search for information in
order to prepare a presentation.
their ability to give an oral presentation.
13 +++
The objective of this activity is to allow
students to relate the topic of the lesson to
their own reality, and at the same time
practice their oral skills applying the new
structures they have learned, in a funny and
relaxed atmosphere. Ask the students to
think of an invention that would make life
easier, name and describe it to their
partners. Then, invite them to change roles.
(L.A.: to describe a device/gadget).
14 ++
Motivate the students to make a drawing of
the inventions they/their partners described
in Exercise 13. Encourage them to show
their drawings to their classmates and then
display them in a visible place in the
classroom.
TECHNOLOGY
T ECHNOLOGY AND
AND INVENTIONS
INVENTIONS
Answers
PAGE 78
LANGUAGE SPOT
Because
Remind students that this section is designed to
help them revise or discover a particular
grammar structure or an interesting item of
vocabulary related to the text.
Always keep in mind that the activities are
meant to promote independent learning, so
help, guide and check, but do not tell them the
answers.
text and other examples paying special
attention to the word in bold. Tell them to
compare the sentences and find the
similarities among them.
2. Now, the students analyze each sentence
and answer the questions. If necessary,
analyze each alternative aloud and make
sure they understand the differences clearly.
Answ e rs:
a . Two; b. ii.
a. The children cant go to the beach because its too

cold. / Because its too cold, the children cant go to
the beach.
b. Pauls car didnt start because the battery was dead. /
Because the battery was dead, Pauls car didnt start.
c. My sister got up very early because she wanted to
revise for a test. / Because she wanted to revise for a
test, my sister got up very early.
d. I cant eat that huge sandwich because I need to lose
weight. / Because I need to lose weight, I cant eat
that huge sandwich.
e. Debbie is learning Italian because she is traveling to
Rome next year. / Because she is traveling to Rome
next year, Debbie is learning Italian.
PAGE 79
16 +++ FL
Faster students complete the five sentences
in their notebooks using the connector they
learned in the LANGUAGE SPOT following
the example. Encourage them to be
creative and invite some students to write
their sentences on the board; make sure
all of them can check their answers.

general rule in their notebooks,
Answ e rs:
We can use the word be c a use to join two
ideas that express a reason and a c a use .
We use be c a use to introduce the sentence
that expresses the reason.
15 ++
Using the information from the LANGUAGE
SPOT, the students join the sentences. Ask
them to write each sentence twice,
changing the order of the clauses, as in the
example. Draw students attention to the
use of the comma in each case, according
to the location of the connector.
Answers
Will vary.
LETS CHECK
17
The purpose of this section is to allow
75
Answers
a. Because Jim was hot and tired, he sat under a tree in
the garden. /Jim sat under a tree in the garden
because he was hot and tired.
b. Because she was very thirsty, my mother drank some
tea. / My mother drank some tea because she was
very thirsty.
c. Susan hurried up because she was late for school. /
Because she was late for school, Susan hurried up.
d. Because the weather is cold, my father is wearing a
heavy coat. / My father is wearing a heavy coat
because the weather is cold.
e. Dan cant reach the top shelf because he isnt very
tall. / Because he isnt very tall, Dan cant reach the
top shelf.
f. Children can easily identify Italy on a map because it
has the shape of a boot. / Because it has the shape of
a boot, children can easily identify Italy on a map.
g. My sister has a sore throat because she shouted
loudly at the game. / Because she shouted loudly at
the game, my sister has a sore throat.
h. Helen is putting on her nicest dress because she is
going to a party. / Because she is going to a party,
Helen is putting on her nicest dress.
REAL LIFE SPOT

humor to the class. All the jokes and cartoons are
related to the topic of the lesson. Give some
them to share their comments to make sure they
understood the joke. At this point, you may allow
the use of Spanish to check comprehension.
PAGE 80
LESSON 2
LISTENING
MY BEST INVENTION
BEFORE LISTENING
1
+
The objective of this activity is to get
students involved in the topic of the lesson,
76
UNIT 3
and at the same time recall their previous

knowledge about it. They may not know the
word gadget, so it may be a good idea to
write it on the word and brainstorm students
ideas about its meaning.
A gadget is a small tool or device that does
something useful (aparato, artilugio).
(L.A.: to infer information from the context).
Answers
Will vary
2 ++
to listen to a recording about inventions. Ask
them to predict the topic of the recording
you will play. Do not provide the correct
answer at this stage.
(L.A.: to predict topic from the context).
3 ++
Before playing the recording, it is very
important that the students know the
meaning of the new words they will hear.
Ask them to read the words in the Key
Word Spot and then match them with their
pictures. Allow the use of dictionaries if
necessary.
Answers
Octopus 4 pulpo
Screw 5 tornillo
Sketch 1 dibujo en borrador
Switch 3 interruptor
Tire 2 neumtico
Optional activity
Once they understand the meaning of each word
in the Key Word Spot, you can ask your students
to predict why the words will appear in the
recording.
You may also tell them to relate the name of the
lesson and the key words to predict the content
of the recording.
TECHNOLOGY
T ECHNOLOGY AND
AND INVENTIONS
INVENTIONS
Answers
a. ceilings; b. cups; c. posted; d. 4000; e. finding; f. hide
PAGE 81
LISTENING
4 +
ERROR ALERT
18

Remind the students that this first time they
only have to focus their attention on the
general content of the recording. They may
not concentrate on details or on specific
information.
Answers
b.
5 ++
18
Now, the students listen to the recording

again and focus their attention on the
content. Another alternative to this exercise
would be to ask the students to choose the
correct alternative first, and then check
while listening to the recording.
(L.A.: to recognize general information).
Answers
c.
6 ++
18
Before playing the recording again, read the

list of names aloud. Tell the students they
now have to identify what kind of inventions
the kids are talking about. Play the
recording and ask the students to match
each speaker with the invention.
(L.A.: to relate speakers and speech).
Answers
Brian f.; Jen d.
7 +++
18
The students listen to the recording again.

Ask them to focus their attention on the
alternatives and choose the correct one for
each sentence. Before playing the
recording, read the sentences aloud,
drawing the students attention to the
different pronunciation of the alternatives.
(L.A.: to discriminate sounds and words).
// and /A/ sounds

// as in cap is pronounced with lips stretched to the
sides.
/A/ as in cup is pronounced with lips in a neutral
position, slightly separated.
the Introduction.
Additional exercise
Repeat each pair of words, paying special
attention to the different pronunciation of the
vowel sound.
bad
= bud
drag = drug
ran
= run
damp = dump
tab
= tub
began = begun
track = truck
stand = stunned
bag
= bug
raffle = ruffle
ban
= bun
rat
= rut
back = buck
jazz
= just
drank = drunk
8 ++
18
Invite your students to copy the sentences

into their notebooks. Then, play the
recording once more to allow them to match
each speaker with what they say.
Answers
a. ii.; v.; iii.; iv.; vi.; i.; b. i. Brian; ii. Jen.; iii. Brian;
iv. Jen; v. Jen; vi. The teacher.
TRANSCRIPT - MY BEST INVENTION
18
Teacher: Silence, please. Lets share ideas. Brian, what can you
tell us?
Brian: I invented Suction Tires to ride up walls and ceilings
because I wanted to take bike riding to new heights.
Teacher: Where did you get the idea?
Brian: In our science class we learned that an octopus has
eight arms with a bunch of suction cups that can stick
to almost anything and then I got the idea to attach
suction cups to my bike tires to ride on walls. After a
lot of different designs, I managed to keep the suction
cups attached to the tires with glue and screws.
77
Teacher: What are you going to do with your creation?

Brian: I made the final sketch and I posted my idea at
InventNow.org. I hope that, soon enough, we can ride
up walls!
Teacher: What about you, Jen?
Jen:
I invented Hide-N-Seek 4000 because I needed a
challenge.
Teacher: Tell us about it.
Jen:
I always thought that a robot with eyes could be really
good at finding things, so I designed a robot to play
Hide-N-Seek.
Teacher: Very interesting; how does it do that?
Jen:
My robot can use its arms to push back curtains and
branches of trees. It also needs to hide, so I added a
switch that changes it from a seeker to a hider.
Teacher: What materials did you use?
Jen:
I used a computer, an old camera and a filing cabinet
to design Hide-N- Seek 4000 and I also posted my idea
at InventNow.org.
Reflection Spot
Once they have evaluated their classmates,

make sure you assign enough time of your
class to allow students reflect on their own
their ability to discriminate sounds and
words in a recording.
their ability to relate speakers and their
speech in a recording.
PAGE 82
AFTER LISTENING
9 +++
Form groups of four students and tell them
to talk about the recording. Ask them to
answer the questions and take notes in their
notebooks. Then, tell the groups to appoint
one member to read their comments aloud
and organize a general conversation about
the topic. If there are students who like to
78
UNIT 3
invent things, you can ask them to share

their experience with the rest of the class.
Answers
Will vary, according to students own ideas and opinions.
LANGUAGE SPOT
The Simple Past
help them revise or discover a particular grammar
Always keep in mind that the activities are meant
to promote independent learning, so help, guide
and check, but do not tell them the answers.
1. Invite the students to revise the sentences
from the text.
2. Tell them to read carefully and then answer the
questions.
Answ ers:
a. - i. ; b. the Simple Past tense.
3. The student must copy and complete the rule in
their notebooks. Invite one student to copy the
rule on the board to allow the rest to check it.
We use the Simple Past tense to talk about
events that happened in the past and are
finished now.
4. Invite the students to revise the exercises from
the listening section and identify all the
sentences in the Simple Past Tense they can
find. Then, ask them to copy the sentences in
their notebooks. Check orally.
Answ ers:
Exercise 7:
a. I invented Suction Tires to ride up walls and
ceilings.
b. That gave me the idea to attach suction
cups.
c. I posted my idea at InventNow.org.
e. I thought that a robot could be good at
finding things.
Exercise 8:
b. I added a switch.
c. I made a final sketch.
d. I needed a new challenge.
e. I used a computer.
TECHNOLOGY
T ECHNOLOGY AND
AND INVENTIONS
INVENTIONS
We can often identify the Simple Past tense by
the use of signal w ords such as: yesterday, a
month ago, last summer, in (month, year), etc.
ERROR ALERT
To make the past tense form of most regular verbs we
simply add -ed at the end.
Examples: walked, danced, arrived, etc.
Irregular verbs are not that simple. We sometimes need
a dictionary to help us write the different forms of
irregular verbs.
the Introduction.
Additional exercise
Change the verb in each sentence to its past
tense form and write it in the blank. You may
refer to a dictionary or to a list of verbs.
1.I _________ all my homework at school.(do)
2.She _________ of a better way to do it.(think)
3.Sam _________ us to lock the doors.(remind)
4.They _________ their names on the list.(put )
5.Who _________ my new jacket?(see)
6.We never _________ his real name.(know)
10 ++
The students must read the paragraph and
complete it with the Simple Past tense of
the verbs in brackets.
Answers
In 1824, when he was 15, Louis Braille invented a
way for blind people to read. His personal experience
was very important.
He became blind at the age of 3; when he was 12,
he went to a school for the blind in Paris. When a
soldier called Charles Barbier visited the school, he
told Louis about something called night-writing.
During the next three years, Louis simplified the system
and finally developed the Braille system of reading.
PAGE 83
11 +++
Tell the students to look at the pictures on
page 83, and write complete sentences
about what these people did yesterday using
the verbs in the box. Invite some students to
write the sentences on the board and make
sure they all check their answers. If
necessary, help them identify the irregular
verbs and provide their Past Tense forms.
Answers
Yesterday
1. Anna danced all night.
2. Ben went to France.
3. Bob swam in the ocean.
4. Charles cooked lunch.
5. Emily and Eddie saw Titanic on TV.
6. Gina talked to her friend.
7. Jill and Nick had a picnic.
8. Kim wrote a letter.
9. Maggie played the piano.
10. Nick sang at the theater.
11. Philip drove his car.
12. Sheila rode her pony.
13. Sue and Tom bought some new clothes.
14. Terry caught rabbits.
15. Vincent went to London.
PAGE 84
12 ++
19
The students work in pairs and fill in the

blanks in the dialogue. Let them know how
important it is that they read the whole text
first, then sentence by sentence, so that
they can make use of all the textual clues
that can give them information on the
missing word(s). It is also important to
remind them to make use of everything
they have done in this lesson so far.
(L.A.: to make use of textual clues and
previous knowledge; to relate written and
oral version of a text).
Answers
See transcript.
79
19
Teacher: What can you tell us about your invention?

Molly: I invented the Karate Glove, to chop through
anything from cement blocks to a minibus!
Teacher: Where did you get the idea?
Molly: I saw people chopping through blocks in movies
and I wondered how I could do that. After
karate class one day, I saw some workers
tearing up the street with a super-powerful
jackhammer. It was tough enough for concrete,
so that gave me the idea!
Teacher: What did you do next?
Molly: I added a power switch and I made the final sketch.
Teacher: What are you planning to do with your creation?
Molly: Submit my idea to the Gallery at InventNow.org.
13 +++
19
The students listen to the recording again

and practice the dialogue in pairs to roleplay it in front of their classmates. You can
organize a class competition and ask the
students to choose the best performance of
the dialogue.
(L.A.: to imitate a pattern of intonation and
pronunciation).
LETS CHECK
The students must copy and complete the
paragraph with the Simple Past tense of the
verbs in the box. Again, remind them that it
is very important to identify the kind of verb
(regular / irregular) to decide which form
they are going to use in each case.
80
UNIT 3
Answers
Krysta Morlan was 16 when she invented the
waterbike. She got the idea when she was doing
exercises in the pool. Krysta had spent a lot of time in
hospital and needed to recover her strength. She loved
bicycles, but hadnt ridden for a long time, so the new
waterbike helped her to workout; besides, she invited
her friends and they had a lot of fun in the pool.
PAGE 85
15 +++ FL
It may also be a good idea to assign this
activity as homework or as a mini-project,
with an extra mark for the whole class.
Form groups of four students and ask them
to think about a funny invention they would
like to create.
Encourage them to draw a sketch and write
a short description of it, like the one in the
recording. Devote the next class to the
presentations. You may also prepare copies
of the peer-evaluation sheet and ask the
students to evaluate their classmates work.
(L.A.: to relate topic to students own reality).
Reflection Spot
Once they have evaluated their classmates,

make sure you assign enough time of your
class to allow students to reflect on their own
their ability to draw a sketch and to
describe an invention.
their ability to write a description of an
invention.
TECHNOLOGY
T ECHNOLOGY AND
AND INVENTIONS
INVENTIONS
GAME SPOT
PAGE 86
LESSON 3
Games are highly motivating since they are

amusing and at the same time challenging for the
students. They employ language in real contexts
and they also encourage and increase cooperation.
They create the motivation for learners of English to
get involved and participate actively in the learning
activities, bring real world context into the
classroom, and enhance students use of English in
a flexible, communicative way.
and review of language lessons. Thus, the meaning
of the language the students listen to, read, speak
and write will be more vividly experienced and,
therefore, better remembered. Explain to the
students that the list a. i. includes some of the
inventions that have been submitted to the Gallery
at InventNow.org. Tell them to look at the pictures
and find a name for them in the list. Motivate them
to find clues that help them to identify the name of
the invention. If it is possible, encourage the
students to visit the web site and find other funny
inventions that have been submitted.
Answers
1. Super Heat Dress; 2. Camera Glasses;
3. Electric-Heat Shirt; 4. Mouse Thermometer;
5. Space Center; 6. Gaming Tree House
16 FL
Encourage fast learners to read the
descriptions and then find the name of each
invention in the list in the GAME SPOT.
This activity represents a more advanced
step in which fast students must relate a
description with a name, without the help of
a visual clue. Again, tell the students to pay
special attention to the words that may
represent clues. Ask them to share their
answer with the rest of the class.
(L.A.: to infer meaning from titles).
Answers
a. Space Center; b. Sklurfboard; c. Super Heat Dress;
d. The Book Sorter; e. Electric Heat Shirt.
READING
THE WIZARD OF MENLO PARK
BEFORE READING
Before starting the lesson and while the students
still have their books closed, brainstorm the most
important inventions in history. Ask the students
the name of the inventions they considered
changed peoples life and also the name of the
inventors. Write them on the board.
+
Form groups of four students and ask them
to write a list of the most famous inventions
that changed peoples life.
Then, invite the groups to share their lists
with the rest of the class and finally,
organize a general conversation so that the
students can reach an agreement to appoint
the most important invention in history.
(L.A.: to relate previous knowledge with the
Answers
Will vary.
2 ++
Invite the students to look at the pictures
and identify the names in the list (a. f.)
Then, encourage them to find the name of
the inventors in the box.
Answers
a. 4 Blaise Pascal; b. 1 Wilbur and Orville
Wright; c. 5 James Watt; d. 2 Thomas A. Edison;
e. 3 Johannes Guttenberg; f. 6 Filo T. Farnsworth
Filo T. Farnsw orth was fifteen years old,
and a high-school student, when he read of the
research being carried out in the Soviet Union by
Boris Rosing on transmitting moving images by
electricity. He quickly designed a schematic
drawing of the required system. Farnsworth
entered Brigham Young University the next year
81
and remained there for two years until the death

of his father. A San Francisco banker named
William H. Crocker built a laboratory for
Farnsworth so that he could continue his
research into the practical development of his
television system.
Wright Brothers: In 1899, after Wilbur Wright
had written a letter of request to the Smithsonian
Institution for information about flight
experiments, the Wright Brothers designed their
first aircraft: a small, biplane glider flown as a kite
to test their solution for controlling the craft by
wing warping. Wing warping is a method of
arching the wingtips slightly to control the
aircrafts rolling motion and balance.
Over the next three years, Wilbur and his
brother Orville designed a series of gliders which
would be flown in both unmanned (as kites) and
piloted flights. They recognized that control of the
flying aircraft would be the most crucial and
hardest problem to solve.
In 1900, the Wrights successfully tested their new
50-pound biplane glider with its 17-foot wingspan
and wing-warping mechanism at Kitty Hawk, in
both unmanned and piloted flights. In fact, it was
the first piloted glider. Based upon the results, the
Wright Brothers planned to refine the controls and
landing gear, and build a bigger glider.
Blaise Pascal: At the age of 14 Blaise Pascal
started to accompany his father. Soon, by the
time he was 16, Pascal presented a single piece
of paper which contained a number of projective
geometry theorems, including Pascals mystic
hexagon.
Blaise had his first work, Essay on Conic
Sections published in February 1640.
He invented the first digital calculator to help his
father with his work collecting taxes. He worked
on it for three years, between 1642 and 1645.
The device, called the Pascaline, resembled a
mechanical calculator of the 1940s. This, almost
certainly, makes Pascal the second person to
invent a mechanical calculator, for Schickard had
manufactured one in 1624.
J oha nne s Gut e nbe rg was a German
goldsmith and printer who is credited with being
the first European to use movable type printing,
in around 1439, and the global inventor of the
mechanical printing press. His major work, the
Gutenberg Bible (also known as the 42-line
82
UNIT 3
Bible), has been acclaimed for its high aesthetic

and technical quality.
James Watt was a Scottish inventor and
mechanical engineer whose improvements to the
steam engine were fundamental to the changes
brought by the Industrial Revolution both in
Britain and in the world.
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki
3 ++
Tell the students that they are going to read
about one of the most famous inventors in
history. Invite them to guess his / her name,
according to their choice in Exercise 1. Do
not correct answers at this stage.
predict topic).
Reflection Spot

their ability to relate the topic of the lesson
with their previous knowledge.
their ability to use their previous knowledge
to make predictions.
4 +++
Again, remind the students that this activity is
very important to face any reading text. The
cognates they can identify will be very helpful to
prepare for the reading tasks and to get the
general meaning of text. Invite the students to
read the text quickly and find the cognates in it.
Then, ask them to identify their relationship with
the topic of the text. Check the list of cognates
inviting a student to read his / her list aloud, but
do not check their predictions at this stage
(L.A.: to use cognates to make predictions).
TECHNOLOGY
T ECHNOLOGY AND
AND INVENTIONS
INVENTIONS
Cognates: February, adult, fruits,

vegetables, devoured, dictionary, science,
practical, obtained, telegraph, operators,
civil, finally, authentic, invention, automatic
repeater, transmitted, signals, stations,
patented, initial, version, idea, hours,
projects, received, patent, constructed,
electric, voice, disaster, quadruple,
transmitter, progress, laboratory, moved,
phonograph, invented, incandescent, firm,
general, corporation, responsible, creating.
Answers
3. Thomas A. Edison, 4. These cognates indicate that
the text is about a person who developed inventions:
science, practical, telegraph, operators, invention,
automatic repeater, transmitted, signals, stations,
patented, projects, patent, constructed, electric, voice,
transmitter, laboratory, phonograph, invented.
7 ++
The students read the text again, this time
more carefully, to identify the kind of text it
is. Before doing the exercise, brainstorm
students ideas (it may be in Spanish) about
the characteristics and differences of the
different kinds of texts enumerated, to help
them find the correct answer.
(L.A.: to identify kind of text).
PAGE 87
5 +++
The students read the words in the Key
Word Spot and find them in the text. They
must choose the correct meaning for each
word. For this activity, it is very important
that the students understand clearly the
context in which each word has been used,
and then decide the most logical meaning.
An easy way to demonstrate this is to
replace the word for each meaning and
check if it fits.
Answers
a. - ii.; b. i.; c. i.; d. ii.; e. ii.
READING
6 +
Invite the students to read the text on page
88 quickly and check their predictions in
Exercises 3 and 4. Reinforce the idea that
this first time is only to validate / correct
what they had predicted before reading the
text. It is not necessary for them to
understand every single word.
(L.A.: to validate predictions through
skimming).
Answers
c.
A short story is a work of fiction that is usually
written in prose, usually in narrative format.
A biography (from the Greek words bos
meaning life, and grphein meaning to write) is
a description of someones life, usually published
in the form of a book or essay, or in some other
form, such as a film.
An autobiography (auto, meaning self,
giving self-biography) is a biography by the same
person it is about.
A biography is more than a list of impersonal
facts (education, work, relationships and death), it
also portrays the subjects experience of those
events. Unlike a profile or curriculum vitae
(resume), a biography presents the subjects
story, highlighting various aspects of his her life,
including intimate details of experiences, and may
include an analysis of the subjects personality.
A work is biographical if it covers all of a
persons life. As such, biographical works are
usually non-fiction. Together, all biographical
works form the genre known as biography, in
literature, film, and other forms of media.
http://en.wikipedia.org
83
8 ++
Invite the students to read the text once more
and then decide if the statements are true or
false. Once the students have decided which
statements are false, ask them to write the
correct sentences in their notebooks. Invite
some students to read their answers aloud to
check the exercise.
Answers
a. True; b. True; c. False (Edison never patented the initial
version of this idea) d. True; e. True f. False (He didnt die
alone, his wife Mina was by his side).
9 +++
Tell the students to copy and complete the
time line of Thomas Edisons life in their
notebooks.
Answers
1847: He was born on February 11, in Ohio, USA.
1859: He started his own business selling fruits and
vegetables.
1862: He obtained a job replacing a telegraph operator.
1863: He invented the automatic repeater.
1874: He opened his first laboratory in Newark, New
Jersey.
1876: He moved his laboratory to Menlo Park.
1877: He invented the first phonograph.
1879: He invented the first incandescent light bulb.
1892: His company became the General Electric
Corporation.
1900: He began to slow down.
1930: He obtained his 1093rd (last) patent when he
was 83.
1931: He died on October 18th, in New Jersey.
PAGE 89
AFTER READING
10 +++
Ask the students to work in pairs to prepare
a summary of Edisons biography using the
information in the time line in Exercise 9.
84
UNIT 3
Motivate them to write a coherent piece of

writing, and to connect their ideas with
sequencing words such as: before, after,
then, etc. and to use other textual
references like who; where; which, etc.
You may assign this activity as homework,
giving an extra mark for it. The following
class, ask the students to read their work
aloud. It would also be a good idea to prepare
copies of the Writing Rubric (page ___ of this
book) and ask the students to evaluate
themselves or to evaluate their classmates.
(L.A.: to write a biography).
Possible Answers
Thomas A. Edison was born on February 11th, 1847, in
Ohio, USA. In 1859 he started his own business selling
fruits and vegetables. In 1862, he obtained a job
replacing a telegraph operator. In 1863, he invented the
automatic repeater which was a disaster. In 1874,
Thomas Edison opened his first laboratory in Newark,
and he then moved to Menlo Park.
In 1877 he invented the first phonograph and a year
later he invented the incandescent light bulb.
By 1892, his company had become a great firm, which
was the General Electric Corporation.
In 1900, Edison began to slow down. He obtained his
last patent in 1930, when he was 83, and he died on
October 18th, 193.
TECHNOLOGY
T ECHNOLOGY AND
AND INVENTIONS
INVENTIONS
LANGUAGE SPOT
Relative pronouns
Always keep in mind that the activities are meant
to promote independent learning, so help, guide
and check, but do not tell them the answers.
text. Draw their attention to the words in bold
in each sentence.
2. Help the students to identify what the words in
bold introduce to the sentences in Point 1, and
what kind of information they are related to.
Answ ers:
a. i.; b. who person, which object; when
time; where place.
3. Ask the students to copy and complete the
Answ ers:
a. We use w ho when we want to add
information about a person.
b. We use w hich when we want to add
information about an object.
c. We use w here when we want to add
information about a place.
d. We use w hen when we want to add
information about time.
4. Once they have finished Activity 3, the
students go back to the reading text and find
three sentences that contain a relative
pronoun. Ask them also to identify what the
relative pronouns refer to.
Answ ers:
1. At 16, he finally came up with his first
authentic invention, an automatic repeater
w hich transmitted telegraph signals
between stations. (object: the automatic
repeater)
2. Shortly before passing away, he awoke and
whispered to his wife Mina w ho was by his
side:It is very beautiful over there. (person:
Edisons wife, Mina)
11 ++
Tell the students to join the sentences in A
and B using the correct relative pronoun.
Answers
a. Thomas Alva Edison was an important inventor who
invented the incandescent light bulb.
b. Edison invented the automatic repeater which
transmitted telegraph signals between stations.
c. Edison got his first patent for an electric voice
recording machine which was a disaster.
PAGE 90
12 +++
The students must use their own ideas to
complete the sentences using the correct
relative pronoun. Invite some students to
write their sentences on the board and make
sure that the rest check their answers.
Answers
Will vary according to students' ideas, but check that
they use the correct relative pronoun:
a. who. b. where / which. c. when. d. where. e. who.
13 +++
20
In pairs, the students complete the dialogue

on Edisons biography and then they check
with the recording. Draw students attention
to what kind of information they are
expected to supply in each blank. For
example, in the first one the question begins
with who, so they must complete it with the
name of a person. They can copy and
complete the dialogue in their notebook.
Play the recording again, with pauses. Ask the
students to listen to it and practice the
dialogue with their partners. Invite some pairs
to role-play it in front of their classmates.
Remember not to interrupt the students while
they are doing speaking activities to correct
them. It is better to take notes of the most
important mistakes and devote some time at
the end of the class to correct them in general.
(L.A.: to exchange biographical information).
Answers
See transcript.
85
A: Who was Thomas Alva Edison?

B: He was an American inventor who developed many
devices that changed modern life.
A: And what important inventions did he develop?
B: He invented the phonograph and the electric light bulb,
among other things.
A: Do you know how many inventions he patented?
B: Over a thousand inventions, I think.
A: In what area were his main contributions?
B: His main contributions were in the area of
telecommunications.
14 +++ FL
You can assign this consolidation activity to
fast learners or as homework with an extra
mark for the whole class. The students must
work in pairs and find information about a
famous inventor. Then, with the information
they collect, they must write and role-play a
dialogue like the one in Exercise 13.
Encourage them to be creative and look for
interesting information to share.
(L.A: to consolidate topic and language
structures).
Answers
Will vary according to students information.
LETS CHECK
provide information to the teacher about
any points that the majority of the students
have problems with. Make sure they
understand what they are expected to do
and give them enough time to answer
individually. Then, check on the board to
allow students to correct their work and
assign themselves a mark according to
the scale.
The students must complete the paragraph
with words from the box. Again, before
starting the exercise, invite the students to
analyze the kind of information that is
86
UNIT 3
required in each blank (a verb, a noun, a

proper noun, an adjective, etc.)
(L.A.: to use vocabulary related to the topic
of the lesson).
20
Answers
THE INVENTION OF THE BARBIE DOLL
Perhaps one of the most famous toys in American history
is the Barbie doll. Along with co-founding the company
Mattel, woman inventor Ruth Handler also designed
the doll that became an American cultural icon.
She had always seen her daughter playing with paper
dolls, so she invented a grown-up, three-dimensional doll
that girls could use to act out their dreams.
Mrs. Handler named her new invention after the
nickname of her daughter Barbara.
After the Toy Fair in 1959, Barbie became an instant
sensation.
To this day, the Barbie doll invention remains one of
Mattels best-selling products.
PAGE 91
REAL LIFE SPOT

Make sure you give enough time for them to
read, and then elicit their comments.
@@ CLICK ON
If possible, encourage your students to visit the
web site, and take notes about some interesting
information they find. Next class, you may ask
some of them to read their notes and share the
information. You may also visit the site yourself,
and take notes of any funny or strange facts.
http://www.pocketgadget.org/2008/01/14/serendipity10-accidental-inventions
TECHNOLOGY
T ECHNOLOGY AND
AND INVENTIONS
INVENTIONS
PAGE 92
LESSON 4
5 +
LISTENING
TECHNOLOGY UPDATE
BEFORE LISTENING
1
LISTENING
+
Invite the students to work in groups
thinking about possible inventions that do
not exist yet but they think they need and
will exist in the future.
(L.A.: to relate the topic to students own
reality).
2 ++
Invite the groups to appoint a member to
share their comments with their classmates,
giving reasons for their choices. Take notes
on the board and ask the students to reach
an agreement on the best and most useful
idea for the future.
(L.A.: to exchange opinions).
Answers
Will vary.
3 ++
Invite the students to look at the pictures of
three new gadgets and then match them
with their names. Do not check at this stage.
PAGE 93
4 +++
Once they have chosen the names,
brainstorm the uses the students would give
to each gadget. You can make a chart on the
board and take notes of the students ideas.
Then, ask them to copy sentences
a. d. into their notebooks and then complete
them with the name of the corresponding
gadget according to the function they think
they have. Do not check at this stage.
21
Play the recording to allow the students to

check their predictions in Exercises 3 and 4.
Give clear instructions to your students to
concentrate on the general information that
will give them the clues to identify the name
and function of each gadget.
Answers
3. a. C - pen - picture 5; b. TIVO - picture 2; c. Thought
control remote - picture 4.
4. a. TiVo; b. Thought control remote; c. C-pen;
d. Thought control remote
6 ++
21
The students listen to the recording again and

number the gadgets as they are mentioned.
(L.A.: to identify the sequence of information).
Answers
a. 2; b. 3; c. 1
7 +++
21
The students listen to the recording again to

decide which of the statements are true and
which are false. This time, they have to
concentrate on details to identify the incorrect
information that each sentence may contain.
An alternative exercise would be to ask the
students to predict the answers and then
check with the recording.
Answers
a. False; b. True; c. False; d. False; e. True; f. True
Optional exercise
Additionally, you can ask the students to correct
the false sentences in Exercise 7.
Answ ers:
a.With TiVo, you can see action as it happens in
slow motion.
c.The C-pen looks like a highlighter pen, but it is
a small portable scanner.
d. The C-pen can store up to 3,000 pages of text.
87
8 +++
21
Tell the students to copy the sentences in

their notebooks. Then, they listen to the
recording again and write the name of the
corresponding gadget.
Again, you can transform this exercise and
ask the students to write the name they
think is correct and then check with the
recording. In this case, ask them to give
reasons for their choices.
Example:
a. Tivo is paradise for sports lovers because
people who watch sports events on TV
like to replay or see things in slow motion.
b. Thought Control Remote understands
what you think; it can understand
people's thoughts.
c. C-pen can always be with you because it
is portable.
d. C-pen can store a lot of information; it
can store up to 3,000 pages of text.
e. TiVo allows you to replay all the actions;
replay is something you do with movies
or recordings.
f. Thought Control Remote shows your
commands through the cursor; Thought
Control Remote sends your commands to
the computer and the cursor obeys.
Answers
a. TiVo; b. Thought Control Remote; c. C-pen; d. C-pen;
e. TiVo; f. Thought Control Remote
88
UNIT 3
TRANSCRIPT - TECHNOLOGY UPDATE
21
Presenter: And now, Jim Mc Bride, in our section Technology

update. What do you have for us today, Jim?
Jim:
I have three gadgets that will surprise you. The
first is Tivo. Tivo is a remote control system that
allows you to interact with live TV.
Presenter: Interact with TV? Explain that, please.
Jim:
When watching TV, you can pause, replay or see
all the action, as it happens, in slow motion.
When you go back to normal viewing, the TV will
continue from the point where you left off.
Presenter: It sounds like paradise for sports lovers! What else
do you have?
Jim:
The second gadget today is the C-pen pocket
scanner. With it, you will never have to search the
streets for a photocopy store again.
Presenter: Do you mean it is like a portable photocopier
machine?
Jim:
Exactly. Although it looks like a highlighter pen, it
is a small portable scanner that can read and
memorize a text line-by-line and then transfer it
directly to your PC. Besides, it can store up to 3,000
pages of text.
Presenter: Wow! And what is the last gadget for today?
Jim:
How would you like a computer that understands
your thoughts and acts upon them?
Presenter: I cant even imagine that although I know it is
possible.
Jim:
Believe it or not, it is. With this device, you dont
need a mouse or a keyboard; you just think of the
command that you want to give the computer and
the cursor moves where you want it to.
Presenter: This is the ideal gadget for people who are
physically disadvantaged. For example, (fade)
TECHNOLOGY
T ECHNOLOGY AND
AND INVENTIONS
INVENTIONS
PAGE 94
AFTER LISTENING
LANGUAGE SPOT
Linking words
Always keep in mind that the activities are meant to
promote independent learning, so help, guide and
check, but do not tell them the answers.
1. The students read the sentences. Draw their
attention to the words in bold.
2. Tell the students to identify what the words in
bold express and choose an alternative from
the list. To do this task, it is very important that
they can first identify the two parts in each
sentence and then decide what they express.
Answ ers:
a. contrast
3. Once they have checked the answer, the
students copy and complete the rule in their
notebooks.
Linking words like although, how ever,
w hile and though indicate a relationship of
contrast between ideas.
Although and though are generally placed
at the beginning of a supporting idea.
How ever goes at the beginning of the
second sentence and is followed by a comma.
While is placed either at the beginning or in
the middle of two main clauses expressing
contrasting ideas.
ERROR ALERT
Linking words are extremely important since they
indicate the relationship between ideas. Connectors can
be grouped according to meaning.
For example, while, however, and although all indicate
contrast or qualification. However, they are different types
of words, and require different punctuation.
Additional exercise
Relate these two sentences using
although / though, w hile, and how ever.
They all indicate contrast. They are different
types of words.
Answers
a. Although / though they all indicate contrast, they are
different types of words.
b. They are different types of words, while they all
indicate contrast.
c. They are all different types of words. However, they
all indicate contrast.
9 ++
SPOT to complete the sentences in their
notebooks. Invite some of them to write
their sentences on the board to check their
answers.
Answers
a. Although / though, b. However, c. while,
d. Although / though
Reflection Spot

should work on their own but you can help
assess:
their ability to use linking words to
combine ideas.
their ability to identify what linking words
express.

the Introduction.
89
illustrate it. Explain that they can use the

information in Exercise 10 to help them.
Next class, the students must read their
descriptions in their groups. The other
students must make a drawing as they
listen to the description and then compare
their drawings to find the most similar to the
original one.
(L.A.: to consolidate language and
vocabulary).
PAGE 95
10 +++
22
The objective of this activity is to allow

students to apply vocabulary and language
structures from the lesson to a real context.
Tell the students to copy and complete the
description of a new invention in their
notebooks and to make a drawing to
illustrate it. Then, invite them to form groups
and compare their descriptions and
drawings.
Finally, play the recording to allow the
students to check their work.
vocabulary).
Answers
Will vary.
PAGE 96
GAME SPOT
Answers
See transcript.
22
Speaker: This gadget is called CyberBug. It allows you to listen

to people's conversations. It has a microphone and
an amplifier, and a small headphone. Besides, it is
very cheap and portable. You can put it in your bag
and take it to work or even to the gym! With it, you
can hear conversations between people although
they are up to 50 meters away!
11 +++
Group competition! Play the recording and
make the students practice saying the
description. Then, ask them to repeat it in
their groups and choose the best imitator of
the recording.
(L.A.: to imitate a pattern of intonation and
pronunciation).
Optional exercise
Organize a further competition among the
winners of each group, to select the best imitator
of the class.
12 +++ FL
You can assign this activity to fast learners or
as homework for the whole class. Ask the
students to write a description of a new gadget
on a piece of cardboard and a drawing to
90
UNIT 3

therefore, better remembered. Students must
choose an everyday object, make notes and then
describe it to their partners without naming the
object. The partner must guess what the object is.
They can describe the objects in the pictures, or
they can choose others.
LETS CHECK
TECHNOLOGY
T ECHNOLOGY AND
AND INVENTIONS
INVENTIONS

The students must choose a gadget from the
box and write a short description of it (100
120 words). Make sure they include all the
necessary information, such as: the use of the
gadget, the components it has, if it is
affordable or not, its advantages and
disadvantages, the people who may find it
useful, etc.
You can prepare copies of the Writing
Rubric to allow students to evaluate
themselves, or their peers.
PAGE 97
REAL LIFE SPOT

Ask the students to try to solve the crossword
puzzle and find out how many words from the
lesson they can identify.
Answers
Across: 1. gadget; 4. remote control; 5. PC; 7. scanner;
8. keyboard
Down: 2. television; 3. screen; 6. mouse
PAGE 98

them an extra mark.
The students must look for information

about the inventions in the box and then
complete the fact file in their notebooks.
Possible Answers
Name of invention: Bicycle.
Name of inventor: Kirkpatrick MacMillan.
Place:
Scotland.
Year: 1939
Additional information:
Name of invention: Bikini.
Name of inventor: Louis Reard
Place:
France
Year: 1949.
Additional information: It took its name from the
Bikini islands.
Name of invention: Glasses.
Name of inventor: Galileo.
Place:
Italy.
Year: 1609.
Additional information: Galileo used them first to observe
the universe, and that was the beginning of Astronomy.
Name of invention: Kites.
Name of inventor: Unknown.
Place:
China.
Year: 2800 BC.
Additional information: After its appearance in Chila,
the kite migrated to Japan, Korea, Thailand, Burma
(Myanmar), India, Arabia and North Africa.
Name of invention: Telescope.
Name of inventor: Hans Lippershey.
Place:
Netherlands. Year: 1608.
Additional information: Niccolo Zucchi is credited with
constructing the first reflecting telescope in 1616. In
1668, Isaac Newton designed and improved the reflecting
telescope that bears his name, the Newtonian reflector.
Name of invention: Umbrella.
Name of inventor: Unknown.
Place:
Ancient Egypt. Year: Unknown.
Additional information: In Egypt, the parasol is found
in various shapes. In some instances, it is depicted as a
faellum, a fan of palm leaves or colored feathers fixed
on a long handle, resembling those now carried behind
the Pope in processions.
2 Read the instructions aloud and make sure

all the students understand what they are
expected to do. Once they have completed
the task, invite them to share their work with
their classmates and make them choose the
best invention.
Display the sketches in a visible place in the
classroom.
91
b. He has designed bunkers, tree houses, robots and

caffeinated cereal.
c. He thinks it is a constructive activity.
d. By playing video games.
Answers
Will vary.
PAGE 99
3 To do this task, the students have to look

for information in books, encyclopedias, the
Internet, etc. and then complete the timeline
of the most important XX century inventions.
Draw the timeline on the board for students
to correct their work.
Answers
1900 - automobile; 1901 - vacuum cleaner;
1902 - electric typewriter; 1903 - airplane;
1911 - refrigerator; 1920 - credit card; 1927 - television;
1940 - Velcro; 1956 - liquid paper; 1973 - Internet;
1980 - CD; 1983 - cell phone; 1986 - MP3; 1995 - DVD;
2005 - You Tube; 2005 - Facebook
3 a. His garage.
b. The glove.
c. Six hours every weekend.
d. An electric boat powered by solar panels.
PAGE 101
4 a. ii, b. ii, c. ii., d. ii, e. i.

LISTENING THE GARBAGE EATER AND
THE HUMAN ROBOT 23
5 a.
6 a. 2,000; b. five; c. work; d. made
4 The students must choose one of the

inventions from the time line in Exercise 3
and look for information about its inventor to
write his / her biography like the one of
Thomas Alva Edison. Ask them to prepare
an oral presentation to share their work with
their classmates.
7
can cant
The human
robot
PAGE 100
The garbage
eater

change garbage into drugs or

alcohol
change garbage into human or
animal
clean the house
help with homework
UNIT CHECK
PAGE 102
evaluate their performance in the whole unit. Read
the instructions and make sure all the students
understand what they are expected to do in each
activity. Encourage them to give honest answers in
order to detect their strengths and weaknesses.
Answers
READING THE LIFE OF A TEEN INVENTOR
c.
2 a. They require pieces of trash and drugstore supplies.
92
UNIT 3
8 b. e. a. d. f. c.
TRANSCRIPT - THE GARBAGE EATER AND
23
THE HUMAN ROBOT
Teacher:
Michael:
Teacher:
Michael:
So, Michael, what can you tell us about your sketch?

The Garbage Eater-2000 is an easier way to recycle.
How does it work?
First you decide how many pieces you need the
eater to suck up. Then you type in what you want
the garbage to turn into. Next, hammers inside the
machine pound the garbage 2,000 times in five
minutes and two rods melt the garbage at a
temperature of 2,000 degrees. Now the machine reshapes the garbage into the shape you wanted,
and it also spray paints it and forms the texture on
the outside. Finally the object wanted is produced.
TECHNOLOGY
T ECHNOLOGY AND
AND INVENTIONS
INVENTIONS
Teacher: Any special rules for the Garbage Eater-2000?

Michael: The Garbage-Eater 2000 can't change garbage into
human or animal, and it can't change garbage into
drugs or alcohol. You can't type in any swear words,
or foul language, or suck in any item that is not
garbage; it may cause the machine to break down.
Teacher: Thanks, Michael. Lydia, tell us about your work.
Lydia: This is a robot that looks just like a real human being.
I made one that looks just like me.
Teacher: Why do you think it's a useful device?
Lydia: Think of all the possible actions that this human sized
robot can do! It can help you with your homework, do
your chores, and even clean your house for you.
Besides, it looks very real. It is coated with paint, and
made out of old parts of toys, cars, and more!
LANGUAGE
9 a. invented; b. thought; c. developed; d. worked;

e. had to
10 a. Carla visited Argentina where she bought a lovely

leather bag.
b. This is the museum where there is an Egyptian
mummy.
c. We visited the castle where Ann Boleyn was
executed.
d. Those are the students who got the highest marks.
e. I didnt like the film which you recommended.
SPEAKING

about an imaginary invention. Make sure
they exchange information about its name,
where they got the idea, the materials they
used and why it is useful for life.
You can assign points according to these
criteria:
7 - 8 points:student can ask and answer
complete questions about the topic, with
correct pronunciation, no hesitations and
without grammar mistakes.
5 - 6: student can ask and answer complete
questions about the topic, with correct
pronunciation, and a minimum of hesitations
and grammar mistakes.
3 - 4 points: student can exchange
information about the topic with acceptable
pronunciation but hesitates and makes

grammar mistakes.
1 - 2 points: student can't exchange
information about the topic, pronunciation
interferes with comprehension, hesitates a lot
and makes a lot of grammar mistakes.
WRITING
12 The students must write a description (120

150 words) of a gadget or device they find
useful for everyday life. They must include
information about its function and the reason
it is useful for them. It is important that they
combine their ideas with linking words they
have seen in the unit, such as: however,
although, while.
criteria:
short paragraph about the topic, using
correct textual references and without
short paragraph about the topic, using a few
textual references and with a minimum of
short paragraph about the topic, but he / she
makes no use of textual references and
makes some grammar and spelling mistakes.
short paragraph about the topic and he / she
makes a lot of spelling and grammar
mistakes.
PAGE 103
FINAL REFLECTION

Make sure all the students understand what they
are expected to do and give enough time to
answer the questions. Encourage students to
give honest answers and show interest in their
results.
93
EXTRA TEST UNIT 3

READING - A NEW HYBRID ENGINE
A NEW HYBRID ENGINE

Next week at the Inventors Showcase in San
Diego, Santana High School senior Josh
Wesolowski plans to unveil an invention he hopes
will hold an answer to the energy riddle.
Constructed from an old lawn-mower engine, the
hybrid engine runs on four different types of
fuel: gasoline, propane, methanol and hydrogen.
I built this engine to simply prove that its not
difficult to run any engine on many different
fuels, the inventor said.
The machine is simplistic in appearance but
performs a unique function alternating
between four very different fuel sources with the
flip of a switch, all while the motor is running.
Gas is used first because methanol, an alcoholic

substance similar to ethanol, lacks the punch
needed to heat the engine for full ignition.
Wesolowski will demonstrate that process to the
judges at the Inventors Showcase.
The project started more than a year ago as part
of an effort by Santana High School to find
methods of producing hydrogen fuel.
Jacob Bagnell, an automotive teacher who also
taught Wesolowskis father and older brother,
donated the lawn-mower motor for the
machine.
He assisted Wesolowski in bringing his idea to life
and said the young inventor worked hard
to apply complicated scientific principles to

his project.
Wesolowski, 17, got the idea for hydrogen energy
while he was in the sixth grade, when he learned
that magnesium could combust water.
Wesolowski said hydrogen fuel may provide U.S.
motorists a means of alternative energy for their
vehicles without having to eliminate the cars
they love.
The public can start viewing the new invention at
9 a.m., next Thursday. The Awards ceremony
starts at 6 p.m., and admission is free.
By Declan Desmond / UNION-TRIBUNE
Read the text and answer these questions.

a. When and where does Josh Wesolowski plan to show his new invention?
b. What did he use to make his machine?
c. Why did he create his invention?
d. What does the machine do?
e. Who donated the material for the invention?
2 Read the text again. Choose the best alternative to finish each sentence.
a. Josh Wesolowski is
i. one of the youngest students in his school.
ii. one of the oldest students in his school.
iii. an university student.
b. The hybrid engine uses different types of fuel:
i. gasoline, propane, methanol and hydrogen.
ii. gasoline, methanol and hydrogen.
iii. gasoline, propane, and hydrogen.
c. Methanol is very similar to
i. gasoline.
ii. ethanol.
iii. propane.
d. The project started because the inventor
i. was bored.
ii. found an old lawn mower.
iii. participated in a school project.
e. The public who want to see the new invention
i. have to pay a fee to enter the exhibition.
ii. dont need to pay to enter the exhibition.
iii. have to wait for the awards ceremony to see the invention.
94
UNIT 3
5 pt.
10 pts.,
2 pts. each
TECHNOLOGY
T ECHNOLOGY AND
AND INVENTIONS
INVENTIONS
LISTENING - TWO NEW GAMES
3
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Listen to the recording. Who said these sentences, Speaker 1 or Speaker 2?

_______: A player catches the ball.
_______: All you need is a ball.
_______: The referee can also call timeouts.
_______: They have one more game.
_______: The teams rush to the ball.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Listen again and choose the correct alternative.

You start out with four / two people on the middle line.
There are three / thirteen privates, four / fourteen Snipers.
The game starts with two / four players in each team.
The quarters are ten / fifteen minutes long.
You have two / four timeouts in the game.
5 pts.
10 pts.,
2 pts. each
LANGUAGE
5 Fill in the blanks in these sentences with the Simple Past form of the verb in brackets.
10 pts.
a. Beth ________ (arrive) just before the film ________ (start)

b. Geoff ________ (not find) his parents at the airport, so he ________ (get) very
nervous.
c. The jazz singer ________ (sing) an old blues song and ________ (play) a
beautiful melody.
d. Sophie ________ (get) a new job as a receptionist; she ________ (not like) to
work as a teacher.
e We ________ (go) down to the beach as soon as the rain ________ (stop).
SPEAKING
6 Choose an everyday object and describe it to your partner but dont name it. Tell
8 pts.
him/her about its shape, its functions, its components, etc., so that your partner
guesses what the object is. Then change roles.
WRITING
7 Write a short description of an imaginary invention. Include information about its
8 pts.
name, where you got the idea, the materials you used to make it and why it is useful
for everyday life.
56 pts.
TOTAL
0 - 13
Keep trying!
14 - 28
Good!
29 - 43
Very good!
44 - 56
Excellent!
95
LANGUAGE
5 a. arrived, started b. didnt find, got c. sang,

played d. got, didnt like e. went, stopped.
READING - A NEW HYBRID ENGINE
a. Next week at the Inventors Showcase in

San Diego.
b. He used an old lawn-mower engine.
c. To prove that its not difficult to run any
engine on many different fuels.
d. It performs a unique function alternating
between four very different fuel sources.
e. Jacob Bagnell donated the lawn-mower
motor for the machine.
SPEAKING
6 In pairs, the students exchange information about

an everyday object. Make sure they exchange all
the necessary information to guess what object it
is. You can assign points according to these
criteria:
7 - 8 points: student can ask and answer
complete questions about the topic, with correct
pronunciation, no hesitations and without
grammar mistakes.
5 - 6: student can ask and answer complete
questions about the topic, with correct
pronunciation, and a minimum of hesitations and
grammar mistakes.
3 - 4 points: student can exchange information
about the topic with acceptable pronunciation but
hesitates and makes grammar mistakes.
1 - 2 points: student can't exchange information
about the topic, pronunciation interferes with
comprehension, hesitates a lot and makes a lot
of grammar mistakes.
2 a. ii.; b. i.; c. ii.; d. iii.; e. ii.

LISTENING - TWO NEW GAMES
24
3 Speaker 1: a.; d., Speaker 2: b.; c.; e.

4 a. two; b. three, four; c. four; d. ten; e. four
TRANSCRIPT - TWO NEW GAMES
24
Speaker 1: War Ball is a game that combines football with war.

You start out with two people on the middle line, and
then a player catches the ball and starts running.
There is a base instead of a touchdown zone, so when
a player gets a touchdown they are actually winning a
war. All the other players hide behind objects on the
field. The positions are General, Soldiers, Snipers and
Privates. There are three Privates, four Snipers, five
Soldiers and one General. The player who gets to 40
points in one hour or who has the most points wins! If
there is a tie, then they have one more game. And all
the darts are foam so they won't hurt if you get hit.
Speaker 2: This sport is a mix of two very popular sports: football
and soccer. All you need is a ball. The objective of the
game is to kick the ball into the goal. There are ten
people in a team. The game starts with four players in
each team on each side, with the round ball in the
center of the field. The game starts and the teams rush
to the ball. The aim is to get the most goals by the end
of the 4th quarter. The quarters are ten minutes long.
You have four timeouts in the game. The timeouts are
one and a half minutes long. The referee can also call
timeouts.
96
UNIT 3
WRITING
The students must write a description (120 - 150

words) of an imaginary gadget or device. They
must include information about its name, its
function and the reason it's useful for them. It is
important that they combine their ideas with
linking words they have seen in the unit, such as
however, although, while. You can assign points
according to these criteria:
7 - 8 points:student can write a coherent
description providing the required information,
using correct textual references and linking words,
and without grammar or spelling mistakes.
description providing the required information,
using a few textual references and linking words,
and with a minimum of grammar or spelling
mistakes.
description providing some of the required
information, but he / she makes no use of textual
references and linking words, and makes some
description and he / she makes a lot of spelling
UNIT
SONGS - MUSIC
AND WORDS
read a piece of chat
read book reviews
listen to a television program
listen to a song
Reading
distinguish general and specific information
information
identify type of text
Listening
infer mood of speakers
discriminate sounds
Language
use would and could
use modal verbs must, have to, need to
use the Passive Voice
Types of Evaluation
use the First and Second Conditional

Speaking
ask people about imaginary situations
request information using polite questions
Writing
write a book review
write questions and answers in a chat room
You will also:
assess and appreciate the value of music and
literature
develop respect for the role of music and literature
as a means of communication
Development
Consolidation and evaluation activities: 3 hours +
home assignments
Didactic resources
Pictures of teenagers provided by the teacher and
by the students to illustrate the diversity of teenage
cultures.
Indicators
Reflection spot
Self - evaluation
Unit Check
Unit evaluation
Reading: Students identify and extract specific information.

Listening: Students identify the correct sequence of information and discriminate sounds.
Language: Students use the Second Conditional Structure and the Present Passive Voice.
Speaking: Students imitate an interview between a famous artist and a fan.
Writing: Students write a book review.
Final Reflection
Extra Test
Language: Students use the Passive Voice and the Second Conditional.
97
PAGE 104
2 ++
GETTING READY
1
In their groups, the students write a list of all

the words related to music and literature
they know in English. Ask them to copy and
complete the chart onto a piece of paper.
Possible Answers
Music
music, song, melody,
lyrics, instruments,
singer, orchestra,
concert, CD, DVD,
MP3, musician, chorus
Literature
book, novel, writer,
story, chapter, character,
protagonist, title, plays,
drama, plot, setting
Tell the students to work in pairs and copy

and complete the chart in their notebooks.
Invite some students to write the chart on
the board to check the activity.
(L.A.: to relate topic and students previous
knowledge).
Answers
Name
Country Year of birth
Discipline
Mahani Teave
Chile
1983
Classical music - piano
Kudai
Chile
2004 (band) Pop music - band
Ma. Jos Quintanilla Chile
1990
Mexican music Singer
Miley Cirus
USA
1992
Pop music Singer
Jonas Brothers
USA
2005 (band) Pop music band
Gareth Johnson
USA
1985
Classical music - violin
Rihanna
Barbados 1988
Pop music Singer
Aria Tesolin
Canada 1994
Opera
2 Invite the groups to display their charts on

the board to compare their list with other
groups and to share new words. Then, tell
them to look up the meanings of the words
they do not know in an English-English
dictionary and write a glossary related to the
topic of the unit in their notebooks.
3 Invite the students to imagine they are lost

on an island in the middle of the ocean. Tell
them to choose a book and a music album
they would like to have. In their groups, the
students share their comments giving
reasons for their choices.
PAGE 106
LESSON 1
READING
CHATTING WITH A YOUNG WINNER
BEFORE READING
1
Ask the students to look at the pictures on

page 106 and identify what the people have
in common.
(L.A.: to relate previous knowledge with the
Answers
They are all singers and teenagers.
98
UNIT 4
Riha nna
Robyn Rihanna Fenty (born February 20,
1988), known as Rihanna, is a Barbadian
singer, model and fashion designer. She also
serves as the cultural ambassador for the island
of Barbados.She is the first Barbadian artist to
officially win a Grammy Award. Rihanna is
currently signed to the Def Jam Recordings
label. Five of her singles have been on the
Billboard tops.
Rihanna broke into the industry in 2005 with the
release of her debut album Music of the Sun,
which features her hit single Pon de Replay.
Less than a year later, Rihanna released A Girl
Like Me and earned her first number-one single,
SOS. In 2007, Rihanna released her third
studio album, Good Girl Gone Bad. The album
has yielded six hit singles, including three
worldwide number one singles: Umbrella,
Dont Stop the Music, and Take a Bow. Since
the release of her debut album, Rihanna has
amassed twelve top 40 hit singles in the U.S.
K uda i is a Latin Grammy Award-Nominated
Chilean pop rock group founded in Santiago,
Chile. Its original members were Toms Caas
Manzi, Pablo Holman Concha, Nicole Natalino
and Brbara Seplveda Labra. In 2006 Nicole
Natalino left the group citing personal reasons,
and was replaced by Ecuadorian Gabriela
Villalba. The bands name comes from the
Mapudungun word kdaw, meaning work.
SONGS
SONGS -- MUSI
MUSIC
C AND
AND WORDS
WORDS
They released three albums in Latin America

Vuelo in 2004, Sobrevive in 2006 and
Nadha in 2008, this is the first album of the
band released in the United States.
The group is hugely popular mostly among
teenagers in South America, the Caribbean,
Central America, and Mexico, and has sold
around 1 million records worldwide.
They are well-known for hit songs, such as
Sin Despertar, Ya Nada Queda, Escapar,
Djame Gritar, Llvame, Tal Vez, and most
recently, Lejos De Aqu.
M ile y Ra y Cyrus (born Destiny Hope Cyrus
on November 23, 1992) is an American actress
and Golden Globe-nominated singer-songwriter.
Cyrus is better known for starring as Miley
Stewart / Hannah Montana in the television
series Hannah Montana on the Disney Channel.
Cyrus became a sensation after Hannah
Montana debuted in March 2006. Following the
success of the show, in October 2006, a
soundtrack CD was released in which she sang
eight songs from the show. As of December
2007, she worked on a movie spin-off of
Hannah Montana, titled Hannah Montana: The
Movie which was released in April, 2009.
Cyruss solo music career began with the
release of her debut album, Meet Miley Cyrus
on June 23, 2007. Her second album,
Breakout was released on July 22, 2008.
Breakout is Cyruss first album that does not
involve the Hannah Montana franchise. Both
albums debuted at #1 on the Billboard 200.
In 2008, Cyrus was listed among artists and
entertainers as one of Time magazines 100
Most Influential People in The World.
The Jonas Brothers are an AMA-winning,
Grammy-nominated American boy band. The
band gained their popularity from the childrens
television network, Disney Channel. Hailing from
Wyckoff, New Jersey, the band consists of three
brothers: Kevin Jonas, Joe Jonas, and Nick
Jonas. They starred in a spin off of High School
Musical called Camp Rock. They have released
three albums: Its About Time (2006), Jonas
Brothers (2007), and A Little Bit Longer (2008).
M a ha ni T e a ve is unique for being the only
classical musician from her native Easter Island
(Chile). Ms. Teave is a winner of numerous
international piano competitions and is one of
the most sought after pianists in Chile. She
studied at the Cleveland Institute of Music,

under the tutelage of Sergei Babayan.
M a ra J ose Quint a nilla Sa ndova l was
born on February, 17th, 1990 in Santiago, Chile.
She lived with her family in Maip. She began
singing when she was a little girl, and she
admires Mexican music.
Ga re t h J ohnson: Having heard the famed
Itzhak Perlman, Johnson at the age of ten
declared, I can play that instrument! His
passion and persistence to master the violin has
allowed him to become one of the most talented
African American violinists of his time.
As a winner of the Sphinx Competition, a
competition designed to reveal the talents of
African and Hispanic Americans, he has helped
students throughout America understand that with
hard work, commitment and focus, they too can
achieve their dreams. During his presentations
most students are astonished at the fact that in
addition to his talents as a classical violinist, he is
a devoted composer, arranger and performer of
New Age styles of music.
Aria T e solin: She was born in Canada, in
1994. At age 3, inspired by the music in Disney
and other childrens movies and later at 4, by
the movie musical Evita, Aria began singing
complex melodies untypical for her age.
At age 6 she discovered a love for opera music
from hearing tenor Andrea Bocelli. Attending her
first live opera Carmen at 7, she announced that
she would some day sing the role of Carmen.
One day she suddenly burst into an energetic La
Donna e Mobile. She named one of her rabbits
Puccini after her favorite composer.
Aria began studying opera at 7 with Gofreddo
Ricci, from Rome, Italy, coach trainer for opera
singers from the Canadian Opera Company &
Mississauga Opera Company. After his death in
2003 she began studying with Professor Marat
Maxutov, an exceptional vocal trainer from
Russia, who has excellent knowledge of voice
physiology for young people. Aria is of Northern
Italian descent, fluent in French and English, sings
in 5 languages and lives in Canada.
The young artist released her debut album Baby
Soprano at age 12, with a challenging and solid
14-track opera repertoire and was probably the
youngest opera singer in the world at the time.
To date she has sung popular opera arias in
several concerts featured with Canadas 3
99
Tenors - Andrea Garofalo, Peter Marino, Mitch

Seekins & Charles DiRaimondo, arranged by Mr.
Rino Ianone. Aria opened Canada Day
celebrations for the City of Toronto in both 2003 &
2005 singing for up to 20,000 people and in 2007
for 44,000 at the Toronto Blue Jays Baseball
game.
Ask students to have a look at the name of

this lesson and at the picture of the girl in the
text on page 108 of their book. Elicit their
ideas about why they think the girl is a young
winner. Tell them to choose an alternative,
but do not check their predictions at this
stage.
(L.A.: to use previous knowledge to make
predictions).
PAGE 107
4 Explain to the students that award winning

Sarah Bennett answers questions from the
public on an Internet web site. Ask them to
select the cognates they expect to find in
the text from the words in the boxes.
(L.A.: to predict content from cognates).
Optional exercise
Once the students have selected the cognates
they expect to find in the text, ask them to give
examples of sentences using the cognates.
5 Before reading the text, tell the students to

read the words in the Key Word Spot and
look up their meanings in a dictionary.
Answers
two or more notes played together.
the words of a song.
a tube that carries blood through the
body.
venue:
a place where people meet for an
organized event.
jigsaw puzzle: a picture printed on cardboard or wood,
that has been cut up into a lot of small
pieces that you have to fit together again.
100
UNIT 4
Please note that this text is from a British

website. For this reason some words use
the British instead of the American spelling.
American English British English
organize
organise
practice
practice (noun)
(verb and noun)
practise (verb)
6 +
3 +++
chords:
lyric:
vessel:
READING

Answers
3. c; 4. music, idol, inspiration, project, musician, favorite
7 ++
Ask the students to read Sarahs answers
again and find the correct location for each
question (a. g.).
Answers
a. I; b. IV; c. II; d. VII; e. V; f. III; g. VI
8 +++
Invite the students to read the text again
and decide if the statements a. e. are true
or false. As an additional exercise, you can
ask the students to identify the incorrect
information in the false statements and then
correct them in their notebooks.
Answers
a. True; b. False (She says its difficult); c. False.
(Songwriting is the only thing in her life she can
organise); d. True; e. True.
9 +++
The students read the text once more and
then answer questions a. d. in their
notebooks. Motivate them to write complete
sentences and check orally.
SONGS
SONGS -- MUSI
MUSIC
C AND
AND WORDS
WORDS
a.
b.
c.
d.
Possible answers
6,500 people went to see Sarah at Exeter.
They are free events where people can sing.
Sarah would like to play at the Albert Hall one day.
In the future, Sarah would like to work in a project
like Live Aid.
PAGE 109
AFTER READING
10 ++
In their groups, the students talk about the
text they read. Tell them to think of three
more questions to ask Sarah in the chat and
invite some students to share their questions
with their classmates. As an optional activity,
you can ask the students to take notes of
the questions. If possible, as homework,
encourage students to visit the web-site:
http://www.bbc.co.uk/blast/music/people/sarah_
bennett.shtml and find the answers.
LANGUAGE SPOT
Indirect questions
grammar structure or any interesting item of
1. The students read the questions from the text.
2. They analyze and compare questions a. c.
with questions d. - g. Guide them to identify
the answers to questions i. v.
Answ ers:
i. a., b., c..g.; ii. d., e., f.; iii. indirect
questions are more polite; iv. they are
shorter than indirect questions; v. they are
longer than direct questions.
Answ ers:
Indirect questions are more polite, longer
forms of normal questions. Indirect questions
are formed of tw o parts: a polite expression,
like Could you tell me, What do you
think, and a question which has no subject /
verb inversion or does not use an auxiliary, like
a direct question.
4. Once they have completed the rule, the
students go back to the text and copy all the
questions in their notebooks. Then, they turn
the direct questions into indirect ones, and the
indirect questions into direct ones.
Answ ers:
a. How hard is it to write a song?
b. Could you tell me what you think of first
the music or the lyrics?
c. What should I do?
d. Can you tell me what your dream project is?
e. Could you tell me where you get the
inspiration for your lyrics?
f. Who are your music idols?
g. Can you tell me who your favorite musician
is?
ERROR ALERT
Indirect questions do not use the auxiliary verb do in
the main question. For example:
- When does the next train arrive? - Direct question
- Do you know when the next train arrives? - Indirect
question
- Do you know when does the next train arrive? - Incorrect
the Introduction.
Additional exercise
Transform these direct questions into indirect
questions, using a polite expression.
a.What is your name?
b.Why do you want this job?
c.How much do you earn?
d.How soon can you start?
e.When did you see the advertisement?
f. Where do you live?
g.Which newspaper did you see the
advertisement in?
h.Who gave you my name?
101
PAGE 110
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Could you tell me what your name is?

Can you tell me why you want this job?
Would you mind telling me how much you earn?
Can you tell me how soon you can start?
Could you tell me when you saw the advertisement?
Can I ask you where you live?
Can I ask you which newspaper you saw the
advertisement in?
h. Could you tell me who gave you my name?
11 ++
13 ++
The students use their questions from
Exercise 10 and transform them into polite
questions. Ask them to write the sentences
in their notebooks. Invite some students to
write them on the board to allow the rest to
check the activity.
Reflection Spot
25
Refer students to the LANGUAGE SPOT

and tell them to put the words in order to
make polite questions. Then, ask them to
write also the corresponding direct
questions. Play the recording to allow
students to check their answers
Answers
See transcript
25
a. I wonder if you could give me some information.

Could you give me some information?
b. What time is it?
Could you tell me what time it is?
c. Do you know where I can buy a map?
Where can I buy a map?
d. Id like to know where I can change some money.
Where can I change some money?
e. Can you tell me where I can find a pharmacy?
Where can I find a pharmacy?

assess:
their ability to make polite questions.
their ability to use polite questions in a
conversation.
14 +++
In pairs, the students use the polite
expressions in the bubbles to write a short
interview using indirect questions.
(L.A.: to apply a language structure to a
communicative situation).
Answers
Will vary.
12 +++
25
The students listen to the recording again

and practice saying the questions. Then, in
pairs, they take turns to say a direct
question and the corresponding indirect
question.
(L.A.: to imitate a model of pronunciation).
102
UNIT 4
15
+++
Encourage the students to role-play the
interview they wrote. You can supply
copies of the Oral Presentation Rubric
(page - of this bak) and ask the rest to
evaluate their classmates performance.
(L.A.: to role-play a communicative
situation).
SONGS
SONGS -- MUSI
MUSIC
C AND
AND WORDS
WORDS

LETS CHECK
The students must use the polite
expressions in the box to transform
questions a. e. into indirect questions.
Answers
Any of the expressions +
a. when the next train arrives?
b. what time the museum closes?
c. how hard it is to be an artist?
d. when you wrote your first story?
e. if we can hear your latest song?
17
PAGE 111
REAL LIFE SPOT

@@ CLICK ON
Motivate students to visit the web-site indicated
at the bottom of page 111 to find more
information on the topic of the REAL LIFE SPOT.
PAGE 112
LESSON 2
LISTENING
+++ FL
You can assign this activity to fast learners
as homework for whole class. Invite your
students to think about a famous young
artist they would like to chat with. In their
notebooks, ask them to write a short piece
of chat like the one in the text, with the
questions they would like to ask and the
artists answers.
(L.A.: to exchange information in a chat
room).
Answers
Will vary.
18 +
If you assigned Exercise 17 as homework,
next class encourage the students to show
their work to their classmates. Organize a
general conversation about the importance
of being capable to exchange information on
the Internet, and the usefulness of English
as a general means of communication.
(L.A.: to relate content to students own reality).
NEW STARS
BEFORE LISTENING
Draw the students attention to the pictures. Elicit
students ideas about what they see in them.
+
Explain to the students that these are all names
of radio or TV programs (according to their
location in one of the pictures) and they are all
related to music. Students work in pairs and write
a list of radio and TV programs related to music
that they know. The share it with other pairs.
Invite some students to write their lists on the
board.
(L.A.: to relate previous knowledge to the
Answers
Will vary, according to students own lists.
103
2 ++
5 ++
Read the name of the lesson aloud and

brainstorm students ideas about what they
think it is. Write the ideas on the board but
do not correct at this stage.
(L.A.: to predict content from titles).
3 +++
Ask the students to read the words in the
Key Word Spot and then identify their
meanings in the list (a. e.). You may also
tell the students to predict or guess the
meanings and then check their answers
with a dictionary.
Answers
audience: c.; coach: b.; contestant: a.; fit: e.; pretend: d.
Reflection Spot
The purpose of this activity is to help students

reflect on their learning process and to raise
students awareness of how they develop their
own learning strategies to become more
effective learners. They should work on their
own but you can help and guide the work
when necessary.
their ability to apply study skills.
their ability to infer the meaning of new words.
PAGE 113
26

Remind your students that they dont need
to understand every single word. This first
time they should concentrate on general
meaning, just to check or correct their
predictions.
Answers
a.
104
UNIT 4
Tell the students to listen and identify where

the text was taken from.
(L.A.: to identify the origin of a text).
Answers
c.
6 ++
26
The students listen to the recording again,

this time with the objective of identifying
each speakers job in the academy. Draw
students attention to the personal
introduction of each speaker.
Answers
a. iii.; b. i.; c. ii.
7 ++
26

again and choose the correct alternative.
Answers
a. sing; b. leave; c. great; d. cool; e. feeling
ERROR ALERT
Pay special attention to the different pronunciation of
these sounds:
th / o / and s /s/
the Introduction.
Additional exercise
a. Read and repeat these pairs of words.
thick - sick
think - sink
mouth - mouse
path - pass
LISTENING
4 +
26
b. Think of more examples and complete the chart.

/ o/
thick
think
mouth
path
/s/
sick
sink
mouse
pass
SONGS
SONGS -- MUSI
MUSIC
C AND
AND WORDS
WORDS
Possible Answers
/ o/
thunder
thief
thanks
thought
thin
through
math
TRANSCRIPT - NEW STARS

/s/
say
set
sing
so
some
sum
mass
PAGE 114
8 +++
26
Tell the students to copy the sentences

into their notebooks. As they listen, they
must write the name of the speaker in the
provided spaces. An optional exercise
would be to invite the students to read
each sentence carefully, predict the
speakers and then check with the
recording. You may guide the students to
predict correctly, according to the content
of each sentence. (Example: the director is
the person who is in charge of talking
about the rules and general information;
the voice coach talks about singing; the
songwriting coach talks about lyrics and
composing)
Answers
a. Adam; b. Spencer; c. Adam; d. Savannah;
e. Spencer; f. Savannah.
9 +++
26

once more to match the answers (i. iv.)
and the questions (a. d.). Again, you can
change the order of the activity,
encouraging the students to predict their
answers and then check with the
recording.
Answers
a. iii.; b. i.; c. iv.; d. ii.
26
Spencer: Hello, everybody. Im Spencer, the Director. Id like

to welcome you and wish you success. You will
spend three months with us, at the New Stars
music academy. Here, you will learn to sing and
compose, and each week you will perform one of
your own songs on a TV show. The audience will
vote for them by phone. If you get the lowest
number of votes you will leave the program. You
must obey our rules and attend all your classes.
Our coaches are great and they will teach you to
develop your talents. Any questions for them?
Girl:
Can you tell me how you will make stars of us?
Savannah: Im Savannah, your voice coach. You have to know
that everyone here can sing, but not everyone can
sing like a star. My job here is to help you to find
your special voice, but you need to work hard. If
you do that, you will stay with us till the end.
Boy:
Id like to know how you get the music to fit the lyrics.
Adam:
Hi, my names Adam and Im your songwriting
coach. Songwriting is cool, but not everyone has
to be a composer. You dont need to be a poet; the
important thing is to fit the words to the music.
Most of our contestants do it, and they say that
performing their own songs is a great feeling.
Director: Any more questions? Anyone?
AFTER LISTENING
10 ++
In their groups, the students answer the
questions and then share answers with
another group. Encourage the use of
English as much as possible, as for the
majority of the students these are the only
occasions in which they can practice.
Remember not to interrupt to correct them
while they are speaking. Its better to talk
about the most important general mistakes
at the end of the activity or the class. Invite
some groups to report their answers to the
rest of the class.
105
PAGE 115
LANGUAGE SPOT
Need to, dont need to, must
meant to promote independent learning, so help,
guide and check, but do not tell them the
answers.
1. Ask the students to read the sentences from
the text.
2. Help them discover what the sentences
express and ask them to relate this to the
verbs used.
Answ e rs:
a . obligation; b. obligation; c . necessity; d.
no necessity
We use m ust to express an obligation, and
ne e d t o / dont ne e d t o to express a
ne c e ssit y / no ne c e ssit y.
4. Motivate the students to recall the
conversation they listened to. Ask them to
write three more sentences using the verbs in
the LANGUAGE SPOT.
Possible a nsw e rs:
The audience must vote by phone.
You dont need to know how to sing and
compose.
If you get the lowest number of votes you
must leave the program.
You dont need to sing like a star.
ERROR ALERT
As stated in the NOTE of the Language Spot:
have to = must
dont have to = dont need to.
the Introduction.
106
UNIT 4
Additional exercise
Use must, have to, mustnt or not have to in the
following sentences.
a. Jack __________ (go) home early today. He
has got homework.
b. Children __________ (play) with cleaning
liquids.
c. We __________ (go) now. Its already
midnight!
d. Peter __________ (arrive) to work at 8:00
every day.
e. You __________ (do) the cleaning today. Ive
already done it.
f. We __________ (hurry). Were on time.
11 +++
Encourage your students to write
sentences in their notebooks using the
verbs in the LANGUAGE SPOT and the
clues in the box as shown in the example.
Invite some of them to write their
sentences on the board to allow the rest to
check the exercise.
Answers
Will vary. Accept all coherent sentences.
LETS CHECK
assign a mark according to the scale.
Ask the students to complete the
sentences with facts that are true for them.
SONGS
SONGS -- MUSI
MUSIC
C AND
AND WORDS
WORDS
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Possible Answers
Ive got to go now. I must arrive home early.
You have got a lot of games. You dont need to buy
more.
He is a very rich man. He doesnt need to work.
My mother doesnt feel well. She needs to rest. / She
must call the doctor.
Ive got a message for you. You must call Susan.
PAGE 116
13 ++
27

using the clues in the boxes. Then, play the
recording and ask them to check their
answers.
(L.A.: to exchange information).
Answers
See transcript.
27
A: Hi! Can I ask you a few questions? Im new here, you see.
B: Sure! What do you need to know?
A: Well, Id like to know how long were going to stay here.
B: Well stay here for six weeks, and then well learn to sing and
compose.
A: How about the rules?
B: We must obey their rules and attend all the classes.
A: Tell me about our coaches.
B: They are great! They help us to develop our talents, but we
need to work hard.
14 +++
27
The students listen to the recording again.

Then, they practice and role-play the
dialogue with a partner in front of the class.
(L.A.: to imitate a model of pronunciation
and intonation).
PAGE 117
GAME SPOT
fun, but more importantly, for the useful practice and
review of language lessons. Thus, the meaning of
the language the students listen to, read, speak and
write will be more vividly experienced and,
therefore, better remembered.
Read the instructions aloud and motivate the
students to apply the Truth Questionnaire to two of
their classmates.
Answers
Will vary.
15 +++ FL
You can assign this activity to fast learners
or for homework for the whole class. With
the information they collected when
applying the questionnaire, the students
must write two short paragraphs about
their classmates answers.
Invite the students to read the paragraphs
they wrote to a classmate. You may also
supply copies of the Writing Rubric and ask
the students to assess their partners work.
(L.A.: to write a short report).
REAL LIFE SPOT

humor to the class. Anyway, all the jokes and
cartoons are related to the topic of the lesson. Give
some minutes to allow students read and then
invite them to share their comments to make sure
allow the use of Spanish to check comprehension.
107
PAGE 118
LESSON 3
READING
WE WANT YOU TO READ!
BEFORE READING
1
+
Draw students attention to the people in
the pictures. Elicit their ideas about what
these people have in common. Make them
relate the title of the lesson to the pictures
and ask them to predict the general topic
of the lesson.
(L.A.: to use previous knowledge to predict
topic).
Answers
The people in the pictures are all famous writers.
The general topic of the lesson is literature.
I sa be l Alle nde : Chilean writer; she was
born on August 2nd, 1942. She worked as a
journalist in Chile from 1964 to 1974, and in
Venezuela from 1975 to 1984.
As an author she has published articles in
newspapers and magazines in America and
Europe, has made lecture tours in America and
Europe colleges and taught literature at the
University of Virginia, Charlottesville , Montclair
College, New Jersey and University of
California, Berkeley.
Her most important novels are:
- The House of the Spirits, (novel) Spain 1982.
- Of Love and Shadows, (novel) Spain 1984.
- Eva Luna, (novel) Spain 1985.
- Stories of Eva Luna, (short stories) Spain 1989.
- The Infinite Plan, (novel) Spain 1991.
- Paula, (novel) Spain 1994.
- Aphrodite (recipes, stories and other
aphrodisiacs) Spain 1997.
- Daughter of Fortune, (novel) Spain 1999.
- Portrait in Sepia, (novel) Spain 2000.
- The City of the Beasts (young adult novel)
Spain 2002.
- My Invented Country, (novel) Spain 2003.
108
UNIT 4
- Kingdom of the Golden Dragon, (young

adult novel) Spain 2003.
- Forest of the Pygmies, (young adult novel)
2005.
- Zorro, (novel) Spain 2005.
- Ins of My Soul, (novel) Spain 2006.
- The Sum of Our Days, (novel) Spain 2007.
Albe rt o Fugue t : Alberto Fuguet was born in
Santiago, Chile, but he lived in Encino,
California until he was 13. He is a graduate of
the Universidad de Chiles School of Journalism.
In 1999 Time called Fuguet one of the 50 most
important Latin Americans for the next
millennium. In 2003, he was featured on the
cover of the international edition of Newsweek
magazine to represent a new generation of
Latino writers.
Fuguet currently heads the program in
Contemporary Audiovisual Culture at the
Universidad Alberto Hurtados School of Journalism
in Santiago. He also writes for the newspaper El
Mercurio and is at work on two new projects: the
film Perdidos and the book Missing.
Fuguets work is characterized by a United
States / Chilean hybridity, with constant crossreferences to the popular cultures of the two
nations. In 1996 he co-edited (with Sergio
Gmez) the anthology McOndo, whose title
combined McDonalds with Macondo, the
fictional town created by Gabriel Garca
Mrquez. McOndo represented popular culture
while largely rejecting the use of magical realism
in contemporary Latin American fiction.
Fuguets other books are the short story
collections Sobredosis and Cortos; the
novels Mala onda, Por favor, Rebobinar,
Tinta roja and Las pelculas de mi vida; and
the non-fiction collection Primera parte. Mala
onda, which narrates a week in the life of a
Santiago teenager in 1980, has received wide
acclaim. Tinta roja has been made into a film.
Las pelculas de mi vida is a semiautobiographical novel about a Chilean
seismologist who grew up in California and later
returned to Chile. Its protagonist recounts his life
with references to movies he has watched.
Some of Fuguets work, including Mala onda
and Las pelculas de mi vida, have been
translated into English and published in the
United States.
SONGS
SONGS -- MUSI
MUSIC
C AND
AND WORDS
WORDS
2007 saw the release of Road Story, a

graphic novel illustrated by Gonzalo Martnez
based on one of the stories in Cortos.
Gabriel Garca Mrquez was born on March
6, 1927 in the town of Aracataca, Colombia. In
January 1929, his parents moved to Baranquilla
while Garca Marquez stayed in Aracataca. He
was raised by his maternal grandparents. When
he was eight, his grandfather died, and he moved
to his parents home in Barranquilla where his
father owned a pharmacy.
Since Garca Mrquezs parents were more or
less strangers to him for the first few years of
his life, his grandparents influenced his early
development very strongly. His grandfather was
an excellent storyteller. He taught Garca
Mrquez lessons from the dictionary, took him
to the circus each year, and was the first to
introduce his grandson to icea miracle found
at the United Fruit Company store. Garca
Mrquezs political and ideological views were
shaped by his grandfathers stories. Garca
Mrquezs grandmother played an equally
influential role in his upbringing. The house was
filled with stories of ghosts and premonitions,
omens and portents, all of which were
studiously ignored by her husband. According to
Garca Mrquez she was the source of the
magical, superstitious and supernatural view of
reality. It was a style that, some thirty years
later, heavily influenced her grandsons most
popular novel, One Hundred Years of Solitude.
In 1940, Garca Mrquez left his family, which
had moved a year earlier to Sucre, in order to
begin his secondary school education at the
Jesuit boarding school of San Jos in
Barranquilla. At San Jos, he first published his
words in the school magazine Juventud.
After graduation in 1947, he started law school
at the National University of Colombia in
Bogot. Although his passion was now writing,
he continued in law school to please his father.
By 1950, he gave up the idea of becoming a
lawyer to focus on journalism. He moved back
to Barranquilla to write for the newspaper, El
Heraldo. Although Garca Mrquez never
finished university, Columbia University in New
York awarded him an honorary doctorate of
letters in 1971.
M a rc e la Pa z (February 28, 1902 - June 12,

1985) was the pen name of Esther Huneeus
Salas de Claro, a Chilean writer. She also used
the pen names of Paula de la Sierra, Lukim
Retse, P. Neka and Juanita Godoy.
Paz was born in Santiago, Chile, the second
child of a wealthy family. She studied at home.
In 1926 she traveled to Paris to study arts and
returned to Chile at the age of 24, when she
started her literary work. She wrote for
magazines like El Peneca, Ecran, Zig-Zag, Eva
and Margarita, and newspapers like La Nacin,
El Mercurio and La Tercera. In 1933 she
published her first book, Tiempo, papel y lpiz.
The same year she married Jos Luis Claro.
In 1947 Paz created her most famous
character, Papelucho. Between 1964 y 1967,
she directed the Asociacin Internacional del
Libro Juvenil (IBBY).
In 1968 she received the Hans Christian
Andersen Award. In 1979 she received the gold
medal from the Instituto Cultural de Providencia.
In 1982, she received the Premio Nacional de
Literatura de Chile.
J oa nne Row ling: (born 31 July 1965), who
writes under the pen name J . K . Row ling, is a
British author, best known as the creator of the
Harry Potter fantasy series, the idea for which
was conceived whilst on a train trip from
Manchester to London in 1990. The Potter books
have gained worldwide attention, won multiple
awards, and sold more than 400 million copies.
She has become a notable philanthropist,
supporting such charities as Comic Relief, One
Parent Families and the Multiple Sclerosis
Society of Great Britain.
J .R.R.T olk ie n: John Ronald Reuel Tolkien
was born on 3 January 1892, in Bloemfontein in
the Orange Free State (now Free State
Province, part of South Africa). As a child,
Tolkien was bitten by a large baboon spider (a
type of tarantula) in the garden, an event which
would have later echoes in his stories.
When he was three, Tolkien went to England
with his mother and brother on what was
intended to be a lengthy family visit. His father,
however, died in South Africa of rheumatic fever
before he could join them. His mother tutored
her two sons, and Ronald, as he was known in
the family, was a keen pupil. She taught him a
109
great deal of botany, and awakened in her son

the enjoyment of the look and feel of plants.
Young Tolkien liked to draw landscapes and
trees, but his favorite lessons were those
concerning languages, and his mother taught
him the rudiments of Latin very early. He could
read by the age of four, and could write fluently
soon afterwards. His mother allowed him to read
many books. He disliked Treasure Island and
The Pied Piper, and thought Alices
Adventures in Wonderland by Lewis Carroll
was amusing but disturbing.
Tolkien attended King Edwards School,
Birmingham and St. Philips School.
He lived in the shadow of Perrotts Folly and
the Victorian tower of Edgbaston Waterworks,
which may have influenced the images of the
dark towers within his works.
2 ++
Ask the students to look at the pictures of
the book covers and then match them with
their names.
knowledge).
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Answers
A Hundred Years of Solitude (1)
Harry Potter and the Deathly Hallows (4)
Kingdom of the Golden Dragon ( 2)
Papelucho and the Alien (6)
The Lord of the Rings (3)
The Movies of my Life (5)
3 ++
In pairs, the students make a list of the most
interesting books they have ever read. Tell
them to say the genre of the books.
Optionally, you can ask the students to
draw and complete a chart in their
notebooks with the name of a book they
can remember for each category.
110
UNIT 4
Genre
Name
Comic
Detective
History
Horror
Manual
Play
Romance
Science Fiction
Thriller
Other
You may need some background
information to help your students identify the
characteristics of each genre.
De t e c t ive
Detective fiction has become almost
synonymous with mystery. These stories relate
the solving of a crime, usually one or more
murders, by a protagonist who may or may not
be a professional investigator. This large,
popular genre has many subgenres, reflecting
differences in tone, character, and it always
contains criminal and detective settings.
H orror
Horror fiction aims to evoke some combination
of fear, fascination, and revulsion in its readers.
This genre, like others, continues to develop,
recently moving away from stories with a
religious or supernatural basis to ones making
use of medical or psychological ideologies.
Sc ie nc e fic t ion
Science fiction is defined more by setting
details than by other story elements. Science
fiction by definition includes extrapolated or
theoretical future science and technology as a
major component, and is often set on other
planets, in outer space, or on a future version of
Earth. Within these setting details, however, the
conventions of almost any other genre may be
used, including comedy, action-adventure and
mystery. A sub-genre of science fiction is
alternate history where, for some specific
reason, the history of the novel deviates from
the history of our world. Both alternate history
and science fiction are often referred to
alongside fantasy fiction, magical realism and
some horror fiction under the umbrella term
speculative fiction.
SONGS
SONGS -- MUSI
MUSIC
C AND
AND WORDS
WORDS
Rom a nc e
Romance is currently the largest and bestselling fiction genre in North America. It has
produced a wide array of subgenres, the majority
of which feature the mutual attraction and love of
a man and a woman as the main plot, and have
a happy ending. This genre, much like fantasy
fiction, is broad enough in definition that it is
easily and commonly seen combined with other
genres, such as comedy, fantasy fiction, realistic
fiction, or action-adventure.
Pla y
A story meant to be performed in a theater
before an audience. Most plays are written in
dialogue form and are divided into several
a c t s. Many include stage directions and
instructions for sets and costumes.
Com e dy: A lighthearted play characterized by
humor and a happy ending.
Fa rc e : A form of high-energy comedy that
plays on confusions and deceptions between
characters and features a convoluted and fastpaced plot. Farce often incorporates buffoonery,
slapstick, and stock characters to provoke
uproarious laughter. Molire was a master of
farce with such plays as The Imaginary Invalid.
M ira c le pla y: A play from the Middle Ages
featuring saints or miraculous appearances by
the Virgin Mary.
M ora lit y pla y: A play written in the fifteenth
or sixteenth centuries that presents an
a lle gory of the Christian struggle for salvation.
M yst e ry pla y: A short play based on a
biblical story. Mystery plays, popular in the
Middle Ages, often were presented in c yc le s,
in which dozens of plays were performed at
different locations throughout a city and
collectively presented the most significant
moments in the Bible.
N oh dra m a : A ritualized form of Japanese
drama that evolved in the 1300s involving
masks and slow, stylized movement.
Proble m pla y: A play that confronts a
contemporary social problem with the intent of
changing public opinion on the matter. Henrik
Ibsen popularized this form in plays such as
Hedda Gabler.
T ra ge dy: A serious play that ends unhappily
for the protagonist. Sophocles Antigone is one
of the best-known Greek tragedies.
T ra gic om e dy: A play such as

Shakespeares A Winters Tale that mixes
elements of tragedy and comedy.
One -a c t pla y: A play consisting of a single
act, without intermission and running usually
less than an hour. Edward Albees Zoo Story is
a well-known example.
T hrille r
The genre Action Thriller is, on its surface, a
mixture of action and thriller content. To
understand what this genres name actually
means, however, we must analyze its
components.
It features a down-to-earth plot, and it
frequently plays into peoples fears (e.g. the film
Alien is a thriller.). However, thriller has a
greater tendency toward digression than action.
H ist ory
It is the study of the past, with special attention
to the written record of the activities of human
beings over time. Scholars who write about
history are called historians. It is a field of
research which uses a narrative to examine and
analyze the sequence of events, and it often
attempts to investigate objectively the patterns
of cause and effect that determine events.
Ot he r na rra t ive form s
Electronic literature is a literary genre
consisting of works which originate in digital
environments.
Films, videos and broadcast soap operas
have carved out a niche which often parallels
the functionality of prose fiction.
Graphic novels and comic books present
stories told in a combination of sequential
artwork, dialogue and text.
PAGE 119
4 ++
Invite the students to have a quick look at
the texts and guess what kind of text they
are. Write students ideas on the board but
do not correct at this stage.
(L.A.: to identify of text).
111
5 +++
8 ++
Tell the students to write a list of cognates

they expect to find in a text related to books.
Brainstorm students ideas, write a tentative
list on the board, but do not correct yet.
6 +++
Invite the students to read the words in the
KEY WORD SPOT and find them in the
text. Then, tell them to choose the correct
meaning according to the context in which
they are used.
Answers
a. i.; b. ii.; c. i.; d. ii.; e. i.
Reflection Spot

their ability to use their previous
knowledge to understand the topic of the
lesson.
their ability to relate their own experience
to the topic.
READING
7 +
Tell the students to read the texts quickly to
To check students' predictions in Exercise 5
refer to the words written on the board.
Answers
4. a.
5.: author, characters, role, family, magic, discovers,
person, idea, Labrador, story, based, specially,
adapted, original, connect, really, interesting,
adventures, magnificent, events, protagonist,
illustrations.
112
UNIT 4
Now, the students read the texts again to find

the answer to questions a. f. Encourage
them to write the questions and the answers
in their notebooks and check orally.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Answers
Charmains father is a baker.
Charmain discovers that she is not a very nice person.
Marley is a Labrador (dog).
Marleys masters is called John Grogan.
Johnny Trott works at a hotel in London.
Kaspars owner is Countess Kandinsky.
PAGE 121
9 +++
their notebooks. Then, ask them to read the
texts carefully again and write the name of
the book that corresponds.
Answers
a. Kaspar, Prince of Cats; b. Marley: A Dog Like No
Other; c. Kaspar; d. Kaspar; e. House of Many Ways.
10 +++
If necessary, the students read the texts
again to find the name of the review section
for each definition. Before doing this activity,
you may recall students knowledge of
literature to make sure they understand the
concepts.
Answers
a. character; b. highlights; c. protagonist; d. author;
e. plot.
SONGS
SONGS -- MUSI
MUSIC
C AND
AND WORDS
WORDS
PAGE 122
11 ++
Invite your students to copy and complete
the fact file into their notebooks with
information from the reviews. Copy the chart
on the board and ask some students to
complete it, to allow the rest to check.
Answers
Name of Book
House of
Many Ways
Marley: A Dog
Like No Other
Kaspar,
Prince of Cats
Author
Diana Wynne
Jones
John Grogan
Michael
Morpurgo
Characters
Chairman
Marley, John,
Jenny
Johnny Trott,
Countess
Kandinsky,
LizzieBeth
AFTER READING
12 +++
In groups, the students compare their lists
from Exercise 3 and exchange information
about their preferences in literature. Choose
some students to report their answers to
their classmates. You can also organize a
short survey to discover your students
favorite book, genre and author (to relate
content of the text on their own reality).
13 +++
The first part of this activity can be assigned
as homework. Ask the students to think of a
book they have recently read and write a
review for it like those in the reading texts.
Next class, organize a group game. Tell the
student to read the reviews in their groups
without saying the name of the books, and
see if their classmates can guess the
names.
(L.A.: to write a short review).
LANGUAGE SPOT
Passive Voice Present Tense
text.
2. Tell the students to answer questions a. c.
Answ ers:
a. a. a story; b. a dog; c. a name.
b. at the beginning of the sentences.
c. that the subject does not perform the action.
It receives the effect of it.
3. In their notebooks, the students copy and
complete the general rule.
Answ ers:
We use the Passive Voice when we want to
draw the attention to the person/thing that
received the effect of the action, more than to
the person who executed the action.
The Present Simple Passive is formed with the
present tense of the verb to be
+ the participle of a main verb.
ERROR ALERT
The Passive Voice is generally used when the subject of the
sentence is indefinite, general, or unimportant. In the
sentence: They mine coal in Pennsylvania, the subject
is so indefinite that it is not clear what is meant by they. It
might mean the miners, the people, or the companies.
These sentences are improved by putting the verb in the
Passive Voice (Coal is mined in Pennsylvania).
The Passive Voice is also used when what is done is
more important than the doer of the action. The Passive
Voice is generally used when you want to emphasize the
receiver rather than the doer.
the Introduction.
113
Additional exercise
Write these sentences in the Passive Voice. Add
by where necessary.
a. Children open the door all the time.
b. We set the table every night.
c. People pay a lot of money in taxes.
d. People wear white shoes in summer.
e. They dont help you.
f. They open the book at the beginning of the class.
g. You do not write the letter.
h. They build houses for poor people.
i. Does the police officer catch thieves?
14 ++
SPOT. Tell them to order the words to form
sentences in the Passive Voice.
Additionally, you may ask your students to
write three more examples of the structure
in their notebooks and then invite some
students to read them aloud.
Answers
a. This title is designed to advertise the new website.
b. Those books are printed on recycled paper.
c. Our website is visited by thousands of people.
15 ++
28
Answers
a. v.; b. i.; c. iii.; d. ii.; e. iv.
PAGE 123
28
Play the recording again. Tell the students

to listen and imitate the way the sayings are
delivered. Then, ask the students to work in
pairs taking turns to say the beginnings and
the endings of each saying. Invite some
114
28
a. A kind word is never wasted.

b. Everyday is a gift, that's why it is called the present.
c. God's laughter is heard when birds sing.
d. Opportunity is always dressed in "work clothes".
e. People are known by the company they keep.
17 +++ FL
Tell fast learners analyze the sayings in
Exercise 15 and answer the questions.
Additionally, you can ask the students to
find similar expressions in Spanish, and
write both of them on the board and in their
notebooks.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Answers
They are all expressed in the Passive Voice.
Will vary.
Will vary.
Dime con quin andas y te dir quin eres.
Motivate the students to match the first part

of the sentences (a. - e.) with the second part
(i. - v.) to form famous sayings. Then, play
the recording and ask the students to check
their answers. If necessary, invite some
students to write the sayings on the board to
be sure they all check their answers.
16 +++
pairs to say the quotations aloud, to provide

a model to their classmates.
(L.A.: to imitate a model of intonation and
pronunciation).
UNIT 4
LETS CHECK
The students complete the sentences with the
Simple Present Passive of the verbs in
brackets.
Answers
a. are written; b. are drawn; c. is used;
d. are sold; e. are bought
SONGS
SONGS -- MUSI
MUSIC
C AND
AND WORDS
WORDS
REAL LIFE SPOT

PAGE 124
LESSON 4
LISTENING
WOULD YOU KNOW MY NAME?
BEFORE LISTENING
1
++
Motivate the students to work in pairs, solve

the crossword and find out how much they
know about music. When they have finished,
elicit their ideas about the relationship
between the name of the lesson and the topic.
Answers
Across: 2. (rhythm), 3. (music), 6. (solo)
Down: 1. (lyrics), 3. (musician), 4. (chorus), 5. (song)
2 +
chart in their notebooks with the names of
bands and singers they know according to
the kind of music they interpret. Then, invite
them to compare their work with other groups.
Answers
Will vary.
PAGE 125
3 +++
Draw students attention to the man in the
photo. Ask them to answer the questions in
pairs.
(L.A.: to infer information from visuals).
Eric Patrick Clapton (born 30 March 1945) is an
English blues-rock guitarist, singer, songwriter
and composer. He is probably most famous for
his mastery of the Stratocaster guitar. Clapton
has entered the Rock and Roll Hall of Fame as a
member of The Yardbirds, of Cream, and as a
solo performer. Often viewed by critics and fans
alike as one of the greatest guitarists of all time,
Clapton was ranked fourth in Rolling Stone
magazines list of the 100 Greatest Guitarists of
All Time and #53 on their list of the Immortals:
100 Greatest Artists of All Time.
Although Clapton has varied his musical style
throughout his career, it has always remained
grounded in the Blues. Yet, in spite of this focus,
he is credited as an innovator in a wide variety of
genres. These include blues-rock (with John
Mayall & the Bluesbreakers and The Yardbirds)
and psychedelic rock (with Cream). Additionally,
Claptons chart success was not limited to the
Blues, with chart-toppers in Delta blues (Me and
Mr. Johnson), pop (Change the World) and
reggae (Bob Marleys I Shot the Sheriff). One of
his most successful recordings was the hit love
song Layla, which he played with the band
Derek and the Dominos.
4 ++
to listen to a recording related to this singer.
Motivate them to predict what kind of text it
is. Do not correct at this stage.
(L.A.: to make predictions from the context).
5 ++
Before listening, ask the students to look up
the words in the Key Word Spot in a
dictionary.
Answers
beg: to ask for something, especially in an anxious way.
belong: to be in the right or suitable place.
bend: to move an arm or a leg, so that it is no longer
straight.
heaven: the place believed to be the home of God where
good people go when they die.
knee: the joint between the top and bottom parts of
the leg.
115
TRANSCRIPT - WOULD YOU KNOW MY 29

NAME? (ERIC CLAPTON, SUNG BY RODRIGO GONZLEZ)
LISTENING
6 +
29

and check their prediction in Exercise 4.
Answers
a.
7 ++
29
Ask the students to listen again and choose

the best answer for each question. Explain
to them that more than paying attention to
specific words or sounds, they should
concentrate on the general atmosphere of
the song, so that they can identify its mood
and objective.
(L.A.: to infer mood of speaker).
Answers
Would you know my name if I saw you in heaven?

Would it be the same if I saw you in heaven?
I must be strong and carry on
Cause I know I dont belong here in heaven.
Would you hold my hand if I saw you in heaven?
Would you help me stand if I saw you in heaven?
Ill find my way through night and day
Cause I know I just cant stay here in heaven.
Time can bring you down, time can bend your knees;
Time can break your heart, have you begging, please,
Begging, please.
Beyond the door theres peace, for sure,
And I know therell be no more tears in heaven.
Would you know my name if I saw you in heaven?
Would it be the same if I saw you in heaven?
I must be strong and carry on
Cause I know I dont belong here in heaven.
a. iii; b. ii.
8 ++
AFTER LISTENING
29
Read the words in the boxes aloud with the

students. Tell them that for this activity they
have to listen carefully to identify which of
the words are mentioned. Play the recording
once or twice.
Answers
day, hand, heart, know, name, stay, strong, time,
tears, way
PAGE 126
9 +++
29

their notebooks. Then, play the recording
again and ask them to complete them.
(L.A. to extract specific information).
Answers
a. know, heaven; b. help, heaven; c. find, d. time, heart;
e. know, tears.
116
UNIT 4
10 +++
The students form groups of four, answer
questions a. c. and talk about the song they
have listened to. Invite them to share their
answers with the rest of their classmates.
Answers
a. The situation that the song describes is a father asking
a question to his son who is dead and in heaven.
b. It is an imaginary situation: the father and the son
together in heaven.
c. A father is singing to his son.
Tears in Heaven is a ballad written by Eric
Clapton and Will Jennings about the pain Clapton
felt following the 1991 death of his four-year-old
son, Conor, who fell from a 53rd-story window in his
mothers friends New York City condominium. By
all accounts, the death was simply a tragic accident,
and Clapton was distraught for months afterwards.
This song is one of Claptons most successful,
reaching #2 on the Billboard Hot 100 singles chart
in the U.S. The song also spent three weeks at #1
on the American adult contemporary chart in 1992.
Clapton wrote the song with Will Jennings, who
SONGS
SONGS -- MUSI
MUSIC
C AND
AND WORDS
WORDS
was reluctant at first to help him with such a

personal song.
Clapton stopped playing it in 2004, as well as the
song My Fathers Eyes.
I didnt feel the loss anymore, which is so much a
part of performing those songs. I really have to
connect with the feelings that were there when I
wrote them. Theyre kind of gone and I really dont
want them to come back, particularly. My life is
different now. They probably just need a rest and
maybe Ill introduce them for a much more
detached point of view.
For more information on Background information,
LANGUAGE SPOT
Hypothetical situations
1. The students read the sentences from the
song and other examples.
2. Help them find the answers to questions a. and b.
Answ ers:
a. two ; b. iii.
3. Ask the students to copy and complete the
When we talk about situations that are only
hypothetical, and their results, we use a verb
tense called the Second Conditional.
It consists of If + Simple Past tense in the
condition+ w ould + base form of a verb in the
result.
We use if to introduce the condition and
w ould with the result.
4. The students go back to Unit 2, Lesson 3,
page 57, and compare the First and the
Second Conditional.
Answ ers:
a. They both contain two clauses in a sentence;
In both, If is used to introduce the condition.
b. The First Conditional refers to possible
future situations. The Second Conditional
refers to hypothetical situations, which are not
very likely to happen. Both structures use
different tenses in their clauses.
PAGE 127
11 ++
Ask the students to read each situation
carefully, and then use the Second
Conditional to express them as in the given
example. Help them to recognize which is
the condition and which is the result in each
situation, so that they can apply the
structure correctly. Explain to them that the
order of the clauses is not important.
Answers
a. Tom would go to the concert if he had money for
the ticket.
b. If I understood Math, I would help my sister.
c. If we spoke Chinese, we would talk to the new student.
d. If I was / were 18, I would drive my fathers car.
e. If she didnt live abroad, my grandmother would
visit us.
ERROR ALERT
The Second Conditional (also called Conditional
type 2) is a structure used for talking about unreal
situations in the present or in the future.
The Second Conditional is used to talk about things
which are unreal (not true or not possible) in the present
or the future things which dont or wont happen:
Additional exercise
Match the beginnings and endings of the sentences.
Identify which of them are hypothetical situations and why.
a. If I was less busy
i. Ill give him your phone
number.
b. If I stay late at work ii. Id meet you for lunch.
c. I will get bored
iii. Ill take a taxi.
d. Well be home by six iv. Ill finish the project.
e. If I see Jack
v. I could buy a nice jacket.
f. If I were you
vi. if the trains on time.
g. If I saved $5,000
vii. if I go to that party.
a month
h. If its raining in the
viii. Id get a new job.
morning
Answers:
a. ii.; b. iv.; c. vii.; d. vi.; e. i.; f. viii.;
g. v.; h. iii.
the Introduction.
117
12 ++
PAGE 128
30
Motivate the students to copy and complete

the dialogue in their notebooks. Read all the
questions aloud and guide them to discover
what kind of situations they are (they are all
hypothetical). Then, play the recording and
tell the students to compare their answers.
(L.A.: to use a language structure in a
communicative situation).
Answers
Will vary.
30
Andy:
Beth:
Andy:
Beth:
Andy:
Beth:
Andy:
If you could choose a place, where would you be now?

I would be on a tropical island.
If you could go to that island, how would you get there?
I would travel by plane.
If you could go with someone, who would you invite?
I would invite my best friend to go with me.
If you could take only one thing with you, what would
you take?
Beth: I would take my favorite book.
Andy: If you could decide, how long would you stay there?
Beth: I would stay at least a month!
30
Play the recording again. The students listen

and practice the dialogue answering with
their own ideas. Encourage them to role-play
the conversation in front of the class. You
can assign a prize or an extra mark to the
best presentations.
14 +++
Motivate the students to use the structure
they have learnt in an everyday situation.
Tell them to copy the chart on page 127 into
their notebooks. Then, ask them to interview
three students using the questions in
Exercise 12 and complete the chart with the
information they collect.
Answers
Will vary.
118
With the information from the chart, tell keener

students to write a paragraph about one of the
interviews they did. Explain to them that they
can follow the pattern provided. You can
assign this activity in class or assign it for
homework for the whole class.
(L.A.: to write a short report).
Answers
See transcript.
13 +++
15 +++ FL
UNIT 4
16 ++
Invite the students to share their reports in
their groups
(L.A.: to give an oral report).
GAME SPOT
and they also encourage and increase
cooperation.
Ask the students to form groups of four or five and
then ask and answer questions about the
imaginary situations in the pictures. Invite a group
to play in front of the class to provide a model for
their classmates.
SONGS
SONGS -- MUSI
MUSIC
C AND
AND WORDS
WORDS
Reflection Spot

their ability to apply a new structure to an
everyday situation.
their ability to play games with their
classmates.
@@ CLICK ON
If possible, encourage your students to visit the
web site suggested at the bottom of page 129
and play the game about the lives and
relationships of four teenagers.
PAGE 130
LETS CHECK
The students read the sentences and choose
the correct alternative. Remind them to pay
special attention to the verb tenses, so that
they can recognize the hypothetical situations.
Answers
a. will; b. were; c. isnt: d. will; e. were; f. will; g. knew;
h. refuses; i. wouldnt; j. can.
PAGE 129
REAL LIFE SPOT


them an extra mark.
In pairs, the students agree on a very

famous singer / composer they would like to
chat with and write a set of questions. Then,
they collect information from magazines and
newspapers to find the answers to their
questions. As a final stage, they practice
and act out the interview in front of their
classmates.
Answers
Will vary.
2 Tell the students that they must imagine

they are participating at the New Stars TV
show. From there, they have to write an email to a friend or to their parents describing
their experiences at the academy. Explain
to them that they must include information
about duties, activities, the coaches and any
other interesting points they may want to
write about.
Answers
Will vary.
119
PAGE 131
PAGE 132
3 The students must copy and complete the

chart about famous books in their notebooks.
Name
Harry Potter and
the Goblet of Fire
Author
J.K. Rowling
Sandokan, the
Tiger of Malaysia
Romeo and Juliet
Emilio Salgari
William
Shakespeare
J. Verne
20,000 Leagues
under the Sea
The Lord of
J.R.R. Tolkien
the Rings
Papelucho
Marcela Paz
Little Women Louise May Alcott
Narnia Chronicles
The Iliad
Sinbad the sailor
The Call of the Wild
C.S. Lewis
Homero
unknown
Jack London
Oliver Twist
The Hound of
the Baskervilles
Charles Dickens
A.C. Doyle
Adventures of
Huckleberry Finn
Mark Twain
Characters
Harry Potter,
Hermione, Prof.
Dumbledore
Sandokan
Romeo and Juliet
Captain Nemo
Lebolas,
Papelucho
Jo, Beth,
May, Laurie
Lion, wizard
Achilles, Hector
Sinbad
Buck, John
Thornton
Oliver
Charles
Baskerville,
Dr. Mortimer
Huck Finn, Tom
4 The students make a word map for music in

their notebooks. Encourage them to use not
only words from this unit but to add as
many words as they know about the topic.
You can also ask the students to draw their
word maps on a piece of cardboard, add
some illustrations and display them in a
visible place in the classroom.
Possible Answers
Professions: musician, violinist, pianist, guitarist,
composer, singer, orchestra director.
Instruments: piano, violin, guitar, flute, triangle, saxophone,
oboe, tuba, drums, trumpet, cello trombone, bass.
Styles: pop, classic, opera, rock and roll, heavy metal,
blues, jazz, mariachi, folk, grunge, twist, disco, electronic,
rap, reggaeton, reggae, salsa, cumbia, mambo, tango.
Famous songs: will vary.
People: will vary.
120
UNIT 4
UNIT CHECK

and weaknesses.
PAGE 133
Answers
READING - SPOT LIGHT ON BEVERLEY
KNIGHT
a. She is a singer and a composer.

b. She started singing when she was a teenager.
c. She takes her inspiration from events that happen
to her.
d. No, she doesnt.
e. She thinks Alicia Keys is a great artist.
2 a. British; b. two very important awards;

c. once a day.
3 a. the church; b. best artist, best album; c. birthday

party for a local radio station; d. Nirvana, Coldplay; e.
drama club, dance classes.
LISTENING - CHANGE
31
4 a. die; b. change; c. fall; d. get; e. losses

5 d.; c.; b.; a.; e.
6 a. face / heart, b. love
SONGS
S ONGS -- MUSI
MUSIC
C AND
AND WORDS
WORDS
TRANSCRIPT - CHANGE (TRACY CHAPMAN

SUNG BY MINERVA CARRIZO)
31
If you knew that you would die today,

Saw the face of God and love,
Would you change? Would you change?
If you knew that love can break your heart
When youre down so low you cannot fall
How bad, how good does it need to get?
How many losses? How much regret?
What chain reaction would cause an effect?
Makes you turn around,
Makes you try to explain,
Makes you forgive and forget,
Makes you change? Makes you change?
If you knew that you would be alone,
Knowing right, being wrong,
PAGE 134
LANGUAGE
7 a. ii.; b. i.; c. v.; d. iii.; e. iv.

8 a. The Eiffel Tower is situated in France.
b. The Harry Potter series is written by J.K. Rowling.
c. 32 pieces are used in a game of chess.
d. Cold milk is served with tea in England.
SPEAKING
9 In pairs, the students role-play and interview

between a fan and a famous artist. Make
sure they use direct and indirect questions
as well as the First and Second Conditional.
criteria:
correct pronunciation, and a minimum of
hesitations and grammar mistakes.
3 - 4 points: student can exchange

grammar mistakes.
1 - 2 points: student can't exchange
interferes with comprehension, hesitates a
lot and makes a lot of grammar mistakes.
WRITING
10 The students choose a book they have

recently read and write a review of it.
Explain to them they must include
information about the author, the main
characters, the plot and any other important
information they consider of interast.
criteria:
review, including the required information,
using correct textual references and without
review, including most of the required
information, using a few textual references
mistakes.
review, including some of the required
information, but he / she makes no use of
textual references and makes some
review, does not include the required
information, and he / she makes a lot of
spelling and grammar mistakes.
PAGE 135
FINAL REFLECTION
The purpose of this section is to allow students to

reflect on their strengths and weaknesses. Make
sure all the students understand what they are
expected to do and give enough time to answer
the questions. Encourage students to give
honest answers and show interest in their results.
121
EXTRA TEST UNIT 4
READING - A BOOK REVIEW
THE FAMOUS FIVES SURVIVAL GUIDE

Author
Its written by the Famous Five - who were
created by famous author Enid Blyton, back in the
1940s!
Publication date
Out now
Characters
The Famous Five are back! This time we catch up
with a mystery back in 1959, with a lost treasure
- the Royal Dragon of Siam.
Theres Julian, whos very sensible, Dick, who likes
gadgets and huge bits of chocolate cake, Anne,
who prefers preparing picnics to getting dirty and
George, short for Georgina, whos always getting
into scrapes.
And of course, dont forget Timmy the dog, whos got
a brilliant knack for helping the kids find vital clues.
Plot
Time for another adventure with lots of ginger
beer and plenty of fantastic scrapes!
A mysterious reporter turns up at Uncle Quentins
house asking about a shipwreck that happened years
ago - and in which a precious jewel had been lost.
Of course, this sparks a huge adventure for the
Famous Five - with secret rooms, spooky towers,
a train drama and dangerous camping.
Great guides
This book is written through diary extracts from the
four kids, plus their drawings, photos and graphics
of clues that they find on their exciting adventure.
And as well as the story, the book includes useful
advice on topics such as code breaking, using a
compass, building an escape raft, first aid,
camping, and much more.
Read the text and complete the fact file.
And its left for you to actually solve the mystery

yourself by following the clues included in the book.
Highlights
Using the decoder to reveal the real message in a
long-lost letter is really cool, plus Georges escape
from capture is VERY dramatic.
And, as the book is written in the style of the
Famous Five, its quite funny!
Any weak bits?
Sometimes you cant decide whether to skip to
the next bit of the story to find out what is
happening or read the guides - but this is a good
thing really!
This is a great book for boys and girls. If you read
the story, the adventure advice will be something
you can dip into again and again.
5 pt.
Name
Author
Date of publication
Time setting
Characters
2 Read the text again. Are these statements true or false?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
The plot is about finding a treasure.

George is a boy who is always getting into trouble.
The Famous Five are five kids.
The story gives the reader clues to solve the mystery.
The book includes two different kinds of texts.
3 Read the text once more. Answer these questions.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
122
5 pts.
Whats the name of the lost treasure?

How was the treasure lost?
Why is the dog important?
What is the most dramatic moment of the story?
Who is the story written for?
UNIT 4
5 pts.
SONGS
S ONGS -- MUSI
MUSIC
C AND
AND WORDS
WORDS
LISTENING - DISCUSSING THE RULES
4
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Listen to the recording. Choose the correct alternative for each sentence.
I wouldnt / couldnt get to the meeting.
Well stay here for three months / weeks.
Each week we will perform one of our own songs on a radio / TV show.
If you get the highest / lowest number of votes
Performing my own songs will be a great feeling / filling.
5 pts.
Listen to the recording again. Number the questions in the order you hear them.
a. Are there any rules?
d. What else would you like to know?
b. Can I ask you a few questions?
e. What happens if we can't sing like stars?
c. Can you explain that, please?
f. What would you like to know?
6 pts.
Listen to the recording once more. Complete each sentence with one word.
a. Im _______________ here.
c. Our _______________ are great!
b. We must obey all the rules and
d. Everyone here can ____________.
attend all the ____________.
4 pts.
LANGUAGE
7 Transform these direct questions into indirect questions. Use different openings.
a. Where do you live?
b. Where can I find a pharmacy?
c. What time does the bus arrive?

d. Who is your favorite artist?
8 Write these sentences in the Passive Voice.

a.
b.
c.
d.
4 pts.
Meteorologists make the weather forecast every day.

Many people use Facebook as a tool of communication.
People buy a lot of things through the Internet nowadays.
We print our books on recycled paper.
9 Complete these sentences using the Second Conditional.

a.
b.
c.
d.
4 pts.
8 pts.
People __________ (buy) our books if they ____________ (be)cheaper.

If the computer ___________ (crash) again, we ___________ (call) an engineer.
If I ___________ (not like) my teacher, I __________ (leave) this course.
If paper _____________ (be) cheaper, we __________ (print) more catalogues.
SPEAKING
10 With your partner, take turns to exchange information about what you would do in two
10 pts.
imaginary situations. You can choose from these suggestions or use four own ideas.
see a ghost meet your favorite music star travel to space
WRITING
11 Imagine you are a famous music / TV star and you are chatting with a fan. Write the
answers to these questions.
a. When and where did you start singing / acting?
b. How difficult is it to write a song / act in a play, movie, etc.?
c. Who are your idols?
d. What is your dream project?
0 - 20
21 - 37
Keep trying!
Good!
10 pts.
66 pts.
TOTAL
38 - 54
Very good!
55 - 66
Excellent!
123
READING - A BOOK REVIEW
1
Name
The Famous Fives

Survival Guide
Author
Enid Blyton
Date of publication Out now
Time setting
1959
Characters
Julian, Dick, Ann,
Georgina, Timmy
2 a. True; b. False; c. False; d. True; e. True

3 a. The Royal Dragon of Siam; b. In a
shipwreck; c. Because it helps the kids to
find vital clues; d. Georges escape from
capture; e. Its written for boys and girls.
LISTENING - DISCUSSING THE RULES 32
4 a. couldnt; b. months; c. TV;

d. lowest; e. feeling.
5 b.; f; c.; a.; e.; d.

6 a. new; b. classes; c. coaches; d. sing.
124
UNIT 4
TRANSCRIPT - DISUSSING THE RULES
32
A: Hi! Can I ask you a few questions? Im new here, and I couldnt
get to the meeting with the Director on time, you see.
B: What would you like to know?
A: Id like to know how long were going to stay here.
B: Well stay here for three months, more or less, if you dont
have to leave earlier.
A: Can you explain that, please?
B: Well, you know we are here to learn to sing and compose
and each week we will perform one of our own songs on a
TV show. The audience will vote for them by phone. If you
get the lowest number of votes you will leave the program.
A: Are there any rules?
B: We must obey all the rules and attend all the classes.
A: I wonder how they will make music stars of us.
B: Let me tell you, our coaches are great! They will help us to
develop our talents, but we need to work hard. They promised
we will work together. We have to do that to stay till the end.
A: What happens if we cant sing like stars?
B: I think everyone here can sing, and their job is just to help
us find our special voice.
A: For me, the most difficult thing is to get the music to fit the
lyrics.
B: Eddie, our songwriting coach, said that we dont need to be
poets. The important thing is to fit the words to the music,
and that most of the participants can do that. What else
would you like to know?
A: Oh, thats all, thanks! Im sure that even if I stay here for only
a week, performing my own songs will be a great feeling.
SONGS
S ONGS -- MUSI
MUSIC
C AND
AND WORDS
WORDS
LANGUAGE
7 Possible answers:
a. Can you tell me where you live?
b.Can you tell me where I can find a
pharmacy?
c. Do you know what time the bus arrives?
d.Would you mind telling me who your
favorite artist is?
8 a. Weather forecasts are made by

meteorologists every day.
b. Facebook is used as a tool of
communication.
c. Nowadays, a lot of things are bought
through the Internet.
d. Our books are printed on recycled paper.
9 a. would buy, were; b. crashed, would call;

c. didnt like, would leave; d. were, would
print.
SPEAKING
WRITING
11 The students imagine they are famous

artists chatting with fans on their website,
answering their questions. Encourage them
to provide complete answers to the fans'
questions.
criteria.
9 - 10 points: student can write coherent
answers, including the required information,
answers, including most of the required
mistakes.
answers, including some of the required
1 - 2 points: student can't write coherent
answers, does not include the required
about two imaginary situations. Make sure

they take turns to ask and answer questions
and that they use the Second Conditional
correctly.
criteria:
questions about the situation, with correct
pronunciation, no hesitations and without
grammar mistakes.
5 - 7: student can ask and answer questions
about the situation, with correct
some questions about the situation with
acceptable pronunciation but hesitates and
makes grammar mistakes.
1 - 2 points: student can't ask and answer
questions about the situation, pronunciation
125
UNIT
HOW ABOUT
WORKING?
read a leaflet
read a letter of application
listen to an advertisement
listen to telephone conversations
Reading
locate missing information in a text
information
distinguish facts and inferences
Listening
information
extract specific information from a recording
Language
use Modal Verbs to express necessity
use Modal Verbs to express preferences
use polite phrases in a telephone conversation
Speaking
ask people about preferences
participate in a telephone conversation
Writing
write a letter of application
write a leaflet promoting an organization
You will also:
assess and appreciate the role of volunteer
organizations around the world
value the importance of voluntary work for
people in need
Development
+ home assignments
Types of evaluation
Didactic resources
teenage cultures.
considering that thorough prior preparation
allows them to think of and apply some useful
ideas. It is their chance to make the class
entertaining and to involve students in the
learning process.
Indicators
Continuous / informal Students do reading and listening activities, take part in conversations, and produce written texts.
Reflection spot
Self - evaluation
Unit Check
Unit evaluation
Reading: Students identify general information and discriminate between correct and incorrect information.
Listening: Students identify specific information, relate speakers to their speeches and discriminate between correct and incorrect information.
Language: Students use modal verbs to give advice and recommendations.
Speaking: Students imitate a telephone conversation to apply for a job.
Writing: Students write a letter applying for a volunteer organization.
Final Reflection
Extra Test
126
UNIT 5
Reading: Students identify specific information and discriminate between correct and incorrect information and between facts and inferences.
Listening: students identify the correct sequence of information and discriminate between correct and incorrect information.
Language: Students use Modal verbs to refer to future situations and to express necessity, obligation and impossibility.
Writing: Students write a leaflet promoting a volunteer organization.
Speaking: Students role-play a telephone conversation.
HOW
HOW ABOUT
ABOUT WORKI
WORKING?
NG?
PAGE 136
GETTING READY
1
Invite the students to look at the pictures and

then answer the questions. Encourage them
to speculate what information they can
extract from the visuals.
Answers
a. Young people working.

b. They are all young.
c. They are working as volunteers for international
organizations.
2 Ask the students to choose the phrases in

the box that they think can be related to
voluntary work. Organize a general
conversation about the fields to which each
phrase can be applied. Elicit examples and
write some on the board.
Answers
another perspective; a helping hand; community
support; great opportunity; rewarding experience;
understanding local cultures; working teams.
3 In pairs, the students complete the chart

with information on volunteer organizations
in Chile. Invite some of students to complete
the chart on the board.
Answers
Will vary.
U nit e d Pla ne t
It builds houses for Chiles poorest families;
teaches English to students; provides daycare
for homeless children and becomes role model;
supports the sick in a local hospital.
All La ngua ge s Abroa d
It offers the chance to volunteer in selected
locations around the world helping the local
community. These volunteer programs are not
just fun and interesting but very rewarding and
meaningful for the local people.
M ondo Cha lle nge
V olunt e e r T e a c hing
It works mainly in three rural schools, welcoming
pupils aged from 4 to 14 in the villages of Monte
Grande, Paihuano and Pisco Elqui. Volunteers
help raise the level of English in the comuna, as
well as teaching sports to the children.
V olunt a rios de la Espe ra nza (V E)
Volunteer work in Chile to pursue the mission
of combating poverty and child abuse.
Volunteers in Santiago work daily in
orphanages, community centers and schools,
organizing larger scale projects in education,
sports, and fundraising throughout Santiago.
Former volunteers continue their service through
a global network currently functioning in North
America, South America, and Europe.
WorldT e a c h
It offers opportunities for volunteers to make a
meaningful contribution to education by living
and teaching in developing countries.
Cult ura l Em bra c e
It provides an outstanding opportunity to
volunteer in Latin America by choosing to join
one of its volunteer projects. It offers projects in
Argentina, Brazil, Chile, Costa Rica, Ecuador,
Guatemala, Mexico, and Peru. Projects include
working at orphanages, wildlife conservation,
construction work, and many more.
Globa l V ision I nt e rna t iona l
After a comprehensive training period,
activities include exploration and trekking on the
Ice Caps of the Argentinean Andes, lake
traversing by kayak, surveying the Andean
Condor, recording mammal species and
assisting local rangers and scientists in the field.
127
PAGE 138
LESSON 1
READING
BREAKING FRONTIERS
BEFORE READING
1
+
The students answer the questions in
groups. Encourage them to start a
conversation about the pros / cons of
working during vacations. Listen attentively
to their answers and ask them to reach a
general agreement.
Answers
Will vary.
2 ++
In pairs, the students make a list of
characteristics they think a teen job has.
Brainstorm ideas and get different students
to write them on the board.
Possible Answers
temporary; part time; not qualified;
not very well paid; flexible.
3 ++
Ask the students to have a look at the text
they are going to read and say what kind of
text it is. Do not check answers at this stage.
(L.A.: to predict kind of text from visuals).
4 +++
In their notebooks, the students write a list
of cognates they expect to find in a text
about jobs. Make sure the students do not
read the text yet.
(L.A.: to predict content from cognates).
5 ++
Once they have written the list of cognates,
invite the students to read the words in the
synonyms. Allow the use of dictionaries if
necessary. Additionally, you can ask the
students to give you examples in which
these words are used in a text about jobs.
Answers
abroad - a.; support - b.; insurance - c.;
developing - d.; placement - e.
READING
6 +
Answers
3. a.
4. unique, international, organization, volunteers, organize,
programs, particular, emphasis, education, community,
opportunity, important, local, Latin America, included,
experience, cultures, different, gain, cost, family,
medical, constant, period, information, interests.
7 ++
Tell the students to read the text again.
Ask them to fill the blanks with a word
from the boxes.
Answers
a. support; b. opportunity; c. contribution;
d. locations; e. projects; f. communities; g. contribute;
h. host; i. airfare; j. pocket; k. application; l. volunteer
PAGE 140
8 +++
Ask the students to read the text carefully
again and decide if the statements are true
or false. Then ask your students to correct
the false statements in their notebooks.
128
UNIT 5
HOW
HOW ABOUT
ABOUT WORKI
WORKING?
NG?
Answers
a. False (It works with volunteers).; b. True;
c. False (It offers two kinds of programs: short term and
long term); d. True; e. False (They must be between 17
and 24); f. False (Volunteers need to speak English);
g. True; h. True; i. False (Volunteers must send letters and
forms); j. False (Volunteers must apply at least six months
in advance).
AFTER READING
LANGUAGE SPOT
Obligation and necessity
1. The students read the sentences from the text.
Draw their attention to the words in bold.
9 +++
In their groups, the students talk about the
text they have just read. Invite them to
answer the questions and then share their
reflections with another group. Invite some
groups to report their answers to their
classmates.
(L.A.: to relate topic and own reality).
Answers
Reflection Spot

should work on their own but you can help
their ability to relate the topic to their own
reality.
their ability to give and support their opinions.
2. With information they can infer from the

sentences, the students answer the questions.
Answ ers:
a. a.; b.; d.; e., b. c., c. must, have to, need to
We can express obligation and necessity
by using certain verbs.
We use need to to express necessity.
We can use must or have to to express
obligation.
4. Once they have completed the rule, the students
go back to the reading text and rewrite the
instructions in the How to apply section using the
verbs they have studied in the LANGUAGE
SPOT.
Answ ers:
You must fill out an application form.
You have to write an accompanying letter.
You need to give information about your
skills, abilities, and interests.
You need to say why you think you would be
a successful volunteer.
You have to apply at least six months in
advance of the date you want to volunteer.
You must mail your letter and completed form to...
129
PAGE 141
10 ++
Tell the students they must choose one of
the verbs in the LANGUAGE SPOT to
complete the sentences in their notebooks.
Then, they must identify what each
sentence expresses.
Answers
a. need to (necessity); b. must (obligation; its a law);
c. need to (necessity); d. need to (necessity);
e. must (obligation, its a law)
11 ++
Ask the students to match the sentences in
column A with the replies in column B, and
then write the complete exchanges in their
notebooks. Invite some students to write
them on the board.
Answers
a. vi.; b. v.; c. i.; d. ii.; e. iv.; f. iii.
12 +++
33

with the phrases in the box. Then, play the
recording to allow them to check their
answers.
(L.A.: to exchange information).
Answers
See transcript.

A:
B:
A:
B:
33
What are you planning to do this summer?

Im going to do some voluntary work.
How interesting! Id like to do the same.
Then, you have to fill in an application form and write an
accompanying letter.
A: A letter? What must I say in it?
B: You must explain what kind of work you would like and
where you would like to go. You must also include
information about your skills, abilities and interests, and
the reasons why you want to be a volunteer.
130
UNIT 5
A:
B:
A:
B:
Do I need to speak English?

Yes, its absolutely necessary.
Oh! How exciting! I think Im going to work this summer.
Im sorry, you cant. You should apply at least three months
before the date you want to start.
PAGE 142
13 +++
33
Play the recording again. Ask the students

to listen and practice the dialogue with their
partners. Encourage them to role-play it in
situation).
14 ++
Explain to your students that the form on
page 142 is the Amigos de las Americas
application form. Ask them to copy it into
their notebooks and then fill it in with their
personal information. Check answers orally,
asking different students to read what they
wrote in each section.
(L.A: to complete an application form).
Answers
Will vary, according to students personal information.
15 +++
Once they have completed the application
form, tell the students to imagine they want
to join Amigos de las Americas during their
vacation. Tell them to write an
accompanying letter for the application form.
Remind them to include all the information
that is required in the instructive brochure.
(L.A.: to write a letter of application).
16 ++
Motivate the students to form collocations
related to the topic of the lesson matching
the verbs in box A with the phrases in box B.
(L.A.: to identify collocations related to the
topic).
HOW
HOW ABOUT
ABOUT WORKI
WORKING?
NG?
Answers
be young and single; complete an application form;
give constant support; make an important contribution;
organize international projects; pay for your food; speak
English; stay with a local family; work in teams; write a
letter.
PAGE 143
17
+++
Encourage the students to choose five
collocations from Exercise 16 and write five
sentences with them using the verbs in the
LANGUAGE SPOT.
vocabulary of the lesson).
REAL LIFE SPOT

This section is intended to allow students to
make connections between the topic of the
lesson and real life, and at the same time provide
additional information that may be useful for
them.
PAGE 144
LESSON 2
LISTENING
PEOPLE WHO CARE
Answers
Will vary.

LETS CHECK
Ask the students to choose must / (have to)
/ need to to complete the sentences.
Answers
a. need to; b. need to; c. have to; d. must; e. have to;
f. must; g. need to; h. must; i. must; j. have to
BEFORE LISTENING
1
+
The students work in groups and answer
the questions. Ask them to take notes and
then compare answers with other groups.
Invite some groups to report their answers
to the rest of the class.
(L.A.: to relate topic and own reality).
Answers
Will vary.
2 ++
chart in their notebooks.
knowledge).
Possible Answers
Positive aspects of
doing voluntary work
Socially rewarding
Can make a contribution
Can help people
Knowing other cultures
Negative aspects of
doing voluntary work
Dont receive salary
Sometimes they are
far from home
Not very good conditions
Living with another family
131
3 Copy the chart on the board and brainstorm
8 ++
students ideas to complete it.

Invite the students to share their lists in their
groups. Encourage them to exchange
opinions, supporting their choices.
(L.A.: to exchange opinions related to the
topic).

again and number the sentences (a. e.) in
the order they hear them.
(L.A.: to identify the sequence of
information).
Answers
e.; d.; a.; b.; c.
PAGE 145
4 +
5 ++
Ask the students to read the words in the
Spanish equivalent.
Answers
helping hand- b.; non-profit making - c.;
worth achieving - a.
LISTENING
34

and check their prediction in Exercise 4.
Answers
c.
7 ++
34
The students listen and check if the positive

and negative aspects in their lists from
Exercise 2 are mentioned in the recording.
Answers
Will vary, according to students predictions
132
UNIT 5
34
If necessary, play the recording again. The

students listen and decide if the statements
are true or false. Optionally, you can ask
your students to decide if the sentences are
true or false and then play the recording to
check their answers.

to listen to a recording about voluntary work.
Ask them to predict what kind of text they
are going to listen to. Do not check their
answers at this stage.
6 +
34
Answers
a. True; b. False; c. False; d. False; e. False; f. False;
g. True.
10
34
Ask students to try and correct the false

statements. Then play the recording again
for them to complete their corrections.
Answers
b. It has 2,500 volunteers; c. Volunteers receive nothing
in return; d. There are also options near some of the
worlds largest urban centers; e. VW welcomes
volunteers of all educational backgrounds; f. VW sends
out hundreds of volunteers every week.
PAGE 146
11 +++
34
Ask the students to identify the name of the

activities in the pictures. Then, play the
recording once more. Tell the students to
listen and identify which of the activities are
mentioned in the recording.
(L.A.: to relate text and visuals; to identify
specific information).
HOW
HOW ABOUT
ABOUT WORKI
WORKING?
NG?
Answers
Picture 1: Teach people (); Picture 2: Visit a web site
(X); Picture 3: Lend a helping hand () Picture 4:
Make a profit (X); Picture 5: Distribute medication ();
Picture 6: Build houses (X).
TRANSCRIPT - PEOPLE WHO CARE
34
VW is a non-profit-making organization dedicated to making

the world a better place for all. We rely on the dedication of
our 2500 volunteers that lend a helping hand wherever people
may need - it may be cleaning up after natural disasters,
distributing food and medication or teaching children and
adults to read and write.
So why shouldnt you be interested in joining us?
1. Work and not get paid! You must be joking! No, were
not. The truth is that you will work long, hard hours and
receive nothing in return. But perhaps you may find helping
people more rewarding than any salary.
2. Spend a year away from civilization. There are options
for those who feel adventurous enough but we also have
vacancies in other locations near some of the worlds
largest urban centers.
3. Its too much effort. Its true that its not the easiest thing
in the world to do. But most things in life that are worth
achieving require a little effort.
4. So you only want graduates. That is simply not true. We
welcome volunteers of all educational backgrounds and
provide training in specialist areas for anyone showing
interest. You may have the chance to acquire skills you
never dreamed of.
5. You cant tell me that one person is going to make a
difference. That might be true, but with the hundreds of
other volunteers we send out weekly, you can be sure it
makes a big difference.
Convinced it isnt for you? Well, give us a ring on 222-0987
and well try harder.
Vw, for people who care!
AFTER LISTENING
LANGUAGE SPOT
Expressing possibility
meant to promote independent learning, so help,
guide and check, but do not tell them the
answers.
recording. Tell them to pay special attention
to the words in bold.
2. Help them to identify what the sentences
express. Ask them to choose an alternative.
Answ e rs: b.
M a y and m ight are synonyms and are
commonly used to express proba ble
e ve nt s in the fut ure .
Note: We use may when something is likely
to happen and might when something is
rather less probable to happen.
4. Ask the students to work in pairs. Play the
recording once more and invite them to write
two sentences about things that are likely to
happen if they join VW.
Possible answers:
You may help people.
You may clean up after a natural disaster.
You may distribute food and medication.
You may teach children and adults to read
and write.
You may find helping people more rewarding
than any salary.
You may work near an urban center.
You may feel tired.
You may learn new things.
You may make a difference.
133
PAGE 147
14 +++
12 ++
Encourage the students to rewrite
sentences a. g. using may or might, as in
the example. Guide them to find the
difference in using may / might referring
them to the note in the LANGUAGE SPOT.
Answers
a. I might see you tomorrow.
b. Ann might forget to book the tickets.
c. It may snow today.
d. David may work till late today.
e. Mary may not be at home tomorrow.
f. They might go away for the weekend.
g. You might be right.
13 ++
Ask the students to listen and practice the

dialogues in Exercise 12 with a partner.
Then, invite them to choose two and roleplay them in front of their classmates.
15 +++
In their groups, the students reflect on the
recording they have heard and answer the
questions. Then, motivate them to
compare their answers with other groups.
PAGE 148
LETS CHECK
35
The students work in pairs and complete

the dialogues using may / might and the
words in the box. Then, they listen to the
recording and check their answers.
Answers
See transcript
35
A: Where are you going on vacation?

B: Im not sure. I may go to the south.
A: What are you doing on the weekend?
B: I dont know. I might go camping, but the weather forecast
is not good.
A: When will you see Ann again?
B: Im not sure. I might see her next week; its unlikely.
A: How are you getting home after the theater?
B: I dont know. I may call a taxi.
A: What are you doing with the money you won?
B: I havent decided yet. I might get a new car, but the one I
like is very expensive.
134
35
UNIT 5

assign themselves a mark according to the
scale.
Ask the students to complete these
sentences with a suitable verb from the
box. They must also use may /may not or
might/mightnt according to the probability
that the event will happen.
Answers
a. may shine., b. may bite., c. might meet.,
d. may buy., e. might erupt., f. may win.,
g. may be., h. might catch., i. may feel., j. might see.
HOW
HOW ABOUT
ABOUT WORKI
WORKING?
NG?
PAGE 149
17 +++
Ask the students to form groups of four.
Motivate them to prepare an advertisement
like the one in the recording, giving Five
Good Reasons why People Should
Consider Voluntary Work. Explain to them
that they can use the ideas from the
recording and also from their lists in
Exercise 2. Ask them to get ready to read
their advertisement to the class. You can
assign this activity as homework or as a
mini-project with an extra mark.
Reflection Spot

students reflect on their learning process and
to raise students awareness of how they
develop their own learning strategies to
become more effective learners. They should
work on their own but you can help and
guide the work when necessary.
their ability to give reasons and support
their opinions about voluntary work.
their ability to write a text advertising
voluntary work.
GAME SPOT
and they also encourage and increase
cooperation.
Explain to the students what they must do and
then read the instructions carefully. Make sure
they all understand before they start playing.
PAGE 150
LESSON 3
READING
18 +++
Encourage the students to write their
advertisement on a nice piece of paper,
add some art work and display it in the
classroom. Next class, organize a class
competition and ask the students to assess
their classmates works. Assign a reward
to the group that wins.
(L.A.: to make a graphic advertisement).
MAKING A DIFFERENCE
BEFORE READING
1
+
Ask the students to work in pairs and answer
the questions. Tell them to take notes in their
notebooks and then compare answers with
other pairs. Invite some pairs to share their
comments with the rest of the class.
Answers
Will vary.
135
2 ++
Tell the students to form groups of four. In
their groups, they make a list of the type of
information they would include in a letter of
application. Ask them to write the list in
their notebooks and then compare with
other groups.
3 ++
Explain to the students that they are going to
read two letters of applications for the Amigos
de las Americas programs. Ask them to read
sentences a. c. and guess if the information
is true or false. Do not check at this stage.
4 +++
Ask the students to choose the cognates
they think they will find in a letter of
application for a job. Make sure they dont
read the text to do this exercise.
5 ++
Tell the students to read the words in the
Key Word Spot and find them in the text.
Then, they must look up their meanings in
a dictionary, before starting to read the text.
Answers
airfare: the money you pay to travel by plane.
get along with: to have a friendly relationship with
somebody.
raise: to increase the amount or level of something.
settlement: a place where people have come to live
and make their homes.
strengthen: to become stronger.
PAGE 152
READING
6 +
The students read the letters quickly to
136
UNIT 5
Answers
3. a. No; b. No; c. No
4. contribution, cost, difference, exercise, information,
member, motivation, multicultural, native, opportunity,
organization, politics, program, project, term, volunteer.
7 ++
Invite the students to read the first letter
again. Ask them to match the labels
(a. j.) with the corresponding sections of
the letter (i. x.).
Answers
a. - ii.; b. - x.; c. - ix.; d. - iv.; e. - vi.; f. - vii.; g. - v.;
h. - viii; i. - iii.; j. - i.
8 +++
Tell the students to read the second letter
again. Ask them to identify items a. j.
from Exercise 7 that are included in the
letter.
Answers
All of them are mentioned.
9 ++
The students now read the two letters
again and use the information in them to
complete the chart in their notebooks. You
can copy the chart on the board and invite
some students to complete it.
Answers
Topic
Name
Age
Nationality
Address
Applicant 1
Sandra Duran
17
Chilean
Manuel Rodriguez 815,
Osorno, Chile
Occupation High school student
Languages Spanish, English
Places
Puerto Madryn,
to travel
Rio Negro, Argentina
Interests
Ocean animals,
scuba diving
Applicant 2
Thomas Carlyle
16
American
53 Mill Lane,
Cincinatti, Ohio, USA
High school student
English, Spanish
Latin America
History,
Pre-Spanish cultures
HOW
HOW ABOUT
ABOUT WORKI
WORKING?
NG?
10 +++
If necessary, the students read the two
letters once more and then decide if the
sentences either in case, are facts or
inferences. Optionally, you can ask the
students to decide first and then check
while reading. Make sure they all
understand clearly the difference between
a fact and an inference. (See Background
information). Once they have answered,
elicit their answers and ask them to explain
the reasons for their choices.
(L.A.: to distinguish facts and inferences).
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Answers
F: what I like most is to be in contact with nature.
I: the information can be derived from I enjoy
working as a volunteer at our local organization.
I: it derives from: Ive always wanted to visit
Patagonia.
I: it derives from: Im confident I will be able to raise
the money.
I: it derives from: first, Id rather work as a volunteer
for a time.
F: I would like to be a politician one day.
I: it derives from: The possibility to visit some Maya
or Inca ruins is very motivating.
F: Ive already raised the money.
Background Information
The term fact refers to something that actually
exists or can be verified.
Inference is the process of deriving a
conclusion not only based on facts but also
based on human perceptions, logic, statistical
methods etc.
Additional exercise
Read the paragraph. Mark whether each
statement is an inference or a fact.
You probably know that humans have red blood.
So do other mammals. But other kinds of creatures
have different color of blood. Insects have yellow
blood, and the blood of the lobster is blue.
Fact Inference
a) Humans have red blood.
b) Frogs do not have red blood.
c) Lobsters have blue blood.
d) Bees have yellow blood.
Answ ers: a. fact; b. inference; c. fact; d.

inference
PAGE 153
AFTER READING
LANGUAGE SPOT
Expressing preferences
1. Ask the students to read the sentences from the
text, paying special attention to the words in bold.
2. Help them to choose the correct alternative to
replace the words in bold in sentences a. c.
Answ ers: b.
3. In their notebooks, they copy and complete the
general rule.
Answ ers:
When expressing a preference, we can use
w ould rather as an alternative to w ould
prefer to, followed by an infinitive without to.
Would rather is very common in spoken
English and is often abbreviated to d rather.
4. The students go back to the letters and find all
the sentences that express a preference. They
rewrite them using would rather.
Answ ers:
Id rather be in contact with nature.
Id rather apply for a short-term program.
Id rather apply for a long-term program.
11 ++
36
The students answer the questions using

d rather / d prefer to. Ask them to write the
questions and the answers in their
notebooks. Then, play the recording to allow
the students to compare with their answers.
137
Answers
GAME SPOT
See transcript.
36
A: What kind of program would you join?

B: Id prefer to join the short-term program.
A: What kind of work would you do?
B: Id rather work teaching people to read and write.
A: What country would you apply for?
B: Id prefer to apply for a place in a Latin American country.
A: Would you prefer to stay away from civilization?
B: Id rather stay near a city.
A: Would you prefer to visit Patagonia or an Inca settlement?
B: Id prefer to visit Patagonia.
PAGE 154
LETS CHECK
scale.
Tell the students to imagine that they want
to do some voluntary work this summer.
They must read the advertisements and
write a letter of application to one of the
organizations. Before starting the letter,
remind the students their letters must
include all the sections as in the reading
texts and also contain all the required
information. You may use the Writing
Rubric to assign a mark, or you can supply
copies of it and ask the students to
evaluate their classmates work.
138
UNIT 5

In groups, the students complete the web with
words related to voluntary work. Explain to them
that they can use the vocabulary from the lesson or
words they already know.
Set a time limit. The group which has completed
more words is the winner.
Answers
Will vary.
PAGE 155
13 Motivate the students to imagine they are

the directors of a volunteer organization.
Encourage them to write a letter accepting
or refusing the application they wrote in
Exercise 12, giving reasons for their
decision. You can assign this activity as
homework. Next class, you can invite some
students to read their letters to the rest of
the class and listen to their comments.
vocabulary).
HOW
HOW ABOUT
ABOUT WORKI
WORKING?
NG?
REAL LIFE SPOT

@@ CLICK ON
If possible, motivate your students to visit the
web site suggested at the bottom of page 155,
and find more information related to the topic of
the lesson. Next class, invite those who have
visited the site to share their comments with
their classmates.
PAGE 156
LESSON 4
Possible Answers
Answering the phone: Hello? (informal), Thank you
for calling XXX XX speaking How may I help you?,
How can I help you?
Introducing yourself to the caller: Hi, its XXX
(informal) Hello, this is XXX calling Hi, this is XXX
from the accountants office Hi, this is XXX speaking.
Asking to speak with someone: Is XXX in? (informal)
Is Mrs XXXX there, please? Can I talk to Mrs XXX,
please? May I speak with Mr XXX, please? Id like
to speak to Mrs XXX, please Would Dr XXX be
available? Is XXX around? (informal).
Connecting someone: Just a sec, Ill go and get her
(informal) Ill just get him (informal) Hang on a
second (informal) Please hold the line Ill put you
through to her office One moment, please Im
sorry but her line is engaged at the moment Would
you like to call back later? Bear with me, please
All of our operators are busy at this moment Please
hold the line Im sorry, but shes not available at the
moment.
Taking a message for someone: Would you like to
leave a message? Whos calling, please? Ill let her
know you called Ill make sure she gets the
message May I take a message? Can I take a
message? Would you like to leave a message?
LISTENING
IS IT GOOD NEWS?
BEFORE LISTENING
1
+
You can do this activity while the students
still have their books closed. In order to
prepare them for the listening activities,
ask the students to work in pairs and write
a list of useful phrases they need when
talking on the phone. You may ask them to
write two different lists: one for expressions
for an informal conversation, and the other
with more formal or business expressions.
If necessary, allow them to give examples
in Spanish and then find the translation.
Elicit their answers and write some
examples on the board.
(L.A.: to relate topic to previous
knowledge).
2 ++
Ask the students to open their books and
match the phrases in column A with their
function in column B.
Answers
a. iii.; b. ii.; c. i.; d. vii.; e. v.; f. iv.; g. vi.
3 ++
to listen to two telephone conversations.
Ask them to guess the phrases in
Exercises 1 and 2 that they think will hear.
Do not check at this stage.
(L.A.: to make predictions from the
context).
139
4 +++
6 ++
Tell the students to read the words in the

Key Word Spot and choose their Spanish
equivalent from the list.
Answers
actually = realmente
application = postulacin
apply = postular
form = formulario
ERROR ALERT
There are literally thousands of words that are the
same or similar in appearance in English and Spanish,
and have the same meaning in both languages
(cognates). There are also, however, many instances
where appearances are deceiving and words that look
alike are quite different in meaning (false cognates).
False cognates are pairs of words in the same or different
languages that are similar in form but have different
meaning. That is, they appear to be or are sometimes
considered cognates when in fact they are not.
Additional exercise
The following list includes some of the most
common false cognates, also known as false
friends. Look up their real meaning in a
dictionary and write the list into your notebook.
actual, assist, college, disgrace, disgust, embarrassed,
exit, firm, grocery, idiom, introduce, large, lecture,
library, molest, sane, sensible, sympathetic, success,
the Introduction.
PAGE 157
5 +
37
Ask the students to listen and check their

predictions in Exercise 3.
Answers
b.; c.; d.; e.; f.
140
UNIT 5
Tell the students to copy the sentences in

their notebooks. Ask them to listen again
and write the name of the speaker, Janet,
Steve or Carol, next to each sentence.
Check the exercise orally.
(L.A.: to identify speakers).
Answers
a. Steve; b. Janet; c. Steve; d. Janet; e. Carol; f. Carol
7 ++
37

again and number the sentences in the
order they hear them.
Answers
c.; f.; a.; e.; d.; b.
8 +++
37
Tell the students to copy the extracts from

the conversations in their notebooks. Then,
play the recording once more and ask
them to complete the dialogues.
Answers
a. Steve: Hello?
Janet: Hi, can I speak with Steve, please?
b. Janet: So, youll be 17 by the time you travel.
Steve: Well, actually no-Ill be 16.
c. Carol: Hello? Carol Saunders speaking.
Janet: Hi, Carol. This is Janet Clark.
d. Janet: You didnt complete the back of the form
with your medical details, Carol.
Carol: Oh! Im terribly sorry!
9 +++
LISTENING
37
37
If necessary, the students listen to the

conversations once more and then answer
the questions. Invite two students to share
their answers with their classmates to
allow the rest to check the exercise.
Answers
a. Steve is not 17; Carol didnt send her medical details.
b. Steve will apply next year again; Carol will send her
medical details as soon as possible.
HOW
HOW ABOUT
ABOUT WORKI
WORKING?
NG?
TRANSCRIPT IS IT GOOD NEWS?
37
I.
Steve Hello?
Janet: Hi, can I speak with Steve, please? This is Janet, from
Breaking Frontiers, and Im calling about his application.
Steve: Oh, hello, this is Steve speaking. Is it good news?
Janet: Im afraid we cant say yet. There are one or two points
I want to check with you. Can we do it now?
Steve: Yes, of course. Is something not clear?
Janet: You say that youve done similar work before. Can you
tell me when and where?
Steve: Sure! I went to the north with a group from my school last
summer, to help people build and repair their houses.
Janet: Right. And one more thing: the form says youre 16
whens your birthday?
Steve: In January.
Janet: So, youll be 17 by the time you travel.
Steve: Wellactually no Ill be 16.
Janet: Oh, dear. Im so sorry, Steve. Im afraid you have to be
17 to join us, so youd better apply again next year.
Steve: Yes, I will. Thank you. Bye!
II.
Carol: Hello, Carol Saunders speaking.
Janet: Hi, Carol. This is Janet Clark and Im ringing from
Breaking Frontiers.
Carol: Oh, hello, Janet.
Janet: Many thanks for your application I think its a very
strong one. I just need to check one thing with you.
Carol: Yes, of course.
Janet: You see, you didnt complete the back of the form with
your medical details, Carol.
Carol: Oh! Im terribly sorry! I never even looked at the back
of the form. Is it too late to do it now?
Janet: No, but our doctors have to check your medical details
to see if its OK for you to join us, and we cant give you
a place before they say yes. So, let us have your
medical details immediately, and well get back to you
one or two days after we receive them.
Carol: Thank you ever so much. Ill send them to you right away!
PAGE 158
AFTER LISTENING
LANGUAGE SPOT
Obligation, necessity, impossibility
help them revise or discover a particular grammar
recording. Draw their attention to the words in
bold.
2. Guide them to discover which of these
sentences expresses
a. A prohibition: a.; d., b. A need: b., c. An
obligation: c.; e.
3. Tell the students to copy and complete the
Answ ers:
We use cant, need to and have to to
express impossibility, necessity and
obligation.
We use need to to say that it is necessary to
do something and have to when it is
obligatory to do something.
We use cant to express that we are not capable
of doing something, or that something is prohibited.
4. In groups, the students collect information
about the conversations they listened to and
they write two more sentences using the verbs
in the LANGUAGE SPOT.
Answ ers: will vary. Accept any coherent
sentence related to the recording.
ERROR ALERT
Do not have to vs. Must not
Do not have to = Do not need to. It means that
someone is not required to do something.
Must not means that you are prohibited from doing
something.
the Introduction.
141
Additional exercise
Complete the sentences with have to or do not
have to.
a. You ______ hurry up. You cant be late on your
first day.
b. You ______ give back the book yet. I havent
finished mine yet.
c. She is overweight. She ______ do some
exercise.
d. He ______ study so hard. The test is not very
difficult.
e. She ______ run. The class begins at 6:00 and
its only 5:30.
10 ++
Using the verbs in the LANGUAGE
FOCUS, the students complete the
sentences in their notebooks. Invite some
students to write the sentences on the
board to allow the rest to check their
answers.
Answers
a. have to; b. have to; c. need to; d. have to; e. cant; f.
cant; g. cant; h. needs to
PAGE 159
11 ++
38
Ask the students to complete the

telephone conversation in pairs. Then, play
the recording and tell them to compare
their answers.
(L.A.: to use language and vocabulary
related to the topic).
Answers
See transcript.
142
UNIT 5
38
Martha:Hello?
David: Hi, can I speak with Martha, please? Im ringing from
Young Volunteers about her application.
Martha:Oh, this is Martha speaking. Is it good news?
David: Im afraid I cant say yet. Theres one point I want to
check with you over the phone. Is that all right?
Martha:Yes, of course. Is something not clear?
David: You didnt complete the back of the form with details
about your education.
Martha:Oh! Im terribly sorry!
David: You have to send us this information immediately
and well get back to you quickly.
Martha:Thank you so much. Ill do it right now!
12 +++
38
The students listen to the recording and

practice the conversation with their
partners. Encourage them to role-play it in
front of the class.
situtuation).
13 +++
As homework, ask the students to work in
pairs and write a similar dialogue with their
own ideas. Next class, motivate them to
role-play it in front of their classmates. You
can assign an extra mark to this activity.
vocabulary).
Answers
Will vary.
HOW
HOW ABOUT
ABOUT WORKI
WORKING?
NG?
Reflection Spot
The purpose of this activity is to help students

reflect on their learning process and to raise
students awareness of how they develop their
own learning strategies to become more
effective learners. They should work on their
own but you can help and guide the work
when necessary.
their ability to use polite phrases in a
telephone conversation.
their ability to role-play a telephone
conversation.
LETS CHECK
scale.
The students must choose the correct
alternative to complete the sentences with
need to, have to or cant.
Answers
a. have to; b. need to; c. have to; d. cant; e. cant;
f. cant; g. need to; h. has to; i. cant; j. needs to.
PAGE 160
15 ++
Tell the students to copy the chart into
their notebooks and then to complete it
classifying the expressions under the
corresponding labels. Copy the chart on
the board and invite some students to
complete it to allow the rest to check their
answers.
(L.A.: to consolidate vocabulary).
Answers
Introducing Asking who Asking to Connecting Informing Offering
yourself is calling speak to
someone is to take a
someone
not available message
This is
Can I ask
May I
Can you Im afraid Could I take
Sylvia. who is calling, speak to
hold a
he is not a message?
please? Alan, please? moment? available at
the moment.
This is Excuse me, Can I speak Can you Mrs. Davies Would you
George who is this? to Benjamin, hold the is out at the like to leave
speaking.
please?
line?
moment. a message?
Is Jake in? Ill put you Mr. Jackson
through.
isnt in
right now.
16 ++ FL
Encourage fast learners to add one more
phrase to each category in the chart.
(L.A.: to consolidate vocabulary).
Answers
Will vary.
17 +++
As homework, ask the students to work in
pairs and write short conversations for
situations a. c. Tell them to practice the
conversations at home and get ready to
role-play one of the conversations in front
of their classmates.
situation).
143
PAGE 161
GAME SPOT
Ask the students to form groups of six or eight
members. Read the instructions aloud and make
sure they understand clearly what the game consists
on. If necessary, explain the rules in Spanish.
Finally, tell the students to reflect on the last
question and ask each group to share their
In the game variously known as Chinese
whispers, Telephone Gossip, Arab Phone (from
the French Le tlphone arabe), Russian
Scandal, and Stille Post (Silent Post), the first
player whispers a phrase or sentence to the next
player. Each player successively whispers what
that player believes he or she heard to the next.
The last player announces the statement to the
entire group. Errors typically accumulate in the
retellings, so the statement announced by the last
player differs significantly, and often amusingly,
from the one uttered by the first. The game is
often played by children as a party game or in the
playground. It is often invoked as a metaphor for
cumulative error, especially the inaccuracies as
rumors or gossip spread, or, more generally, for
the unreliability of human recollection.
144
UNIT 5
In the United States, Telephone is the most

common name for the game. The name Chinese
whispers reflects the former stereotype in
Europe of the Chinese language as being
incomprehensible. It is little-used in the United
States and may be considered offensive. It
remains the common British name for the game.
The game has no winner: the entertainment
comes from comparing the original and final
messages. Intermediate messages may also be
compared; some messages will be
unrecognizable after only a few steps.
As well as providing amusement, the game
can have educational value. It shows how easily
information can become corrupted by indirect
communication. The game has been used in
schools to simulate the spread of gossip and
supposed harmful effects. It can also be used
for older or adult learners of a foreign language,
where the challenge of speaking
comprehensibly, and understanding, is more
difficult because of the low volume, and hence a
greater mastery of the fine points of
pronunciation is required.
An apocryphal example from World War I of a
message being sent down the trench line is
Se nd re inforc e m e nt s, w e re going t o
a dva nc e which became Send t hre e a nd
fourpe nc e , w e re going t o a da nc e
(three and fourpence is three shillings and four
pence in old British money).
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chinese_whispers
REAL LIFE SPOT

humor to the class. All the jokes and cartoons
are related to the topic of the lesson. Give some
them to share their comments to make sure
allow the use of Spanish to check
comprehension.
HOW
HOW ABOUT
ABOUT WORKI
WORKING?
NG?
PAGE 162
3 Explain to the students that they are going

to play Fortune Teller. They work in pairs,
choose five pictures and their partners will
tell them what they mean, as in the
example. Make sure the students change
roles and take turns to ask and answer
questions. Monitor the activity, but do not
take part or interrupt correcting mistakes. It
is better to take notes and talk about them
at the end of the class.

consolidate topics and language structures of
the lessons. You can assign these activities at
the end of each lesson, or as homework and
give them an extra mark.
Explain to the students that this is a real

application form to an international
volunteer organization. They must
complete it as if they were really applying
to a program. You can copy the form on
the board or prepare a transparency, and
then invite a student to complete it.
Answers
Will vary according to students personal information.
PAGE 163
2 In pairs, the students must prepare a

leaflet. Read the instructions aloud and
make sure they understand what they have
to do.
a. The students must find information about
three volunteer organizations that offer
work for teens.
b. They must write a short text like the one
in Lesson 1 to explain the objectives of
each organization.
c. They must choose one of them and
prepare a leaflet promoting the
organization. Ideally, they should add
pictures or some visual material.
d. Display students works in a visible place
in the classroom.
PAGE 164
UNIT CHECK

and weaknesses.
For more information on UNIT CHECK, see
PAGE 165
Answers
READING - TEEN JOBS OFFERED
b.
2 a. III; b. IV; c. I; d. II; e. V

3 a. True; b. False; c. False; d. True; e. False
LISTENING - TWO PHONE CALLS
39
4 c.
5 a. Stella; b. Chris; c. Stella; d. Chris; e. Jennifer;
f. Chris.
145
PAGE 166
a. False; b. False; c. False; d. False
TRANSCRIPT TWO PHONE CALLS

I.
Stella:
Chris:
Stella:
39
Hello. Can I speak to Chris, please?

This is Chris speaking.
This is Stella Rawlings. Im ringing from Children Aid
about your application to join one of our programs.
Oh, hi, Stella.
Many thanks for your application, Chris. Its a very
good one, but there are a couple of points Id like to
check with you. Can we do it now?
Sure.
You say youve been on a similar program before.
Thats right. I went with a group from my school to
help people repair their houses.
So you are an experienced builder
I cant say that, but I learned some skills.
The other thing. You said on the form that you
werent free until July 20th. You know the program
you want to join starts on July 12th, dont you?
Yes, and Ive already spoken to my teachers and
they say I can miss a week of school. They think
these kinds of programs are great opportunities, so
I can leave on the date the program starts. Are
there any places left?
Yes, fortunately there are two and one of them is
for you now. Congratulations! Now you need to
start your money raising.
Chris:
Stella:
Chris:
Stella:
Chris:
Stella:
Chris:
Stella:
Chris:
Stella:
II.
Jennifer:
Stella:
Jennifer:
Stella:
Hello?
Hello, can I speak to Jennifer, please?
Speaking.
This is Stella Rawlings, from Children Aid. Im
ringing about your application.
Jennifer: Is it good news?
Stella: There is one point I need to check. On your form, it
says that youre 16. When is your birthday,
Jennifer?
Jennifer: In December.
Stella: So youll be 17 then.
146
UNIT 5
Jennifer: Well, actually Ill be 16.

Stella: Oh, Im so sorry. You have to be 17 to join, and the
program starts in November. We hope that youll
apply again next year.
Jennifer: Sure, I will. Thank you.
LANGUAGE
7
arrive ask chew go have leave
look at thank wear write
a. If you want to find a job, you have to read
the newspaper ads.
b. You cant arrive late for an interview.
c. You need to write a good CV.
d. You cant wear jeans when you go to a
job interview.
e. You have to thank the interviewer at the
end of the interview.
SPEAKING
8 In pairs, the students role-play a telephone

conversation about an application for a job.
Make sure they use not only the correct
expressions according to each stage, but
the vocabulary related to the topic.
criteria:
5 6: student can ask and answer
correct pronunciation, and a minimum of
hesitations and grammar mistakes.
grammar mistakes.
HOW
HOW ABOUT
ABOUT WORKI
WORKING?
NG?
WRITING
9 The students read the personal information

in Catalina Lopezs file and then write her
letter of application to an international
organization.
criteria:
letter of application, including the required
information, using correct textual
references and without grammar or
spelling mistakes.
5 6 points: student can write a coherent
letter of application, including most of the
required information, using a few textual
references and with a minimum of
letter of application, including some of the
required information, but he / she makes
no use of textual references and makes
some grammar and spelling mistakes.
letter of application, does not include the
required information, and he / she makes a
lot of spelling and grammar mistakes.
PAGE 167
FINAL REFLECTION

Make sure all the students understand what
they are expected to do and give enough time
to answer the questions. Encourage students to
give honest answers and show interest in their
results.
147
EXTRA TEST UNIT 5

READING - SHARING EXPERIENCES
ding things I
Working at the local restaurant was one of the most rewar
and all of my
any
ment
imple
to
e
have ever done in my life. I had full licens
d up a
starte
We
ess.
ideas in order to market and publicize the busin
y tourist
nearb
in
e
delivery service, put up fliers and spoke directly to peopl
short
the
in
)
more
spots, etc. The profits increased by about 200% (if not
that all volunteers
amount of time of my stay. This is due to the attention
ue.
paid during this time. Hopefully the hard work will contin
a
Lizzie Lee, Short-Term Quest Volunteer, Guatemal
I volunteered in Cusco, Peru for six weeks during the summer of 2008
and it was the kind of experience that I could not possibly obtain any
other way. I worked at a rehabilitation center for young people with
drug and alcohol addictions. Working with the psychologist, I had the
opportunity to be a part of the rehabilitation process, helping conduct
interviews, psychological assessments, and group meetings.
Logan Nealis, Short-Term Quest Volunteer, Peru
My quest in Chile was an amazing one

! Although you definitely need
flexibility due to the demands of each
classroom environment and
resources, I was able to visit and spe
ak in several different classrooms
(grade 4 through university level) and
at various different schools. My host
family was wonderful! This was wha
t I was most worried about, as I had
never stayed with a host family befo
re. We will, for sure be, friends forever.
I will continue to participate in hum
anitarian work here in the USA until
I
am able to set out on another project
with United Planet.
Cynthia Castaldo, Short-Term Que
st Volunteer, Chile
for
This experience was definitely a great new experience
me! Not only did I get to work to help beautify the
environment, I also experienced the real culture of Costa
Rica by living with a host family. I even went to the beach
the
in my spare time and swam in the ocean! This trip was
fun!!
perfect balance between hard work and
Erica Hsu, Short-Term Quest Volunteer, Costa Rica
Read the text and answer these questions.

a. Who worked as a psychologist assistant?
b. Who could balance work and fun?
c. Who is going to continue working as a volunteer?
d. Who could put into practice all of his / her ideas?
2 Read the text again. Are these statements true or false?

a.
b.
c.
d.
4 pts.
4 pts.
Profits didnt increase very much during Lizzies stay in Guatemala.

Logan Nealis worked with young people in risk situations.
It was Cynthia Castaldos first experience with a host family.
Erica Hsu didnt like her experience.
3 Read the text once more. Which of these sentences are facts (F) and which are
4 pts.
inferences (I)?
a. Lizzie Lee will continue working hard.
b. Logan Nealis experience could not be repeated.
c. Cynthia Castaldo didnt visit pre-school students.
d. Erica Hsu worked in an environmental project.
LISTENING - VOLUNTEER JOBS FOR STUDENTS AND TEENS
4
a.
b.
c.
d.
148
Listen to the recording. Number the sentences in the order you hear them.
All volunteers play an integral role.
Habitat offers basic shared accommodation.
Volunteering can also help you to gain new skills.
An associate will contact you.
UNIT 5
5 pts.
HOW
H OW ABOUT
ABOUT WORKI
WORKING?
NG?
Listen again. Match the beginnings in column A (a. - c.) with the endings in
column B (i. - v.).
A
a. Habitat for Humanity
b. All volunteer applications
c. If you are interested in becoming a
volunteer
d. For any further questions
6
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5 pts.
B
i. are carefully screened.
ii. needs short term volunteers.
iii. please download an application form.
iv. please contact the Volunteer
Program Manager
Listen to the recording once more. Are these statements true or false?
Habitat for Humanity needs volunteers below 16.
Habitat for Humanity accepts only local volunteers.
Foreign volunteers need a special visa.
If you want to join a program, you must send a letter.
You can contact the Program Manager by e-mail or by phone.
5 pts.
LANGUAGE
7 Use one of the modal verbs in brackets to fill each gap.

a.
b.
c.
d.
4 pts.
They (can / might) ______________ be away for the weekend but Im not sure.
It is probable he (might / may) ______________ go to Sheffield.
Probably, tomorrow (might / may) ______________ be a cooler day.
You (may / might) ______________ be right but it is not very probable.
8 Complete these sentences expressing preferences and using expressions from the box.
3 pts.
walk home / send an e-mail / stay at home / travel before / drink water
a. Would you like to go out for dinner tonight? No, ___________________
b. Do you want some orange juice? I ___________________
c. Will you phone me? I ___________________
9 Write three sentences expressing a. a necessity, b. an obligation and c. an impossibility.
3 pts.
SPEAKING
10 In pairs, choose one of these situations and role-play a telephone conversation.
10 pts.
a. You want to invite your friend to the cinema.

b. You want to apply for a temporary job.
WRITING
11 Write a short leaflet promoting a volunteer organization that offers works for teens.
10 pts.
Explain the objectives, the kinds of programs, the way the applicants can apply and
any other useful information.
57 pts.
TOTAL
0 - 15
Keep trying!
16 - 30
Good!
31 - 45
Very good!
46 - 57
Excellent!
149
READING - SHARING EXPERIENCES
1 a. Logan Nealis; b. Erica Hsu; c. Cynthia

Castaldo; d. Lizzie Lee.
2 a. False; b. True; c. True; d. False.

3 a. fact; b. inference; c. inference; d. inference.
LISTENING - VOLUNTEER
JOBS FOR STUDENTS AND TEENS
40
4 c.; a.; b.; d.

5 a. ii; b. i.; c. iii.; d. iv.
6 a. false; b. false; c. true; d. false; e. true.
TRANSCRIPT VOLUNTEER JOBS
FOR STUDENTS AND TEENS
40
Speaker 1: Sometimes, theres something more important in

a job than money. Volunteering can also help you
gain new skills, improve your resume, and
most importantly help you decide what you
really want to do when you graduate.
Speaker 2: Habitat for Humanity needs short term
volunteers, aged 16 and up, to assist with various
projects at the International Headquarters located
in Americus, Georgia. Volunteering at Habitat is a
unique experience that will enable you to develop
your skills in different areas. All volunteers play an
integral role in every aspect of the project, from
administration to construction.
Speaker 3: Volunteers who are not from the local area may
qualify for shared housing and a small meal
allowance. Habitat offers basic shared
accommodation in various houses located near
the headquarters for volunteers working in
Americus, Georgia.
150
UNIT 5
Speaker 1: All volunteer applications are carefully screened to

see if your skills match the project opportunities
you specify and for all open volunteer
opportunities. If your skills match an opportunity,
an associate will contact you to conduct an initial
phone interview to find out more about your
suitability, and to discuss where you would be
best suited in the organization.
Speaker 2: International volunteers coming to Habitat
Headquarters from outside of the United States
need a B1 business visa.
Speaker 3: If you are interested in becoming a volunteer at
Habitat Headquarters, please download an
application form and return it to:
Habitat for Humanity International
Attn: Volunteer Program Manager
121 Habitat St
Americus, Georgia 31709
Speaker 1: If you have any further questions regarding the
Volunteer program at Habitat for Humanity
International, please contact the Volunteer
Program Manager at:
volunteer@habitat.org or phone
(800) 422 - 4828.
LANGUAGE
7 a. might, b. may, c. may, d. may.

8 a. Id rather stay at home.
b. Id rather drink water.
c. Id rather send an e-mail.
9 Will vary. Accept any coherent answer.
HOW
HOW ABOUT
ABOUT WORKI
WORKING?
NG?
SPEAKING
10 You can assign points according to these

criteria:
8 - 10 points: student can participate in a
telephone conversation about the topic, with
5 6: student can participate in a telephone
conversation about the topic, with correct
3 4 points: student can participate in a
telephone conversation about the topic with
acceptable pronunciation but hesitates and
makes grammar mistakes.
1 2 points: student cant participate in a
telephone conversation about the topic;
pronunciation interferes with
comprehension, hesitates a lot and makes a
lot of grammar mistakes.
WRITING
11 You can assign points according to these

criteria:
leaflet, including the required information,
leaflet, including most of the required
mistakes.
leaflet, including some of the required
leaflet, does not include the required
151
EVALUATION INSTRUMENTS
These are assessment tools you can use to measure students work.
They are scoring guides to evaluate a students performance based on
the sum of a full range of criteria rather than a single numerical score.
The evaluation instruments provided here include:
Rubrics.
Questionnaires.
Observation sheets.
These instruments differ from traditional methods of assessment in
that they examine students in the process of learning, clearly
showing them how their work is being evaluated. They
communicate detailed explanations of what excellence is
throughout a task and provide clear teaching directives.
The instruments strength is their specificity, which means that
individual students can fall between levels, attaining some but not
all standards in a higher level. While scores can be translated into
final grades, we must remind students that not every score counts.
These instruments are meant, to inform and improve teachers
instruction while giving students the feedback they need to learn
and grow.
These instruments can also be used in peer assessment and then
used to provide feedback.
Prior to assessment, the evaluation instruments can be used to
communicate expectations to students. During the assessment
phase, they are used to easily score a subjective matter.
After an instrument is scored, it should be given back to students to
communicate them their grade and their strengths and weaknesses.
Students can use them to see the correlation between effort and
achievement. Sharing the instruments with students is vital as the
feedback empowers students to evaluate their own work.
Advantages of using a variety of instruments:
Teachers can improve their direct instruction by providing focus,
emphasis, and attention to details as a model for students.
Students get explicit guidelines of teacher expectations.
Students can use the instruments to develop their abilities.
Teachers can reuse these instruments for various activities.
Complex products or behaviours can be examined efficiently.
They are criterion referenced, rather than norm referenced: (Did
the student meet the criteria for level 4? rather than How well
did this student do compared to other students?).
Ratings can be done by students to assess their own work, or by
others (peers, teachers, instructors, U.T.P. people, etc.).
152
Applying Evaluation Instruments

The evaluation instruments provided can be used for the following
purposes:
Self- assessment
Give copies to students and ask them to assess their own progress
on a task. This should not count toward a grade. The point is to help
students learn more and produce better final products. Always give
them time to revise their work after assessing themselves.
Peer assessment
This takes some getting used to. Emphasise the fact that peerassessment, is also intended to help everyone do better work. You can
then see how accurate their feedback is, and you can ask for evidence
that supports their opinions when their assessments dont match
yours. Giving time for revision after peer-assessment is crucial.
Teacher assessment
When you assess student work, use the same instruments that
were used for self- and peer-assessment. When you hand the
marked instrument back with the students work, they will know
what they did well and what they need to improve.
To use the evaluation instruments provided in this section:
Identify the maximum number of points for achieving the highest
level of quality and assign a number to the students performance.
The gradations increase/decrease in 1 point.
The last column shows the actual score assigned to this particular
student, based on his / her performance. The overall total score is
assigned by adding together the scores.
Once you have worked out students scores, you can express them in
gradations. Gradations are the descriptive levels of quality starting
with the worst quality up to the best quality.
Always keep in mind that, however you use them, the idea is to
support and to evaluate student learning.
Here is a description of each of the evaluation instruments:
Evaluating Listening Comprehension
Use this instrument two or three times in a semester to assess
where the students rank within the four categories and to
determine where the strengths and weaknesses of the class lie.
After applying the instrument, ask the students to get in groups
and analyse their results. As a class, discuss important points that
may help improve listening skills.
To work out the score of each student identify the maximum

number of points for achieving the highest level of quality and
assign a number to the students performance according to this
scale. Once you have worked out the score of each student, you can
apply this chart to express his/her results:
1= Unsatisfactory 2 = Fair 3 = Very Good 4 = Excellent
Evaluating Reading Comprehension
The goal of this reading assessment instrument is to determine if
the students have improved their reading comprehension skills.
Use this instrument once a month. Once you have applied this
instrument, make the students identify their strengths and
weaknesses and brainstorm ideas that could help them improve
their performance in the future.
This instrument also gives the teacher the opportunity to focus
diagnostic attention on students whose performance is as below
standard. You can reach this conclusion after calculating students
scores and grades and correlating them with the levels stated in the
Progress Map (Page 15 of the Introduction).
You must take into account that the maximum score corresponds to
the highest expected results conceived by this teaching proposal for
this level.
Project
Use this instrument every time students do a project. Each student
is evaluated along three dimensions, each having to do with the
students contribution to the work, the final product and other
aspects the teacher considers important to assess: how effectively
the student accomplished his / her responsibilities as a member of
the team or the quality of his / her interactions with the other team
members.
These dimensions are assigned a score of 1 through 7; these values
represent increasing degrees of achievement in each dimension.
The last column is the actual score assigned the student, based on
his / her performance, along the three dimensions. The overall total
score is assigned by adding together the scores corresponding to
the three dimensions.
Writing Rubric
You can use it two or three times in a year. This instrument is a
simplified way to grade a writing assignment. It is important to
show students the instrument beforehand so that they get better

quality work; they know what they are supposed to produce and it
saves problems afterwards as they can see where they can have
points taken off.
This instrument should also be used after the task is complete, to
evaluate the product, and to engage students in reflection on the
work they have produced.
To work out the score of each student identify the maximum number
of points for achieving the highest level of quality and assign a
number to the students performance according to this scale. Once
you have worked out the score of each student, you can apply this
chart to express his/her results:
Working with others
You can use this instrument when you assign a project or in
isolation. It is designed to be applied as peer assessment. It offers
feedback about students attitude towards their classmates. It can
be a useful source of information for the teacher about individual
contribution to a final product.
To work out the score, students identify the maximum number of
points for achieving the highest level of quality and assign a
number to their partners performance.
After you have worked out the score of each student, you can apply
this chart to express his/her results:
Homework
When applying this instrument it, to provide clear expectations to
your students. After reading the rubric, students are clear on what
an acceptable homework assignment looks like.
The system can improve students homework skills because
the teacher gives each student attention about their homework;
students can see the opportunities to improve their work;
the teacher has the data required to give a pure homework
grade for homework completion.
You can also include a reward component: students who average a
grade of 3 or 4 for the month, can earn an extra mark on the next
period.
To work out the score of each student identify the maximum number
of points for achieving the highest level of quality and assign a
number to the students performance according to this scale. Once you
have worked out the score of each student, you can apply this chart
to express his/her results:
153
Oral Presentation
Use this instrument two or three times per student during the year.
The students will be evaluated in: Non-verbal skills, Vocal Skills and
Content areas.
The teacher can give each student a copy of the instrument and
then read it with them. The students will improve their
performance if they know what they are expected to produce and
the areas they have to focus their attention on.
assign a number to the students performance according to
this scale. Once you have worked out the score of each student, you
can apply this chart to express his/her results:
Class participation
Use this instrument, at the end of each semester. It is a useful tool
for teachers to evaluate the way in which students take part in the
different activities and their level of engagement in class. It also
provides useful information to share with parents. The teacher can
combine the results of this rubric and those of the Behaviour rubric
to get a global additional mark at the end of a period.
Behaviour
Use this instrument when you detect behaviour problems. This
rubric is meant to offer information on students attitude and
behaviour in relation to their classmates and can be a useful source
of information for course council. It can be applied by teachers or
used for peer assessment.
After applying this instrument, make students identify the areas in
which they got higher scores, and also the areas that need
improvement.
assign a number to the students performance according to
this scale. Once you have worked out the score of each student, you
can apply this chart to express his/her results:
Extended-response reading
Use this instrument in any lesson that invites students to
154
demonstrate comprehension by responding to open-ended

questions. Its aim is to give information to the teacher on students
placement in the Reading Skills English Progress Map.
Use the checklist to assess reading tasks, to provide feedback to
students and as a basis for feedback for each student.
To work out the score of each student, identify his / her level of
performance, according to the scale provided by this instrument.
Inference from a text
Use this instrument two or three times in a semester. It provides
information on students capacity to make inferences from a
reading or listening text in order to generate strategies that may
improve their comprehension process.
To work out the score of each student, identify the level of his /her
performance, according to the scale provided by this instrument.
Questionnaire: Tasks' Development
The teacher can apply this instrument to know how students deal
with English in general and can also be applied for peer
assessment. This questionnaire provides criteria for scoring
students' performance in the five dimensions that are evaluated. It
allows teachers and students to identify strengths and weaknesses
and set clear performance goals.
Before applying it, read it with the students and listen to their
comments. After applying it, talk about the results and get
feedback on students' strengths and weaknesses.
To work out the score of each student apply the scale and calculate
the gradation.
Feedback
Here are some phrases that are useful for giving feedback and make
comments to your students:
You are developing a better attitude toward your classmates.
You can be very helpful and dependable in the classroom.
You have strengthened your skills in ___.
You are learning to be a better listener.
You are learning to be careful, cooperative, and fair.
You are very enthusiastic about participating.
Your work habits are improving.
You have been consistently progressing.
You are willing to take part in all classroom activities.
Your attitude toward school is excellent.
You are maintaining grade-level achievements.
You work well in groups, planning and carrying out activities.
Your work in the area(s) of ____ has been extremely good.
You can do better in areas of ____.
You would improve if you developed a greater interest in ___.
PHOTOCOPIABLE EVALUATION INSTRUMENTS

EVALUATING LISTENING COMPREHENSION
Lesson: ________________________ Date: _______
Skills
Criteria
1
Points
3
Understanding key events or facts.
Understands 1
or 2 events or
key facts.
Understands
some of the
events or key
facts.
Understands
many events or
key facts,
mainly in
sequence.
Understands
most events in
sequence or
understands
most key facts.
Understanding details.
Gets few or no
important
details.
Gets some
important
details.
Gets many
important
details.
Gets most
important details
and key
language.
Responding appropriately to features such as:

laughter, silence, etc., and / or accentuation,
intonation and rhythm.
Nearly never.
Sometimes.
Most of the
time.
Nearly always.
Answering questions.
Answers
questions with
incorrect
information.
Answers
questions with
some
misinterpretation.
Answers
questions with
literal
interpretation.
Answers
questions with
interpretation
showing higher
level thinking.
Doing tasks.
Provides limited
or no response
and requires
many
questions or
prompts.
Provides some
response to
teacher and
requires 4 or 5
questions and
prompts.
Provides
adequate
response to
teacher 2 or 3
questions and
prompts.
Provides
insightful
response to
teacher 1 or no
questions or
prompts.
At the end of the session, the listener is able to:
Answer factual
questions on
general
information.
Answer factual
questions on
general and
specific
information.
Summarise the
beginning,
middle, and end
of the story.
Reveal the
sequence of
events, providing
details on
dialogue, and
motivation of
characters.
PHOTOCOPIABLE
Name: _______________________________
Total points
155
EVALUATING READING COMPREHENSION
Name: _______________________________
Lesson: ________________________ Date: _______
Skills
Criteria
1
Points
3
Understanding key events or facts.
Understands 1
or 2 events or
key facts.
Understands
some of the
events or key
facts.
Understands
many events or
key facts,
mainly in
sequence.
Understands
most events in
sequence or
understands
most key facts.
Understanding details.
Gets few or no
important
details.
Gets some
important
details.
Gets many
important
details.
Gets most
important details
and key
language.
Identifying characters or topics.
Identifies 1 or 2
characters or
topics using
pronouns (he,
she, it, they).
Identifies 1 or 2
characters or
topics by
generic name
(boy, girl, dog).
Identifies many
topics or
characters by
name in text
(Ben, Giant).
Identifies all
characters or
topics by specific
name (Old Ben
Bailey).
Answering questions.
Answers
questions with
incorrect
information.
Answers
questions with
some
misinterpretation.
Answers
questions with
literal
interpretation.
Answers
questions with
interpretation
showing higher
level thinking.
Doing tasks.
Provides limited
or no response
and requires
many
questions or
prompts.
Provides some
response to
teacher 4 or 5
questions and
prompts.
Provides
adequate
response to
teacher 2 or 3
questions and
prompts.
Provides
insightful
response to
teacher 1 or no
questions or
prompts.
Total points
PHOTOCOPIABLE
Taken and adapted from: http://www.storyarts.org/classroom/usestories/listenrubric.html
156
PROJECT
Name(s):
Date:
Process
Poor
Satisfactory
Excellent
1. Has clear vision of final product.
1,2,3
4,5
6,7
2. Properly organised to complete project.
1,2,3
4,5
6,7
3. Managed time wisely.
1,2,3
4,5
6,7
4. Acquired needed knowledge base.
1,2,3
4,5
6,7
5. Communicated efforts with teacher.
1,2,3
4,5
6,7
Poor
Satisfactory
Excellent
1. Format.
1,2,3
4,5
6,7
2. Mechanics of speaking / writing.
1,2,3
4,5
6,7
3. Organisation and structure.
1,2,3
4,5
6,7
4. Creativity.
1,2,3
4,5
6,7
5. Demonstrates knowledge.
1,2,3
4,5
6,7
1. _____________________________
1,2,3
4,5
6,7
2. _____________________________
1,2,3
4,5
6,7
3. _____________________________
1,2,3
4,5
6,7
4. ____________________________
1,2,3
4,5
6,7
Product (Project)
Points
Points
Other:
Total:
PHOTOCOPIABLE
Teacher comments:
Source: http://www.sdst.org/shs/library/resrub.html
157
WRITING RUBRIC
Name:
Title of work:
Date submitted:
Criteria
Points
Main Idea Sentence
Unclear and
incorrectly placed;
it is not restated in
the closing
sentence.
Unclear and
incorrectly placed;
it is restated in the
closing sentence.
Either unclear or
incorrectly placed;
it is restated in the
closing sentence.
Clear, correctly
placed, and is
restated in the
closing sentence.
Supporting Sentence(s)
Paragraph(s) have
no supporting
detail sentences
that relate back to
the main idea.
Paragraph(s) has /
have one
supporting detail
sentence that
relate(s) back to the
main idea.
Paragraph(s) has /
have two
supporting detail
sentences that
relate back to the
main idea.
Paragraph(s) has /
have three or more
supporting detail
sentences that
relate back to the
main idea.
Detail Sentence(s)
Each supporting
sentence has no
detail sentence.
Each supporting
sentence has one
detail sentence.
Each supporting
sentence has at
least two detail
sentences.
Each supporting
sentence has three
or more detail
sentences.
Legibility
Writing is not
legible.
Writing is not
legible in places.
Marginally legible
handwriting,
typing, or printing.
Legible
handwriting,
typing, or printing.
Mechanics & Grammar
Six or more
punctuation,
capitalisation, and
spelling errors.
Three to five
punctuation,
capitalisation, and
spelling errors.
One or two
punctuation,
capitalisation, and
spelling errors.
No errors in
punctuation,
capitalisation, and
spelling.
Total:
PHOTOCOPIABLE
Teacher comments:
Taken and adapted from:

http://712educators.about.com/od/rubrics/Rubrics_Writing_and_Grading_Rubrics.htm
158
WORKING WITH OTHERS

Name: _______________________________
Date: _________
Teacher: _______________________
Class: ________________________ Lesson: ________________
Skills
Working with others
Criteria
1
Points
3
Help
Never offers
assistance to
others.
Some of the time Most of the time

All of the time
offers assistance to offers assistance to offers assistance to
each other.
each other.
each other.
Listen
Never works from Some of the time

each other's ideas. works from each
other's ideas.
Most of the time

works from each
other's ideas.
All of the time

works from each
other's ideas.
Participate
Never contributes
to the project.
Some of the time

contributes to the
project.
Most of the time

contributes to the
project.
All of the time

contributes to the
project.
Persuade
Never exchanges,
defends and
rethinks ideas.
Some of the time Most of the time

exchanges, defends exchanges,
and rethinks ideas. defends and
rethinks ideas.
All of the time

exchanges, defends
and rethinks ideas
Question
Never interacts,
discusses and
poses questions to
all member of the
class.
Some of the time

interacts, discusses
and poses questions
to all member of
the class.
Most of the time

and poses questions
to all member of
the class.
All of the time

and poses questions
to all member of
the class.
Respect
Never encourages
and supports the
ideas and efforts
of others.
Some of the time

encourages and
supports the ideas
and efforts of
others.
Most of the time

encourages and
supports the ideas
and efforts of
others.
All of the time

encourages and
supports the ideas
and efforts of
others.
Share
Never offers ideas

and reports
findings to each
other.
Some of the time

offers ideas and
reports findings to
each other.
Most of the time

offers ideas and
reports findings to
each other.
All of the time

offers ideas and
reports findings to
each other.
Total points
PHOTOCOPIABLE
Teacher comments:
Taken and adapted from: http://rubistar.4teachers.org
159
HOMEWORK
Name: _______________________________
Date: _________
Teacher: _______________________
Class: ________________________ Lesson: ________________
Skills
Criteria
1
Points
3
Assignment Completeness
Less than 1/2 of all At least 1/2 of the

items attempted. items attempted.
9/10 of items
attempted.
All items
attempted.
Accuracy
Less than 1/2 of all Between 1/2 and

items are correct. 9/10 of items are
correct.
9/10 of items are

correct.
All items are

correct.
Demonstrated Knowledge
Response shows a
complete lack of
understanding of
the problem.
Shows substantial
understanding of
the problem, ideas,
and processes.
Shows complete
understanding of
the questions,
ideas, and
processes.
Requirements
Does not attempt Does not meet the

to meet the
requirements of
requirements of the the problem.
problem.
Meets the
requirements of
the problem.
Goes beyond the

requirements of the
problem.
Legibility
Writing is not
legible.
Marginally legible Legible

handwriting,
handwriting,
typing, or printing. typing, or printing.
Response shows
some
understanding of
the problem.
Writing is not
legible in places.
Total points
PHOTOCOPIABLE
Teacher comments:
Taken and adapted from: www.teach-nology.com
160
ORAL PRESENTATION
Name: _______________________________
Date: _________
Teacher: _______________________
Class: ________________________ Lesson: ________________
Skills & Content

Non-verbal skills
Criteria
1
Points
3
Eye Contact
No attempt to look Attention to one

at audience, reads particular part of
notes all the time. the class; does not
scan audience.
Occasionally looks Constantly looks at

at someone or
someone or some
some groups during groups.
presentation.
Facial Expression
Shows a conflicting Occasionally displays

expression during conflicting
entire presentation. expression during
presentation.
Occasionally
demonstrates
conflicting
expression during
presentation.
Enthusiasm
Shows absolutely Shows some

no interest in topic negativity toward
presented.
topic presented.
Occasionally shows Strong positive

positive feelings
feelings on topic
during entire
about topic.
presentation.
10 or more are
noticed.
6-9 are noticed.
1-5 are noticed.
Topic Announced
Audience has no
idea what the
report is about.
Vaguely tells
audience what
report is about.
Gives some
Clearly explains
explanation of what what the report is
report is covering. covering.
Time frame
Less than minimum More than

time.
maximum time.
Less/ More than

required time but
tries to solve it.
Within required
time frame.
Visual Aids
Poor, distract
audience, hard to
read / see.
Thoughts
articulated clearly,
but not engaging.
Enhance
presentation,
thoughts
articulated; keep
interest.
Completeness of Content
One or more points Majority of points

left out.
glossed over.
Gives clues about

content of speech;
appropriate
expression.
Vocal Skills
Vocalised Pauses (uh, )
No vocalised pauses.
Content
Most points
All points
covered in depth, thoroughly
some glossed over. explained.
PHOTOCOPIABLE
Add nothing to
presentation.
Total points
Taken and adapted from: http://www.tcet.unt.edu/START/instruct/general/oral.htm
161
CLASS PARTICIPATION
Name: _______________________________
Date: _________
Teacher: _______________________
Class: ________________________ Lesson: ________________
Skills
Criteria
1
Student is late to
class more than
once a week and/or
has poor
attendance of
classes.
Student never
contributes to class
by offering ideas
and asking
questions.
Student is late to
class more than
once a week and/or
has poor
attendance of
classes.
Student rarely
by offering ideas
and asking
questions.
Listening Skills
Student never
listens when others
talk, both in groups
and in class.
Behaviour
Preparation
Attendance / Promptness
Level Of Engagement In Class
Points
3
Student is late to
class once every
two weeks and
regularly attends
classes.
Student is always
prompt and
regularly attends
classes.
Student proactively
by offering ideas
and asking
questions once per
class.
Student always
by offering ideas
and asking
questions more
than once per class.
Student rarely
listens when others
and in class.
Student sometimes
listens when others
and in class.
Student almost
always listens
when others talk,
both in groups and
in class.
Student almost
always displays
disruptive behaviour
during class.
Student often
displays disruptive
behaviour during
class.
Student rarely
displays disruptive
behaviour during
class.
Student almost
never displays
disruptive behaviour
during class.
Student is almost
never prepared for
class with
assignments and
required class
materials.
Student is rarely
prepared for class
with assignments
and required class
materials.
Student is usually
prepared for class
with assignments
and required class
materials.
Student is almost
always prepared for
class with
assignments and
required class
materials.
Total points
PHOTOCOPIABLE
Teacher comments:
Taken and adapted from: www.teach-nology.com
162
BEHAVIOUR
Name: _______________________________
Date: _________
Teacher: _______________________
Class: ________________________ Lesson: ________________
Skills
Criteria
Points
Distraction
Distracts
instruction several
times during a
class period.
Distracts
instruction 2-3
times during a class
period.
Distracts
instruction once
during a class
period.
Does not distract

instruction during a
class period.
Leadership
Never displays
leadership
Does not
participate at all in
class activities.
Rarely displays
leadership
Participates in
some class
activities.
Generally displays
leadership
Participates in
most class
activities.
Displays leadership
and is positive
Participates in all
class activities.
Cooperation
Never listens,
shares and
supports the
efforts of others.
Rarely listens,
shares and
supports the efforts
of others.
Generally listens,
shares and
supports the
efforts of others.
Always listens,
shares, and
supports the efforts
of others.
Attitude to group work
Often is publicly
critical of the work
of other members
of the group.
Occasionally is
publicly critical of
the work of other
members of the
group.
Rarely is publicly
critical of the
project or the work
of others.
Never is publicly
critical of the
project or the work
of others.
Attitude about the task(s)
Repeatedly has a
negative attitude
about the task(s).
Rarely has a
positive attitude
about the task(s).
Generally has a
positive attitude
about the task(s).
Always has a
positive attitude
about the task(s).
Participation
Total points
PHOTOCOPIABLE
Teacher comments:
Taken and adapted from: http://rubistar.4teachers.org
163
EXTENDED-RESPONSE READING
Name: _______________________________
Date: _________
Teacher: _______________________
Class: ________________________ Lesson: ________________

Indicator
Level
Student uses information from the text to interpret significant concepts or make connections to other
situations or contexts logically through analysis, evaluation, inference, or comparison/contrast.
Student partially integrates interpretation of the text with text-based support, also uses relevant and
accurate references; some are specific; some may be general and not fully supported.
Student uses information from the text to make simplistic interpretations and demonstrates an
accurate but limited understanding of the text.
Student does not address the task, makes little or no interpretation of the text and demonstrates brief
or no understanding of the written work.
Yes/No
Initial level
Taken and adapted from: http://www.isbe.net/assessment/pdfs/reading_extended_rubric.pdf
The aim of this Reading Progress Map is to place students in one of these levels according to their reading skills to generate future
improvements.
See English Progress Map on page 15 of the Introduction.
INFERENCE FROM A TEXT

Name: _______________________________
Date: _________
Teacher: _______________________
Class: ________________________ Lesson: ________________

Indicator
Includes a connection between the text and the reader's background knowledge.
Includes details, predictions, or conclusions based on text information.
Attempts to make a prediction or draw a conclusion about the text, includes details that are not explicitly stated.
No evidence of inference (making a prediction, interpreting information or drawing a conclusion) about the
text, conveys a minimum amount of information about the written work.
PHOTOCOPIABLE
Level
Yes/No
Initial level
Adapted from: the Hill Middle School Staff, Long Beach Unified School District, 1/2000
The aim of this Inference Reading Progress Map is to place students in one of these levels according to their reading skills to generate
future improvements.
See English Progress Map on page 15 of the Introduction.
164
QUESTIONNAIRE
Development of Tasks
Student's Name: _______________________________
Date: _______________________
Questions
Always
Frequently
Occasionally
Hardly ever
Never
1. Can the student share ideas in

response to the class discussion?
2. Can the student participate actively

in spontaneous conversations?
3. Can the student practise asking

and answering question?
4. Can the student improve

vocabulary by keeping a notebook
with definitions and examples?
5. Is the student able to learn about

good online resources to improve
English vocabulary?
Total
Total
Poor
Fair
5 - 10
11 - 15
Good
16 - 20
Excellent
21 - 25
PHOTOCOPIABLE
Teacher comments:
Taken and adapted from: http://faculty.deanza.edu/
165
BIBLIOGRAPHY
The following web pages and books have been selected as
support and extra activities for teachers:
Listening comprehension:
http://www.elyrics.net
http://www.isabelperez.com/songs.htm
http://www.musicalenglishlessons.org/popsongs/
index.htm
http://www.saberingles.com.ar/songs/57.html
Book, Interchange Third Edition Class Audio, by Jack C. Richards
(author), Cambridge University Press, 2004.
Book, Edutainment: How to Teach Language With Fun & Games
(Paperback) by I. E. Hewitt (author), Delta Systems Co Inc; Bk &
CD edition (December 1998)
Book, Classroom Teacher's ESL Survival Kit No 1, by Elizabeth Claire
and Judie Haynes (authors), paperback, Pearson ESL, 1994.
Book, Simple Listening Activities, Jill & Charles Hadfield
(authors), Oxford Basics series, Oxford University Press, 2002.
Students learn better by listening to songs, videos or audio
recordings. So, it is advisable to work in pairs or small groups
and do not forget the three stages (before, while and after
listening). As a consolidation activity and if the text is
appropriate, ask them to sing together.
Reading comprehension:
http://www.abcteach.com/directory/
reading_comprehension/grades_24/informational/
http://www.readwritethink.org/lessons/
lesson_view.asp?id=152
http://www.breakingnewsenglish.com/
0805/080506-cyclone.html
Book, Reading, Writing and Learning in ESL: A Resource Book for
K-12 Teachers (3rd Edition), by Suzanne F. Peregoy (Author), Owen
F. Boyle (Author).Allyn & Bacon, Pearson, 2005.
Book, In the Middle: New Understanding about Writing,
Reading, and Learning (Workshop Series) by Nancie Atwell,
Heinemann, 1998.
Book, Reading Reminders: Tools, Tips, and Techniques by Jim
Burke, Boynton/Cook, 2003.
Students need to read in a wide variety of genres: narrative,
informational, procedural, biographical, persuasive, poetic; the
texts will become part of their background knowledge, providing
166
textual information to help them to draw conclusions and

interpret facts. When working with them, try to
follow the usual steps of before, while and after reading, and
don't forget to give students positive feedback on their work.
Speaking
http://www.onestopenglish.com/section.asp?section
Type=listsummary&catid=59406&docid=153770
http://www.eslflow.com/speakingandcommunica
tiveicebreakeractivities.html
http://www.proteacher.com/070001.shtml
http://iteslj.org/c/games.html
Book, Keep Talking: Communicative Fluency Activities for Language
Teaching (Cambridge Handbooks for Language Teachers) by
Friederike Klippel, Cambridge University Press, 1984.
Book, Communication Games Intermediate by Jill Hadfield,
Pearson, 2000.
Book, Pronunciation Games, Mark Hancock, Cambridge
University Press, 1995.
For a successful English speaking lesson it is recommended to
show pictures to the class and elicit students' ideas about them
by asking and answering questions. Role playing dialogues and
drills may help them to pay attention to the pronunciation and
intonation of words. Give students plenty and different ways of
practicing and encourage them to speak as much as they can.
Writing
http://esl.about.com/library/lessons/
bl_guided_writing.htm
http://www.readingrockets.org/article/5608
blwrite_informalletter.htm
http://www.englishclub.com/esl-articles/200004.htm
bl_guided_writing.htm
Book, Simple Writing Activities, Jill & Charles Hadfield, Oxford
Basics series, Oxford University Press, 2000.
Book, Choices, (Writing Projects for Students of Esl), Cambridge
University Press, 1999.
Writing is one of the most difficult tasks for students of English
as a foreign language, so it is advisable to offer interesting topics
that make them want to write.
Ajuste curricular: un apoyo al mejoramiento continuo del aprendizaje

Los textos escolares son una importante herramienta para la implementacin del currculum en la
sala de clases, constituyen un apoyo estratgico para el desarrollo del aprendizaje y son un recurso
pedaggico utilizado en diversos espacios educativos, tanto dentro del aula como fuera de ella.
En conjunto con los Programas de Estudio y los Mapas de Progreso, buscan apoyar el trabajo docente

el Currculum nacional.
Como es de conocimiento del sistema escolar, a partir de marzo del ao 2010, se comienza a
implementar el ajuste al Currculum nacional, que ha actualizado los Objetivos Fundamentales y
Contenidos Mnimos Obligatorios (OF-CMO) de los sectores de Lenguaje y Comunicacin, Matemtica,
! " #$ %
&
nuevo sector curricular para el idioma ingls y los OF-CMO de Idioma Extranjero seguirn vigentes
para las otras lenguas.
Este proceso de Ajuste Curricular es parte de una poltica de desarrollo curricular, a travs de la cual
se busca mejorar cclicamente el currculum, a la luz de lo observado en su implementacin y de los
cambios ocurridos tanto en la sociedad como en el conocimiento. En los 5 sectores de aprendizaje
'
'

la extensin del currculum, mejorar su secuencia y articulacin entre ciclos (tanto entre bsica y
media como con la educacin parvularia), visibilizar la presencia de las habilidades y fortalecer la
presencia transversal de las tecnologas de la informacin.
Es importante destacar que este ajuste al Currculum nacional mantiene el enfoque que orienta las
*
+ Un currculum para la vida, orientado al desarrollo de competencias que son relevantes para el
desenvolvimiento personal, social y laboral de los sujetos en la sociedad actual. En este sentido,
el proceso de ajuste curricular ha buscado reforzar la orientacin del currculum, enfocada en
el aprendizaje de conocimientos, habilidades y actitudes que facilitan y son requeridas en el
desenvolvimiento de los sujetos en diversos mbitos personales, sociales, ciudadanos, laborales
y de estudios.
+ Aprendizajes orientados hacia el desarrollo de competencias, entendidas como sistemas de
accin complejos que interrelacionan habilidades, conocimientos, motivaciones, orientaciones
valricas, actitudes y emociones, que en conjunto se movilizan para una accin efectiva en
determinados contextos.
+ Aprendizajes que buscan contribuir simultneamente a los propsitos del desarrollo personal
/ / #
+ Aprendizajes que promueven la formacin ciudadana de los alumnos y alumnas para que
participen activamente de la sociedad democrtica.
+ Aprendizajes que apoyan la insercin de los alumnos y alumnas en un mundo globalizado, de
modo complementario al reforzamiento de la identidad nacional.
La entrada en vigencia del Currculum ajustado se acompaar de Programas de Estudio, tambin

por parte de profesores y profesoras del pas. Para apoyar la implementacin curricular, en estos
programas se orientar respecto a cmo monitorear y evaluar el crecimiento del aprendizaje con el
apoyo de los Mapas de Progreso.
A continuacin se presenta un diagrama que representa la relacin entre los diferentes instrumentos

www.curriculum-mineduc.cl y www.textosescolares.cl

Ingles Profesor Teens Club

Cargado por

Información del documento

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Ingles Profesor Teens Club

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

GUA DIDCTICA PARA EL PROFESOR

INCLUYE TEXTO PARA EL ESTUDIANTE

Lina Alvarado Jantus

EDICIN ESPECIAL PARA EL MINISTERIO DE EDUCACIN

GUIA DIDCTICA PARA EL PROFESOR - INCLUYE TEXTO PARA EL ESTUDIANTE

Lina Alvarado Jantus

2010 Ediciones R&B

Lina Alvarado Jantus.

Gloria Caro Opazo.

UNIT 1: TEEN LIFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

DESCRIPTION OF THE COURSE

The Student's Book is divided into 5 units, each one based on a

speak and write will be more vividly experienced and, therefore

This is the icon used in the Teacher's Book to indicate that

A complete bibliography for the teacher.

READING LISTENING SPEAKING WRITING

Other icons used in the Students Book.

REAL LIFE SPOT

TEENS CLUB METHODOLOGY

form. Then they do controlled practice exercises where they apply

teachers to accommodate learner differences by varying

be used to inform the teacher and the students of the progress

SOME BASIC TEACHING REMINDERS

Don't insist on 100% accuracy all the time. Mistakes are a

Some methodological suggestions for skill

- Invite students to predict the content and to formulate

experiences. Make use of the illustrations provided and / or use

Developing reading skills

- Encourage reinforcement of vocabulary and grammar that

THE INTERNET IN THE CLASSROOM

Internet -assisted lessons may supplement teaching by adding an

The Internet gives great possibilities for students to work with

This icon indicates a digital resource used / suggested for an activity.

Tips to develop safe Internet lessons

LEARNING PROGRESS MAPS AS SUPPORT MATERIAL FOR TEACHING 11

The Chilean Ministry of Education has presented the community

used in the day to day classroom work to establish the students

Evaluation for Learning in Practice

Evaluation for Learning must necessarily involve the students in

This is a different conception of feedback. The food the teacher

What LPM are not

They do not state that learning is lineal (a sum of specific learnings)

They express knowledge and abilities, that is to say, the competences

They indicate what we value as learning goals and the sequence in

They are presented as concrete descriptions of learning and offer

They are not checklists for test correction.

They provide a guiding framework for teaching: they let users

They are not an instrument to classify students and they do not

How many LPM have been prepared?

of their secondary school education students should be able to

The Maps of English have been designed using the international

language expressed in simple sentences to language

English Progress Map

How can one recognise the level of learning? Examples of

Invent a title that represents the main idea of the text.

Some Commands and Instructions (TEACHERS)

Match the pictures.

SUGGESTED YEAR PLANNING

Use conjunctive connectors.

Exchange opinions about

Relate speakers and speech.

Develop respect and

Read a web page.

Reflect about the